http://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/api.php?action=feedcontributions&user=Cbigenho&feedformat=atomOLPC - User contributions [en]2024-03-29T11:39:07ZUser contributionsMediaWiki 1.31.7http://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon&diff=270210Help Activity refresh/Chapter/FotoToon2012-04-29T22:03:23Z<p>Cbigenho: </p>
<hr />
<div>[[File:BetterFTIcon.png]]<br />
='''About FotoToon 12'''=<br />
The '''FotoToon''' Activity will allow you to create everything from a simple "comic" strip to a long elaborate illustrated document. You will be able to import many kinds of images into the panes of your project and add text bubbles to help tell the story. You can use photo images taken with the XO or imported from a camera, drawings made with Activities such as Paint, and images of all kinds downloaded from the web. This could include photos, charts and graphs, maps, and the like. <br><br />
This introduction to '''FotoToon''' will show you how to get started with a simple 4 panel project. If you want to learn to do more, you can watch the videos about using '''FotoToon''' that are available for viewing here (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE).<br />
<br />
='''Where to get FotoToon 12'''=<br />
'''FotoToon''' is not included on the basic 11.3.0 (.883) release of Sugar. To use it, you must download it from the Sugar Labs Activity library at: http://activities.sugarlabs.org/es-ES/sugar/addon/4253 You will find instructions for downloading this and other Activities here: (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE)<BR> You will notice that the description of the Activity and other information are in Spanish. That is because '''FotoToon''' was developed in Argentina. However, don't worry! '''FotoToon''' works in other languages as well!<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''', like many other Sugar Activities, is often updated to fix "bugs" that users report. There was one update, from version 11 to version 12 during the time this instruction chapter was written. By the time you use it, there may be others. The changes are usually minor and should not interfere with the usefulness of this information. Always try to be sure you are using the latest version.<br />
<br />
='''Using FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
=='''The Toolbars'''==<br />
<br />
=== '''The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToon12 Main Screen.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
The '''FotoToon Toolbar''' has 13 icons including 2 with pulldown menus. The '''main FotoToon''' toolbar allows you to access many features of the Activity. Here is a description of what each of the icons will allow you to do:<br />
<br />
* 1. The '''FotoToon''' icon. When you hover your cursor over this icon you will open a small pulldown that allows you to export your work as an image. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 2. The '''Add Image''' icon. This icon allows you to add an image to your project. It can be a photo you take with the XO or digital camera, or import from the web. It can also be a picture, page, or project you create in another Sugar Activity.<br />
<br />
The next four icons allow you to add text to your drawings and photos. They include:<br />
* 3. A normal dialogue Globe<br />
* 4. A cloud shape to tell what a character is silently Thinking<br />
* 5. A dotted globe which indicates a character is talking in a Whisper<br />
* 6. An exclamation bubble to add things like "Pow!" "Bang!" and "Wham!"<br />
* 7. Is a box where you can put the Title of your project. Just above it is a box icon that allows you to add more rectangular text boxes to your project.<br />
* 8. The Movement icon allows you to add little curves to indicate motion, highlight an object with a sunburst, add some parallel lines to show horizontal or vertical motion, or add a little light bulb to show that someone had a bright idea.<br />
* 9. The circular arrow allows you to click on an object, then on this icon and rotate it clockwise 1/4 turn (90 degrees) with each click.<br />
* 10. This icon allows you to delete something you have added.<br />
* 11. This icon opens and closes the Text pulldown where you can select the font and size of your text as well as select bold, italics, or other colors for your words. Click it to open, and when finished, click again to close. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 12. The familiar stop-sign icon is one way to stop the '''FotoToon''' Activity. You can also use the keyboard shortcut: ctrl-Q.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
==='''The Text Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonTextPulldown.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
The '''Text Pulldown''' menu allows you to control the appearance of the text you add to your project. Generally, they apply to everything in the box or bubble you are currently working on. You do not have to highlight the text to change it.<br />
<br />
* 11a- Selecting this icon will change the text you are working on to '''Bold'''. Clicking it again reverts back to regular text,<br />
<br />
* 11b- Selecting this icon will change the text your are working on to ''Italics''.<br />
<br />
Note: clicking on both of these icons, in any order, will give you '''''Bold Italic''''' text. Clicking both again, in any order, will get you back to regular text.<br />
<br />
* 11c- Clicking on this icon will open the Text Color Pallete. See below for information on how to use it.<br />
<br />
* 11d- This is a non-functioning icon that identifies this as the Text Pulldown toolbar.<br />
<br />
* 11e- This little pull down allows you to choose the size of the text you are working on.<br />
<br />
* 11f- This pull down offers a choice of 37 different fonts, listed in alphabetical order. Some, such as "Ding Bats" don't actually produce anything. Be sure to test the font on your text to see if it looks the way you would like it to.<br />
<br />
==='''The Color Pallete Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:ScreenshotofFTColorPallete.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
The '''Color Pallete Pulldown''' allows you to choose the color of your font. It will apply to everything in the box or bubble but can vary from one box or bubble to the next as you choose. There are 12 preset colors you can use, or you can create a custom color by selecting one of the preset colors and dragging the sliders to give more or less Red, Green, or Blue in the selected color. The little circle at the top of the Color Pallete shows the current color. When you are satisfied with the color you have selected/modified, click on the little circle to accept the chosen color and close the Color Pallete. It may take a few seconds for the new color to appear in the text box. But, don't worry, it will!<br />
<br />
='''Learning with FotoToon 12'''=<br />
=='''Plan Ahead'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''' can be used for a wide variety of learning activities, but the general process is always similar. For the sample project in this section, we will make a 4 panel page using 4 photos. This is a good way to get started since the page can be printed on a single page. <br />
<br />
Here are the general steps you need to complete before you build your first FotoToon project:<br />
<br />
* '''Step One: Decide what your project will be about.''' You can tell a story about anything. For example, it could be about your pets, your home, your family, your town, or, even some photos you took at a party. Any topic is fine for our first project. The sample project will be about "Healthy Snacks" and the photos will be pictures of food.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Two: Make a plan.''' Before you begin you should make a plan that will guide you through the construction of your project. Some people like to draw a little sketch of each pane showing what will be in the picture and a suggestion for what words will be added. If you like the panes can each be on a separate small piece of paper so you can re-arrange them easily This is called a '''Story Board'''. You may have another way you would like to make your plan, just be sure to include information about what pictures you will use, where you will get them, and what text you plan to add.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Three: Gather your images.''' For starters, we will use images that were taken either with a camera, or using the '''Record Activity''' on the XO. Any image that can be imported to the '''Journal''' on your XO and viewed in '''Image Viewer''' can be used. It is a good idea to rename each of the photos you will be using in the Journal. The name can include the number of the pane you plan to use it in so it is easy to find when you begin putting things together.<br />
<br />
==='''Place Your Images'''===<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Journal''' and check to be sure your images are there and can be viewed in the Image Viewer (click on the file to open it and check). Be sure the images have names that include the number of the pane you plan to place them (1,2,3, or 4).<br />
<br />
* Open '''FotoToon''' and find the '''"Add Photo"''' icon (number 2 in the '''FotoToon''' main toolbar shown above). A list of available images will appear. Click on the one you want to put in the first pane. When it has loaded, you can either leave it or remove it with the minus sign icon (number 10 in the main toolbar shown above). '''Warning:''' You can only remove the last image entered. That is why it is important to number the images according to the panes you wish to place them in. After the first image has been placed, continue adding images until all four for your first project have been placed. If you decide later that you want to change their order after they have been placed, you will need to delete them and replace them in the new order. ''It is best to get your final placement before adding any text.''<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallImportImages.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
If you would like to use the same images that will be used in this sample project, you will find them at these links. Go to each link, upload the photo to a usb drive, plug it into your XO, and open by clicking on the image names. They will open in the Image Viewer and be automatically saved so you can access them for your project. <br />
<br />
* Pane-1 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:1-Apple-Fries.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-2 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:2-Soda-Milk.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-3 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:3-Cookies-Yogurt.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-4 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:4-HealthySnacks.png<br />
<br />
==='''Add Dialogue and Titles'''===<br />
<br />
If you have planned well with your storyboard, you will have a pretty good idea of what you want to put in your dialogue balloons and text boxes. You may even have a title in mind for your project. You can actually start this process anywhere in your project. All of the balloons and boxes you will be using to do this will be identified in the first image above, the '''The Main PhotoToonToolbar'''.<br />
<br />
* Making and placing your '''Title''': If you know what you would like your title to be, you can start with that. It can always be changed later. When you start a project in FotoToon there will already be a tiny box for the title in a narrow band across the top of the project window. You can drag the upper left corner of the box to enlarge it (look for the cursor arrow to change to a thinner double headed arrow). You can also move it around in the band across the top. Click on the box and type all or part of your title. Then you can change the type style and size using the pull downs in the '''Text Pulldown''' menu (see 11e and 11f in the picture above). Experiment until you find a style and size you like. You can also change the color of the type. Don't worry if it isn't perfect, you can always come back later and change it. Notice that you can erase part of the text by backspacing over it.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallAddTitle.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this image you can see that we selected '''bold''', a '''red''' color from the color palette, a '''type size''' of 48, and the '''Font''' "Georgia".<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Text Balloons''': You can place the text balloons wherever you like within a pane. Click on the pane, then on the balloon you want to use (see 3,4,and 5 above for explanations). The balloon will appear in the pane. You can drag it to the position where you want it, and also can drag the little tail to point to the source of the dialogue. Add the words to the balloon in the same way you added them to the Title box.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:AddBalloonsCropSM3.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this image you can see that we have added 4 dialogue balloons (#3 in the main toolbar). We could also have used the "cloud" balloon (#4 in the main toolbar), or the "whisper" balloon (#5 in the main toolbar). The first pane is OK, but the first balloon in the second pane needs to be dragged to a better shape and size. The second ballon in the second pane appears just as it does when it is first added. It still needs to have text added and to be resized (by dragging a corner). You can see that our '''type size''' is 12, '''text color''' is black, and we are still using the Georgia '''font'''.<br />
<br />
As you work with the various text items, you may wish to eliminate one entirely. Just click on it, then on the icon with the minus (-) sign (#10 in the main toolbar), and it will disappear.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Exclamation Balloons''': You may wish to include special exclamations to your project. Choose the exclamation balloon (# 6 in the main toolbar). It is possible to eliminate the one longer point on the balloon by dragging it so that it matched the others. Again, type into the balloon just as you did in the title box and dialogue balloons.<br />
<br />
* Adding extra '''Text Boxes''': You can add a text box anywhere in any pane by clicking on the pane and then on the box icon in the diagram (#7 in the main toolbar).<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:Exclamations&Boxes.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
In this example you can see we have added 4 '''exclamation balloons''' and one extra '''text box'''. We used the same '''text size''', '''font''', and '''color''' as in the rest of the project. You could choose to use different ones in your project.<br />
<br />
===Exporting Your Project===<br />
<br />
Now, if you have followed the instructions above, you should have a small, completed FotoToon Project. You may have decided to use the same photos that are in the sample, or you may have chosen to use images you have imported. These can be from your camera, your XO, downloads from the web, projects you have made in other Activities, drawings you made in Paint, or even photos you have modified in Paint (import, then add things and/or crop as you like). When finished, your project will look something like this:<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonFoodFinalSm.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Notice the little red cursor mark at the end of the title in the image. This export was done in FotoToon 11. The update, FotoToon 12 eliminates all stray cursors when exporting. Always be sure you are using the latest version of an Activity.<br />
<br />
Regardless of what you have made for your project, you will probably want to share it with others. You can do this as an email attachment or print it out as a paper copy. To do this, you need to '''export''' your project as an image stored in your Journal. The instructions for exporting your project are shown above. We will repeat them here as well.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
* Look in the Journal. Your project should appear there with the name you gave it before exporting. If you forgot to give it a name, it will just say "FotoToon." If this happened, rename it now, in the Journal before you forget to do it.<br />
<br />
='''Extending FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
FotoToon can be used for much more than the simple 4-pane example we built in the instructions. It can be adapted for use in many different subject areas where students and teachers can construct lessons on any topic. Here are some possible ideas for projects:<br />
<br />
* '''Student written comic books''' for language arts practice. Students can write their own little "graphic novels" and even print them and take home to share with friends and family.<br />
<br />
*'''Student produced magazine articles''' for any topic they and their teachers choose. A single page or two-page "spread" will make it like the ones you see in actual magazines. One or more panes on the page can be used just for text to extend the story. The text could be written in another program and imported as an image or put in a large text box that fills the pane. The advantage of doing it all in FotoToon is that it would be easier to edit and/or change the text there than if it is imported as an image. Some possible ideas for these articles could be:<br />
<br />
* Cooking favorite foods (with recipes)<br />
<br />
* Family pets (pictures and stories)<br />
<br />
* Our neighborhood (pictures and stories of places to see or problems that need to be solved)<br />
<br />
* Science articles with photos of plants, animals, rocks, etc. including descriptions and information<br />
<br />
* Historical articles with photos of people or places imported from the web<br />
<br />
* "How To" articles on any topic the students or teacher choose<br />
<br />
<br />
==='''Modifying FotoToon 12'''===<br />
<br />
FotoToon is free open source software and, as such is available to be modified by the user as they wish as long as they give the original source proper credit. So, if you are a programmer and want to change something to suit your needs, you may do so. Just don't forget to give credit where credit is due.<br />
<br />
If you are not a programmer, you can suggest changes or modifications to the Activity to the original programmer at the same place where you would report problems (see next section). If it is something that will improve the Activity and not interfere with other parts of it, the programmers will be happy to consider including it in a future update.<br />
<br />
Because there are always updates and improvements happening with this program, be sure to always check to be sure you have the latest version. <br />
<br />
==Where to report problems==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Credits==<br />
<br />
<br />
== FotoToon 12==</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=File:BetterFTIcon.png&diff=270209File:BetterFTIcon.png2012-04-29T22:02:17Z<p>Cbigenho: </p>
<hr />
<div></div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=File:FotoToonIcon.png&diff=270208File:FotoToonIcon.png2012-04-29T21:56:53Z<p>Cbigenho: uploaded a new version of "File:FotoToonIcon.png":&#32;Correct one (I hope)</p>
<hr />
<div>Icon and name to identify FotoToon</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=File:FotoToonIcon.png&diff=270207File:FotoToonIcon.png2012-04-29T21:54:49Z<p>Cbigenho: uploaded a new version of "File:FotoToonIcon.png":&#32;Removed version number</p>
<hr />
<div>Icon and name to identify FotoToon</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon&diff=270206Help Activity refresh/Chapter/FotoToon2012-04-29T21:36:26Z<p>Cbigenho: /* Extending FotoToon 12 */</p>
<hr />
<div>[[File:FotoToonIcon.png]]<br />
='''About FotoToon 12'''=<br />
The '''FotoToon''' Activity will allow you to create everything from a simple "comic" strip to a long elaborate illustrated document. You will be able to import many kinds of images into the panes of your project and add text bubbles to help tell the story. You can use photo images taken with the XO or imported from a camera, drawings made with Activities such as Paint, and images of all kinds downloaded from the web. This could include photos, charts and graphs, maps, and the like. <br><br />
This introduction to '''FotoToon''' will show you how to get started with a simple 4 panel project. If you want to learn to do more, you can watch the videos about using '''FotoToon''' that are available for viewing here (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE).<br />
<br />
='''Where to get FotoToon 12'''=<br />
'''FotoToon''' is not included on the basic 11.3.0 (.883) release of Sugar. To use it, you must download it from the Sugar Labs Activity library at: http://activities.sugarlabs.org/es-ES/sugar/addon/4253 You will find instructions for downloading this and other Activities here: (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE)<BR> You will notice that the description of the Activity and other information are in Spanish. That is because '''FotoToon''' was developed in Argentina. However, don't worry! '''FotoToon''' works in other languages as well!<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''', like many other Sugar Activities, is often updated to fix "bugs" that users report. There was one update, from version 11 to version 12 during the time this instruction chapter was written. By the time you use it, there may be others. The changes are usually minor and should not interfere with the usefulness of this information. Always try to be sure you are using the latest version.<br />
<br />
='''Using FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
=='''The Toolbars'''==<br />
<br />
=== '''The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToon12 Main Screen.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
The '''FotoToon Toolbar''' has 13 icons including 2 with pulldown menus. The '''main FotoToon''' toolbar allows you to access many features of the Activity. Here is a description of what each of the icons will allow you to do:<br />
<br />
* 1. The '''FotoToon''' icon. When you hover your cursor over this icon you will open a small pulldown that allows you to export your work as an image. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 2. The '''Add Image''' icon. This icon allows you to add an image to your project. It can be a photo you take with the XO or digital camera, or import from the web. It can also be a picture, page, or project you create in another Sugar Activity.<br />
<br />
The next four icons allow you to add text to your drawings and photos. They include:<br />
* 3. A normal dialogue Globe<br />
* 4. A cloud shape to tell what a character is silently Thinking<br />
* 5. A dotted globe which indicates a character is talking in a Whisper<br />
* 6. An exclamation bubble to add things like "Pow!" "Bang!" and "Wham!"<br />
* 7. Is a box where you can put the Title of your project. Just above it is a box icon that allows you to add more rectangular text boxes to your project.<br />
* 8. The Movement icon allows you to add little curves to indicate motion, highlight an object with a sunburst, add some parallel lines to show horizontal or vertical motion, or add a little light bulb to show that someone had a bright idea.<br />
* 9. The circular arrow allows you to click on an object, then on this icon and rotate it clockwise 1/4 turn (90 degrees) with each click.<br />
* 10. This icon allows you to delete something you have added.<br />
* 11. This icon opens and closes the Text pulldown where you can select the font and size of your text as well as select bold, italics, or other colors for your words. Click it to open, and when finished, click again to close. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 12. The familiar stop-sign icon is one way to stop the '''FotoToon''' Activity. You can also use the keyboard shortcut: ctrl-Q.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
==='''The Text Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonTextPulldown.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
The '''Text Pulldown''' menu allows you to control the appearance of the text you add to your project. Generally, they apply to everything in the box or bubble you are currently working on. You do not have to highlight the text to change it.<br />
<br />
* 11a- Selecting this icon will change the text you are working on to '''Bold'''. Clicking it again reverts back to regular text,<br />
<br />
* 11b- Selecting this icon will change the text your are working on to ''Italics''.<br />
<br />
Note: clicking on both of these icons, in any order, will give you '''''Bold Italic''''' text. Clicking both again, in any order, will get you back to regular text.<br />
<br />
* 11c- Clicking on this icon will open the Text Color Pallete. See below for information on how to use it.<br />
<br />
* 11d- This is a non-functioning icon that identifies this as the Text Pulldown toolbar.<br />
<br />
* 11e- This little pull down allows you to choose the size of the text you are working on.<br />
<br />
* 11f- This pull down offers a choice of 37 different fonts, listed in alphabetical order. Some, such as "Ding Bats" don't actually produce anything. Be sure to test the font on your text to see if it looks the way you would like it to.<br />
<br />
==='''The Color Pallete Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:ScreenshotofFTColorPallete.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
The '''Color Pallete Pulldown''' allows you to choose the color of your font. It will apply to everything in the box or bubble but can vary from one box or bubble to the next as you choose. There are 12 preset colors you can use, or you can create a custom color by selecting one of the preset colors and dragging the sliders to give more or less Red, Green, or Blue in the selected color. The little circle at the top of the Color Pallete shows the current color. When you are satisfied with the color you have selected/modified, click on the little circle to accept the chosen color and close the Color Pallete. It may take a few seconds for the new color to appear in the text box. But, don't worry, it will!<br />
<br />
='''Learning with FotoToon 12'''=<br />
=='''Plan Ahead'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''' can be used for a wide variety of learning activities, but the general process is always similar. For the sample project in this section, we will make a 4 panel page using 4 photos. This is a good way to get started since the page can be printed on a single page. <br />
<br />
Here are the general steps you need to complete before you build your first FotoToon project:<br />
<br />
* '''Step One: Decide what your project will be about.''' You can tell a story about anything. For example, it could be about your pets, your home, your family, your town, or, even some photos you took at a party. Any topic is fine for our first project. The sample project will be about "Healthy Snacks" and the photos will be pictures of food.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Two: Make a plan.''' Before you begin you should make a plan that will guide you through the construction of your project. Some people like to draw a little sketch of each pane showing what will be in the picture and a suggestion for what words will be added. If you like the panes can each be on a separate small piece of paper so you can re-arrange them easily This is called a '''Story Board'''. You may have another way you would like to make your plan, just be sure to include information about what pictures you will use, where you will get them, and what text you plan to add.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Three: Gather your images.''' For starters, we will use images that were taken either with a camera, or using the '''Record Activity''' on the XO. Any image that can be imported to the '''Journal''' on your XO and viewed in '''Image Viewer''' can be used. It is a good idea to rename each of the photos you will be using in the Journal. The name can include the number of the pane you plan to use it in so it is easy to find when you begin putting things together.<br />
<br />
==='''Place Your Images'''===<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Journal''' and check to be sure your images are there and can be viewed in the Image Viewer (click on the file to open it and check). Be sure the images have names that include the number of the pane you plan to place them (1,2,3, or 4).<br />
<br />
* Open '''FotoToon''' and find the '''"Add Photo"''' icon (number 2 in the '''FotoToon''' main toolbar shown above). A list of available images will appear. Click on the one you want to put in the first pane. When it has loaded, you can either leave it or remove it with the minus sign icon (number 10 in the main toolbar shown above). '''Warning:''' You can only remove the last image entered. That is why it is important to number the images according to the panes you wish to place them in. After the first image has been placed, continue adding images until all four for your first project have been placed. If you decide later that you want to change their order after they have been placed, you will need to delete them and replace them in the new order. ''It is best to get your final placement before adding any text.''<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallImportImages.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
If you would like to use the same images that will be used in this sample project, you will find them at these links. Go to each link, upload the photo to a usb drive, plug it into your XO, and open by clicking on the image names. They will open in the Image Viewer and be automatically saved so you can access them for your project. <br />
<br />
* Pane-1 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:1-Apple-Fries.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-2 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:2-Soda-Milk.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-3 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:3-Cookies-Yogurt.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-4 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:4-HealthySnacks.png<br />
<br />
==='''Add Dialogue and Titles'''===<br />
<br />
If you have planned well with your storyboard, you will have a pretty good idea of what you want to put in your dialogue balloons and text boxes. You may even have a title in mind for your project. You can actually start this process anywhere in your project. All of the balloons and boxes you will be using to do this will be identified in the first image above, the '''The Main PhotoToonToolbar'''.<br />
<br />
* Making and placing your '''Title''': If you know what you would like your title to be, you can start with that. It can always be changed later. When you start a project in FotoToon there will already be a tiny box for the title in a narrow band across the top of the project window. You can drag the upper left corner of the box to enlarge it (look for the cursor arrow to change to a thinner double headed arrow). You can also move it around in the band across the top. Click on the box and type all or part of your title. Then you can change the type style and size using the pull downs in the '''Text Pulldown''' menu (see 11e and 11f in the picture above). Experiment until you find a style and size you like. You can also change the color of the type. Don't worry if it isn't perfect, you can always come back later and change it. Notice that you can erase part of the text by backspacing over it.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallAddTitle.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this image you can see that we selected '''bold''', a '''red''' color from the color palette, a '''type size''' of 48, and the '''Font''' "Georgia".<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Text Balloons''': You can place the text balloons wherever you like within a pane. Click on the pane, then on the balloon you want to use (see 3,4,and 5 above for explanations). The balloon will appear in the pane. You can drag it to the position where you want it, and also can drag the little tail to point to the source of the dialogue. Add the words to the balloon in the same way you added them to the Title box.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:AddBalloonsCropSM3.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this image you can see that we have added 4 dialogue balloons (#3 in the main toolbar). We could also have used the "cloud" balloon (#4 in the main toolbar), or the "whisper" balloon (#5 in the main toolbar). The first pane is OK, but the first balloon in the second pane needs to be dragged to a better shape and size. The second ballon in the second pane appears just as it does when it is first added. It still needs to have text added and to be resized (by dragging a corner). You can see that our '''type size''' is 12, '''text color''' is black, and we are still using the Georgia '''font'''.<br />
<br />
As you work with the various text items, you may wish to eliminate one entirely. Just click on it, then on the icon with the minus (-) sign (#10 in the main toolbar), and it will disappear.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Exclamation Balloons''': You may wish to include special exclamations to your project. Choose the exclamation balloon (# 6 in the main toolbar). It is possible to eliminate the one longer point on the balloon by dragging it so that it matched the others. Again, type into the balloon just as you did in the title box and dialogue balloons.<br />
<br />
* Adding extra '''Text Boxes''': You can add a text box anywhere in any pane by clicking on the pane and then on the box icon in the diagram (#7 in the main toolbar).<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:Exclamations&Boxes.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
In this example you can see we have added 4 '''exclamation balloons''' and one extra '''text box'''. We used the same '''text size''', '''font''', and '''color''' as in the rest of the project. You could choose to use different ones in your project.<br />
<br />
===Exporting Your Project===<br />
<br />
Now, if you have followed the instructions above, you should have a small, completed FotoToon Project. You may have decided to use the same photos that are in the sample, or you may have chosen to use images you have imported. These can be from your camera, your XO, downloads from the web, projects you have made in other Activities, drawings you made in Paint, or even photos you have modified in Paint (import, then add things and/or crop as you like). When finished, your project will look something like this:<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonFoodFinalSm.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Notice the little red cursor mark at the end of the title in the image. This export was done in FotoToon 11. The update, FotoToon 12 eliminates all stray cursors when exporting. Always be sure you are using the latest version of an Activity.<br />
<br />
Regardless of what you have made for your project, you will probably want to share it with others. You can do this as an email attachment or print it out as a paper copy. To do this, you need to '''export''' your project as an image stored in your Journal. The instructions for exporting your project are shown above. We will repeat them here as well.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
* Look in the Journal. Your project should appear there with the name you gave it before exporting. If you forgot to give it a name, it will just say "FotoToon." If this happened, rename it now, in the Journal before you forget to do it.<br />
<br />
='''Extending FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
FotoToon can be used for much more than the simple 4-pane example we built in the instructions. It can be adapted for use in many different subject areas where students and teachers can construct lessons on any topic. Here are some possible ideas for projects:<br />
<br />
* '''Student written comic books''' for language arts practice. Students can write their own little "graphic novels" and even print them and take home to share with friends and family.<br />
<br />
*'''Student produced magazine articles''' for any topic they and their teachers choose. A single page or two-page "spread" will make it like the ones you see in actual magazines. One or more panes on the page can be used just for text to extend the story. The text could be written in another program and imported as an image or put in a large text box that fills the pane. The advantage of doing it all in FotoToon is that it would be easier to edit and/or change the text there than if it is imported as an image. Some possible ideas for these articles could be:<br />
<br />
* Cooking favorite foods (with recipes)<br />
<br />
* Family pets (pictures and stories)<br />
<br />
* Our neighborhood (pictures and stories of places to see or problems that need to be solved)<br />
<br />
* Science articles with photos of plants, animals, rocks, etc. including descriptions and information<br />
<br />
* Historical articles with photos of people or places imported from the web<br />
<br />
* "How To" articles on any topic the students or teacher choose<br />
<br />
<br />
==='''Modifying FotoToon 12'''===<br />
<br />
FotoToon is free open source software and, as such is available to be modified by the user as they wish as long as they give the original source proper credit. So, if you are a programmer and want to change something to suit your needs, you may do so. Just don't forget to give credit where credit is due.<br />
<br />
If you are not a programmer, you can suggest changes or modifications to the Activity to the original programmer at the same place where you would report problems (see next section). If it is something that will improve the Activity and not interfere with other parts of it, the programmers will be happy to consider including it in a future update.<br />
<br />
Because there are always updates and improvements happening with this program, be sure to always check to be sure you have the latest version. <br />
<br />
==Where to report problems==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Credits==<br />
<br />
<br />
== FotoToon 12==</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon&diff=270205Help Activity refresh/Chapter/FotoToon2012-04-29T21:16:30Z<p>Cbigenho: /* Extending FotoToon 12 */</p>
<hr />
<div>[[File:FotoToonIcon.png]]<br />
='''About FotoToon 12'''=<br />
The '''FotoToon''' Activity will allow you to create everything from a simple "comic" strip to a long elaborate illustrated document. You will be able to import many kinds of images into the panes of your project and add text bubbles to help tell the story. You can use photo images taken with the XO or imported from a camera, drawings made with Activities such as Paint, and images of all kinds downloaded from the web. This could include photos, charts and graphs, maps, and the like. <br><br />
This introduction to '''FotoToon''' will show you how to get started with a simple 4 panel project. If you want to learn to do more, you can watch the videos about using '''FotoToon''' that are available for viewing here (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE).<br />
<br />
='''Where to get FotoToon 12'''=<br />
'''FotoToon''' is not included on the basic 11.3.0 (.883) release of Sugar. To use it, you must download it from the Sugar Labs Activity library at: http://activities.sugarlabs.org/es-ES/sugar/addon/4253 You will find instructions for downloading this and other Activities here: (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE)<BR> You will notice that the description of the Activity and other information are in Spanish. That is because '''FotoToon''' was developed in Argentina. However, don't worry! '''FotoToon''' works in other languages as well!<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''', like many other Sugar Activities, is often updated to fix "bugs" that users report. There was one update, from version 11 to version 12 during the time this instruction chapter was written. By the time you use it, there may be others. The changes are usually minor and should not interfere with the usefulness of this information. Always try to be sure you are using the latest version.<br />
<br />
='''Using FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
=='''The Toolbars'''==<br />
<br />
=== '''The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToon12 Main Screen.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
The '''FotoToon Toolbar''' has 13 icons including 2 with pulldown menus. The '''main FotoToon''' toolbar allows you to access many features of the Activity. Here is a description of what each of the icons will allow you to do:<br />
<br />
* 1. The '''FotoToon''' icon. When you hover your cursor over this icon you will open a small pulldown that allows you to export your work as an image. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 2. The '''Add Image''' icon. This icon allows you to add an image to your project. It can be a photo you take with the XO or digital camera, or import from the web. It can also be a picture, page, or project you create in another Sugar Activity.<br />
<br />
The next four icons allow you to add text to your drawings and photos. They include:<br />
* 3. A normal dialogue Globe<br />
* 4. A cloud shape to tell what a character is silently Thinking<br />
* 5. A dotted globe which indicates a character is talking in a Whisper<br />
* 6. An exclamation bubble to add things like "Pow!" "Bang!" and "Wham!"<br />
* 7. Is a box where you can put the Title of your project. Just above it is a box icon that allows you to add more rectangular text boxes to your project.<br />
* 8. The Movement icon allows you to add little curves to indicate motion, highlight an object with a sunburst, add some parallel lines to show horizontal or vertical motion, or add a little light bulb to show that someone had a bright idea.<br />
* 9. The circular arrow allows you to click on an object, then on this icon and rotate it clockwise 1/4 turn (90 degrees) with each click.<br />
* 10. This icon allows you to delete something you have added.<br />
* 11. This icon opens and closes the Text pulldown where you can select the font and size of your text as well as select bold, italics, or other colors for your words. Click it to open, and when finished, click again to close. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 12. The familiar stop-sign icon is one way to stop the '''FotoToon''' Activity. You can also use the keyboard shortcut: ctrl-Q.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
==='''The Text Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonTextPulldown.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
The '''Text Pulldown''' menu allows you to control the appearance of the text you add to your project. Generally, they apply to everything in the box or bubble you are currently working on. You do not have to highlight the text to change it.<br />
<br />
* 11a- Selecting this icon will change the text you are working on to '''Bold'''. Clicking it again reverts back to regular text,<br />
<br />
* 11b- Selecting this icon will change the text your are working on to ''Italics''.<br />
<br />
Note: clicking on both of these icons, in any order, will give you '''''Bold Italic''''' text. Clicking both again, in any order, will get you back to regular text.<br />
<br />
* 11c- Clicking on this icon will open the Text Color Pallete. See below for information on how to use it.<br />
<br />
* 11d- This is a non-functioning icon that identifies this as the Text Pulldown toolbar.<br />
<br />
* 11e- This little pull down allows you to choose the size of the text you are working on.<br />
<br />
* 11f- This pull down offers a choice of 37 different fonts, listed in alphabetical order. Some, such as "Ding Bats" don't actually produce anything. Be sure to test the font on your text to see if it looks the way you would like it to.<br />
<br />
==='''The Color Pallete Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:ScreenshotofFTColorPallete.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
The '''Color Pallete Pulldown''' allows you to choose the color of your font. It will apply to everything in the box or bubble but can vary from one box or bubble to the next as you choose. There are 12 preset colors you can use, or you can create a custom color by selecting one of the preset colors and dragging the sliders to give more or less Red, Green, or Blue in the selected color. The little circle at the top of the Color Pallete shows the current color. When you are satisfied with the color you have selected/modified, click on the little circle to accept the chosen color and close the Color Pallete. It may take a few seconds for the new color to appear in the text box. But, don't worry, it will!<br />
<br />
='''Learning with FotoToon 12'''=<br />
=='''Plan Ahead'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''' can be used for a wide variety of learning activities, but the general process is always similar. For the sample project in this section, we will make a 4 panel page using 4 photos. This is a good way to get started since the page can be printed on a single page. <br />
<br />
Here are the general steps you need to complete before you build your first FotoToon project:<br />
<br />
* '''Step One: Decide what your project will be about.''' You can tell a story about anything. For example, it could be about your pets, your home, your family, your town, or, even some photos you took at a party. Any topic is fine for our first project. The sample project will be about "Healthy Snacks" and the photos will be pictures of food.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Two: Make a plan.''' Before you begin you should make a plan that will guide you through the construction of your project. Some people like to draw a little sketch of each pane showing what will be in the picture and a suggestion for what words will be added. If you like the panes can each be on a separate small piece of paper so you can re-arrange them easily This is called a '''Story Board'''. You may have another way you would like to make your plan, just be sure to include information about what pictures you will use, where you will get them, and what text you plan to add.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Three: Gather your images.''' For starters, we will use images that were taken either with a camera, or using the '''Record Activity''' on the XO. Any image that can be imported to the '''Journal''' on your XO and viewed in '''Image Viewer''' can be used. It is a good idea to rename each of the photos you will be using in the Journal. The name can include the number of the pane you plan to use it in so it is easy to find when you begin putting things together.<br />
<br />
==='''Place Your Images'''===<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Journal''' and check to be sure your images are there and can be viewed in the Image Viewer (click on the file to open it and check). Be sure the images have names that include the number of the pane you plan to place them (1,2,3, or 4).<br />
<br />
* Open '''FotoToon''' and find the '''"Add Photo"''' icon (number 2 in the '''FotoToon''' main toolbar shown above). A list of available images will appear. Click on the one you want to put in the first pane. When it has loaded, you can either leave it or remove it with the minus sign icon (number 10 in the main toolbar shown above). '''Warning:''' You can only remove the last image entered. That is why it is important to number the images according to the panes you wish to place them in. After the first image has been placed, continue adding images until all four for your first project have been placed. If you decide later that you want to change their order after they have been placed, you will need to delete them and replace them in the new order. ''It is best to get your final placement before adding any text.''<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallImportImages.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
If you would like to use the same images that will be used in this sample project, you will find them at these links. Go to each link, upload the photo to a usb drive, plug it into your XO, and open by clicking on the image names. They will open in the Image Viewer and be automatically saved so you can access them for your project. <br />
<br />
* Pane-1 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:1-Apple-Fries.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-2 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:2-Soda-Milk.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-3 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:3-Cookies-Yogurt.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-4 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:4-HealthySnacks.png<br />
<br />
==='''Add Dialogue and Titles'''===<br />
<br />
If you have planned well with your storyboard, you will have a pretty good idea of what you want to put in your dialogue balloons and text boxes. You may even have a title in mind for your project. You can actually start this process anywhere in your project. All of the balloons and boxes you will be using to do this will be identified in the first image above, the '''The Main PhotoToonToolbar'''.<br />
<br />
* Making and placing your '''Title''': If you know what you would like your title to be, you can start with that. It can always be changed later. When you start a project in FotoToon there will already be a tiny box for the title in a narrow band across the top of the project window. You can drag the upper left corner of the box to enlarge it (look for the cursor arrow to change to a thinner double headed arrow). You can also move it around in the band across the top. Click on the box and type all or part of your title. Then you can change the type style and size using the pull downs in the '''Text Pulldown''' menu (see 11e and 11f in the picture above). Experiment until you find a style and size you like. You can also change the color of the type. Don't worry if it isn't perfect, you can always come back later and change it. Notice that you can erase part of the text by backspacing over it.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallAddTitle.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this image you can see that we selected '''bold''', a '''red''' color from the color palette, a '''type size''' of 48, and the '''Font''' "Georgia".<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Text Balloons''': You can place the text balloons wherever you like within a pane. Click on the pane, then on the balloon you want to use (see 3,4,and 5 above for explanations). The balloon will appear in the pane. You can drag it to the position where you want it, and also can drag the little tail to point to the source of the dialogue. Add the words to the balloon in the same way you added them to the Title box.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:AddBalloonsCropSM3.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this image you can see that we have added 4 dialogue balloons (#3 in the main toolbar). We could also have used the "cloud" balloon (#4 in the main toolbar), or the "whisper" balloon (#5 in the main toolbar). The first pane is OK, but the first balloon in the second pane needs to be dragged to a better shape and size. The second ballon in the second pane appears just as it does when it is first added. It still needs to have text added and to be resized (by dragging a corner). You can see that our '''type size''' is 12, '''text color''' is black, and we are still using the Georgia '''font'''.<br />
<br />
As you work with the various text items, you may wish to eliminate one entirely. Just click on it, then on the icon with the minus (-) sign (#10 in the main toolbar), and it will disappear.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Exclamation Balloons''': You may wish to include special exclamations to your project. Choose the exclamation balloon (# 6 in the main toolbar). It is possible to eliminate the one longer point on the balloon by dragging it so that it matched the others. Again, type into the balloon just as you did in the title box and dialogue balloons.<br />
<br />
* Adding extra '''Text Boxes''': You can add a text box anywhere in any pane by clicking on the pane and then on the box icon in the diagram (#7 in the main toolbar).<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:Exclamations&Boxes.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
In this example you can see we have added 4 '''exclamation balloons''' and one extra '''text box'''. We used the same '''text size''', '''font''', and '''color''' as in the rest of the project. You could choose to use different ones in your project.<br />
<br />
===Exporting Your Project===<br />
<br />
Now, if you have followed the instructions above, you should have a small, completed FotoToon Project. You may have decided to use the same photos that are in the sample, or you may have chosen to use images you have imported. These can be from your camera, your XO, downloads from the web, projects you have made in other Activities, drawings you made in Paint, or even photos you have modified in Paint (import, then add things and/or crop as you like). When finished, your project will look something like this:<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonFoodFinalSm.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Notice the little red cursor mark at the end of the title in the image. This export was done in FotoToon 11. The update, FotoToon 12 eliminates all stray cursors when exporting. Always be sure you are using the latest version of an Activity.<br />
<br />
Regardless of what you have made for your project, you will probably want to share it with others. You can do this as an email attachment or print it out as a paper copy. To do this, you need to '''export''' your project as an image stored in your Journal. The instructions for exporting your project are shown above. We will repeat them here as well.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
* Look in the Journal. Your project should appear there with the name you gave it before exporting. If you forgot to give it a name, it will just say "FotoToon." If this happened, rename it now, in the Journal before you forget to do it.<br />
<br />
='''Extending FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
FotoToon can be used for much more than the simple 4-pane example we built in the instructions. It can be adapted for use in many different subject areas where students and teachers can construct lessons on any topic. Here are some possible ideas for projects:<br />
<br />
* '''Student written comic books''' for language arts practice. Students can write their own little "graphic novels" and even print them and take home to share with friends and family.<br />
<br />
*'''Student produced magazine articles'' for any topic they and their teachers choose.<br />
<br />
==Modifying FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
==Where to report problems==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Credits==<br />
<br />
<br />
== FotoToon 12==</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon&diff=270204Help Activity refresh/Chapter/FotoToon2012-04-29T21:00:32Z<p>Cbigenho: /* The Color Pallete Pulldown */</p>
<hr />
<div>[[File:FotoToonIcon.png]]<br />
='''About FotoToon 12'''=<br />
The '''FotoToon''' Activity will allow you to create everything from a simple "comic" strip to a long elaborate illustrated document. You will be able to import many kinds of images into the panes of your project and add text bubbles to help tell the story. You can use photo images taken with the XO or imported from a camera, drawings made with Activities such as Paint, and images of all kinds downloaded from the web. This could include photos, charts and graphs, maps, and the like. <br><br />
This introduction to '''FotoToon''' will show you how to get started with a simple 4 panel project. If you want to learn to do more, you can watch the videos about using '''FotoToon''' that are available for viewing here (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE).<br />
<br />
='''Where to get FotoToon 12'''=<br />
'''FotoToon''' is not included on the basic 11.3.0 (.883) release of Sugar. To use it, you must download it from the Sugar Labs Activity library at: http://activities.sugarlabs.org/es-ES/sugar/addon/4253 You will find instructions for downloading this and other Activities here: (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE)<BR> You will notice that the description of the Activity and other information are in Spanish. That is because '''FotoToon''' was developed in Argentina. However, don't worry! '''FotoToon''' works in other languages as well!<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''', like many other Sugar Activities, is often updated to fix "bugs" that users report. There was one update, from version 11 to version 12 during the time this instruction chapter was written. By the time you use it, there may be others. The changes are usually minor and should not interfere with the usefulness of this information. Always try to be sure you are using the latest version.<br />
<br />
='''Using FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
=='''The Toolbars'''==<br />
<br />
=== '''The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToon12 Main Screen.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
The '''FotoToon Toolbar''' has 13 icons including 2 with pulldown menus. The '''main FotoToon''' toolbar allows you to access many features of the Activity. Here is a description of what each of the icons will allow you to do:<br />
<br />
* 1. The '''FotoToon''' icon. When you hover your cursor over this icon you will open a small pulldown that allows you to export your work as an image. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 2. The '''Add Image''' icon. This icon allows you to add an image to your project. It can be a photo you take with the XO or digital camera, or import from the web. It can also be a picture, page, or project you create in another Sugar Activity.<br />
<br />
The next four icons allow you to add text to your drawings and photos. They include:<br />
* 3. A normal dialogue Globe<br />
* 4. A cloud shape to tell what a character is silently Thinking<br />
* 5. A dotted globe which indicates a character is talking in a Whisper<br />
* 6. An exclamation bubble to add things like "Pow!" "Bang!" and "Wham!"<br />
* 7. Is a box where you can put the Title of your project. Just above it is a box icon that allows you to add more rectangular text boxes to your project.<br />
* 8. The Movement icon allows you to add little curves to indicate motion, highlight an object with a sunburst, add some parallel lines to show horizontal or vertical motion, or add a little light bulb to show that someone had a bright idea.<br />
* 9. The circular arrow allows you to click on an object, then on this icon and rotate it clockwise 1/4 turn (90 degrees) with each click.<br />
* 10. This icon allows you to delete something you have added.<br />
* 11. This icon opens and closes the Text pulldown where you can select the font and size of your text as well as select bold, italics, or other colors for your words. Click it to open, and when finished, click again to close. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 12. The familiar stop-sign icon is one way to stop the '''FotoToon''' Activity. You can also use the keyboard shortcut: ctrl-Q.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
==='''The Text Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonTextPulldown.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
The '''Text Pulldown''' menu allows you to control the appearance of the text you add to your project. Generally, they apply to everything in the box or bubble you are currently working on. You do not have to highlight the text to change it.<br />
<br />
* 11a- Selecting this icon will change the text you are working on to '''Bold'''. Clicking it again reverts back to regular text,<br />
<br />
* 11b- Selecting this icon will change the text your are working on to ''Italics''.<br />
<br />
Note: clicking on both of these icons, in any order, will give you '''''Bold Italic''''' text. Clicking both again, in any order, will get you back to regular text.<br />
<br />
* 11c- Clicking on this icon will open the Text Color Pallete. See below for information on how to use it.<br />
<br />
* 11d- This is a non-functioning icon that identifies this as the Text Pulldown toolbar.<br />
<br />
* 11e- This little pull down allows you to choose the size of the text you are working on.<br />
<br />
* 11f- This pull down offers a choice of 37 different fonts, listed in alphabetical order. Some, such as "Ding Bats" don't actually produce anything. Be sure to test the font on your text to see if it looks the way you would like it to.<br />
<br />
==='''The Color Pallete Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:ScreenshotofFTColorPallete.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
The '''Color Pallete Pulldown''' allows you to choose the color of your font. It will apply to everything in the box or bubble but can vary from one box or bubble to the next as you choose. There are 12 preset colors you can use, or you can create a custom color by selecting one of the preset colors and dragging the sliders to give more or less Red, Green, or Blue in the selected color. The little circle at the top of the Color Pallete shows the current color. When you are satisfied with the color you have selected/modified, click on the little circle to accept the chosen color and close the Color Pallete. It may take a few seconds for the new color to appear in the text box. But, don't worry, it will!<br />
<br />
='''Learning with FotoToon 12'''=<br />
=='''Plan Ahead'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''' can be used for a wide variety of learning activities, but the general process is always similar. For the sample project in this section, we will make a 4 panel page using 4 photos. This is a good way to get started since the page can be printed on a single page. <br />
<br />
Here are the general steps you need to complete before you build your first FotoToon project:<br />
<br />
* '''Step One: Decide what your project will be about.''' You can tell a story about anything. For example, it could be about your pets, your home, your family, your town, or, even some photos you took at a party. Any topic is fine for our first project. The sample project will be about "Healthy Snacks" and the photos will be pictures of food.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Two: Make a plan.''' Before you begin you should make a plan that will guide you through the construction of your project. Some people like to draw a little sketch of each pane showing what will be in the picture and a suggestion for what words will be added. If you like the panes can each be on a separate small piece of paper so you can re-arrange them easily This is called a '''Story Board'''. You may have another way you would like to make your plan, just be sure to include information about what pictures you will use, where you will get them, and what text you plan to add.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Three: Gather your images.''' For starters, we will use images that were taken either with a camera, or using the '''Record Activity''' on the XO. Any image that can be imported to the '''Journal''' on your XO and viewed in '''Image Viewer''' can be used. It is a good idea to rename each of the photos you will be using in the Journal. The name can include the number of the pane you plan to use it in so it is easy to find when you begin putting things together.<br />
<br />
==='''Place Your Images'''===<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Journal''' and check to be sure your images are there and can be viewed in the Image Viewer (click on the file to open it and check). Be sure the images have names that include the number of the pane you plan to place them (1,2,3, or 4).<br />
<br />
* Open '''FotoToon''' and find the '''"Add Photo"''' icon (number 2 in the '''FotoToon''' main toolbar shown above). A list of available images will appear. Click on the one you want to put in the first pane. When it has loaded, you can either leave it or remove it with the minus sign icon (number 10 in the main toolbar shown above). '''Warning:''' You can only remove the last image entered. That is why it is important to number the images according to the panes you wish to place them in. After the first image has been placed, continue adding images until all four for your first project have been placed. If you decide later that you want to change their order after they have been placed, you will need to delete them and replace them in the new order. ''It is best to get your final placement before adding any text.''<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallImportImages.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
If you would like to use the same images that will be used in this sample project, you will find them at these links. Go to each link, upload the photo to a usb drive, plug it into your XO, and open by clicking on the image names. They will open in the Image Viewer and be automatically saved so you can access them for your project. <br />
<br />
* Pane-1 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:1-Apple-Fries.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-2 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:2-Soda-Milk.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-3 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:3-Cookies-Yogurt.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-4 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:4-HealthySnacks.png<br />
<br />
==='''Add Dialogue and Titles'''===<br />
<br />
If you have planned well with your storyboard, you will have a pretty good idea of what you want to put in your dialogue balloons and text boxes. You may even have a title in mind for your project. You can actually start this process anywhere in your project. All of the balloons and boxes you will be using to do this will be identified in the first image above, the '''The Main PhotoToonToolbar'''.<br />
<br />
* Making and placing your '''Title''': If you know what you would like your title to be, you can start with that. It can always be changed later. When you start a project in FotoToon there will already be a tiny box for the title in a narrow band across the top of the project window. You can drag the upper left corner of the box to enlarge it (look for the cursor arrow to change to a thinner double headed arrow). You can also move it around in the band across the top. Click on the box and type all or part of your title. Then you can change the type style and size using the pull downs in the '''Text Pulldown''' menu (see 11e and 11f in the picture above). Experiment until you find a style and size you like. You can also change the color of the type. Don't worry if it isn't perfect, you can always come back later and change it. Notice that you can erase part of the text by backspacing over it.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallAddTitle.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this image you can see that we selected '''bold''', a '''red''' color from the color palette, a '''type size''' of 48, and the '''Font''' "Georgia".<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Text Balloons''': You can place the text balloons wherever you like within a pane. Click on the pane, then on the balloon you want to use (see 3,4,and 5 above for explanations). The balloon will appear in the pane. You can drag it to the position where you want it, and also can drag the little tail to point to the source of the dialogue. Add the words to the balloon in the same way you added them to the Title box.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:AddBalloonsCropSM3.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this image you can see that we have added 4 dialogue balloons (#3 in the main toolbar). We could also have used the "cloud" balloon (#4 in the main toolbar), or the "whisper" balloon (#5 in the main toolbar). The first pane is OK, but the first balloon in the second pane needs to be dragged to a better shape and size. The second ballon in the second pane appears just as it does when it is first added. It still needs to have text added and to be resized (by dragging a corner). You can see that our '''type size''' is 12, '''text color''' is black, and we are still using the Georgia '''font'''.<br />
<br />
As you work with the various text items, you may wish to eliminate one entirely. Just click on it, then on the icon with the minus (-) sign (#10 in the main toolbar), and it will disappear.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Exclamation Balloons''': You may wish to include special exclamations to your project. Choose the exclamation balloon (# 6 in the main toolbar). It is possible to eliminate the one longer point on the balloon by dragging it so that it matched the others. Again, type into the balloon just as you did in the title box and dialogue balloons.<br />
<br />
* Adding extra '''Text Boxes''': You can add a text box anywhere in any pane by clicking on the pane and then on the box icon in the diagram (#7 in the main toolbar).<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:Exclamations&Boxes.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
In this example you can see we have added 4 '''exclamation balloons''' and one extra '''text box'''. We used the same '''text size''', '''font''', and '''color''' as in the rest of the project. You could choose to use different ones in your project.<br />
<br />
===Exporting Your Project===<br />
<br />
Now, if you have followed the instructions above, you should have a small, completed FotoToon Project. You may have decided to use the same photos that are in the sample, or you may have chosen to use images you have imported. These can be from your camera, your XO, downloads from the web, projects you have made in other Activities, drawings you made in Paint, or even photos you have modified in Paint (import, then add things and/or crop as you like). When finished, your project will look something like this:<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonFoodFinalSm.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Notice the little red cursor mark at the end of the title in the image. This export was done in FotoToon 11. The update, FotoToon 12 eliminates all stray cursors when exporting. Always be sure you are using the latest version of an Activity.<br />
<br />
Regardless of what you have made for your project, you will probably want to share it with others. You can do this as an email attachment or print it out as a paper copy. To do this, you need to '''export''' your project as an image stored in your Journal. The instructions for exporting your project are shown above. We will repeat them here as well.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
* Look in the Journal. Your project should appear there with the name you gave it before exporting. If you forgot to give it a name, it will just say "FotoToon." If this happened, rename it now, in the Journal before you forget to do it.<br />
<br />
==Extending FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Modifying FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
==Where to report problems==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Credits==<br />
<br />
<br />
== FotoToon 12==</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon&diff=270203Help Activity refresh/Chapter/FotoToon2012-04-29T21:00:12Z<p>Cbigenho: /* The Text Pulldown */</p>
<hr />
<div>[[File:FotoToonIcon.png]]<br />
='''About FotoToon 12'''=<br />
The '''FotoToon''' Activity will allow you to create everything from a simple "comic" strip to a long elaborate illustrated document. You will be able to import many kinds of images into the panes of your project and add text bubbles to help tell the story. You can use photo images taken with the XO or imported from a camera, drawings made with Activities such as Paint, and images of all kinds downloaded from the web. This could include photos, charts and graphs, maps, and the like. <br><br />
This introduction to '''FotoToon''' will show you how to get started with a simple 4 panel project. If you want to learn to do more, you can watch the videos about using '''FotoToon''' that are available for viewing here (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE).<br />
<br />
='''Where to get FotoToon 12'''=<br />
'''FotoToon''' is not included on the basic 11.3.0 (.883) release of Sugar. To use it, you must download it from the Sugar Labs Activity library at: http://activities.sugarlabs.org/es-ES/sugar/addon/4253 You will find instructions for downloading this and other Activities here: (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE)<BR> You will notice that the description of the Activity and other information are in Spanish. That is because '''FotoToon''' was developed in Argentina. However, don't worry! '''FotoToon''' works in other languages as well!<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''', like many other Sugar Activities, is often updated to fix "bugs" that users report. There was one update, from version 11 to version 12 during the time this instruction chapter was written. By the time you use it, there may be others. The changes are usually minor and should not interfere with the usefulness of this information. Always try to be sure you are using the latest version.<br />
<br />
='''Using FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
=='''The Toolbars'''==<br />
<br />
=== '''The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToon12 Main Screen.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
The '''FotoToon Toolbar''' has 13 icons including 2 with pulldown menus. The '''main FotoToon''' toolbar allows you to access many features of the Activity. Here is a description of what each of the icons will allow you to do:<br />
<br />
* 1. The '''FotoToon''' icon. When you hover your cursor over this icon you will open a small pulldown that allows you to export your work as an image. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 2. The '''Add Image''' icon. This icon allows you to add an image to your project. It can be a photo you take with the XO or digital camera, or import from the web. It can also be a picture, page, or project you create in another Sugar Activity.<br />
<br />
The next four icons allow you to add text to your drawings and photos. They include:<br />
* 3. A normal dialogue Globe<br />
* 4. A cloud shape to tell what a character is silently Thinking<br />
* 5. A dotted globe which indicates a character is talking in a Whisper<br />
* 6. An exclamation bubble to add things like "Pow!" "Bang!" and "Wham!"<br />
* 7. Is a box where you can put the Title of your project. Just above it is a box icon that allows you to add more rectangular text boxes to your project.<br />
* 8. The Movement icon allows you to add little curves to indicate motion, highlight an object with a sunburst, add some parallel lines to show horizontal or vertical motion, or add a little light bulb to show that someone had a bright idea.<br />
* 9. The circular arrow allows you to click on an object, then on this icon and rotate it clockwise 1/4 turn (90 degrees) with each click.<br />
* 10. This icon allows you to delete something you have added.<br />
* 11. This icon opens and closes the Text pulldown where you can select the font and size of your text as well as select bold, italics, or other colors for your words. Click it to open, and when finished, click again to close. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 12. The familiar stop-sign icon is one way to stop the '''FotoToon''' Activity. You can also use the keyboard shortcut: ctrl-Q.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
==='''The Text Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonTextPulldown.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
The '''Text Pulldown''' menu allows you to control the appearance of the text you add to your project. Generally, they apply to everything in the box or bubble you are currently working on. You do not have to highlight the text to change it.<br />
<br />
* 11a- Selecting this icon will change the text you are working on to '''Bold'''. Clicking it again reverts back to regular text,<br />
<br />
* 11b- Selecting this icon will change the text your are working on to ''Italics''.<br />
<br />
Note: clicking on both of these icons, in any order, will give you '''''Bold Italic''''' text. Clicking both again, in any order, will get you back to regular text.<br />
<br />
* 11c- Clicking on this icon will open the Text Color Pallete. See below for information on how to use it.<br />
<br />
* 11d- This is a non-functioning icon that identifies this as the Text Pulldown toolbar.<br />
<br />
* 11e- This little pull down allows you to choose the size of the text you are working on.<br />
<br />
* 11f- This pull down offers a choice of 37 different fonts, listed in alphabetical order. Some, such as "Ding Bats" don't actually produce anything. Be sure to test the font on your text to see if it looks the way you would like it to.<br />
<br />
==='''The Color Pallete Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:ScreenshotofFTColorPallete.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Color Pallete Pulldown''' allows you to choose the color of your font. It will apply to everything in the box or bubble but can vary from one box or bubble to the next as you choose. There are 12 preset colors you can use, or you can create a custom color by selecting one of the preset colors and dragging the sliders to give more or less Red, Green, or Blue in the selected color. The little circle at the top of the Color Pallete shows the current color. When you are satisfied with the color you have selected/modified, click on the little circle to accept the chosen color and close the Color Pallete. It may take a few seconds for the new color to appear in the text box. But, don't worry, it will!<br />
<br />
='''Learning with FotoToon 12'''=<br />
=='''Plan Ahead'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''' can be used for a wide variety of learning activities, but the general process is always similar. For the sample project in this section, we will make a 4 panel page using 4 photos. This is a good way to get started since the page can be printed on a single page. <br />
<br />
Here are the general steps you need to complete before you build your first FotoToon project:<br />
<br />
* '''Step One: Decide what your project will be about.''' You can tell a story about anything. For example, it could be about your pets, your home, your family, your town, or, even some photos you took at a party. Any topic is fine for our first project. The sample project will be about "Healthy Snacks" and the photos will be pictures of food.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Two: Make a plan.''' Before you begin you should make a plan that will guide you through the construction of your project. Some people like to draw a little sketch of each pane showing what will be in the picture and a suggestion for what words will be added. If you like the panes can each be on a separate small piece of paper so you can re-arrange them easily This is called a '''Story Board'''. You may have another way you would like to make your plan, just be sure to include information about what pictures you will use, where you will get them, and what text you plan to add.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Three: Gather your images.''' For starters, we will use images that were taken either with a camera, or using the '''Record Activity''' on the XO. Any image that can be imported to the '''Journal''' on your XO and viewed in '''Image Viewer''' can be used. It is a good idea to rename each of the photos you will be using in the Journal. The name can include the number of the pane you plan to use it in so it is easy to find when you begin putting things together.<br />
<br />
==='''Place Your Images'''===<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Journal''' and check to be sure your images are there and can be viewed in the Image Viewer (click on the file to open it and check). Be sure the images have names that include the number of the pane you plan to place them (1,2,3, or 4).<br />
<br />
* Open '''FotoToon''' and find the '''"Add Photo"''' icon (number 2 in the '''FotoToon''' main toolbar shown above). A list of available images will appear. Click on the one you want to put in the first pane. When it has loaded, you can either leave it or remove it with the minus sign icon (number 10 in the main toolbar shown above). '''Warning:''' You can only remove the last image entered. That is why it is important to number the images according to the panes you wish to place them in. After the first image has been placed, continue adding images until all four for your first project have been placed. If you decide later that you want to change their order after they have been placed, you will need to delete them and replace them in the new order. ''It is best to get your final placement before adding any text.''<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallImportImages.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
If you would like to use the same images that will be used in this sample project, you will find them at these links. Go to each link, upload the photo to a usb drive, plug it into your XO, and open by clicking on the image names. They will open in the Image Viewer and be automatically saved so you can access them for your project. <br />
<br />
* Pane-1 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:1-Apple-Fries.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-2 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:2-Soda-Milk.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-3 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:3-Cookies-Yogurt.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-4 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:4-HealthySnacks.png<br />
<br />
==='''Add Dialogue and Titles'''===<br />
<br />
If you have planned well with your storyboard, you will have a pretty good idea of what you want to put in your dialogue balloons and text boxes. You may even have a title in mind for your project. You can actually start this process anywhere in your project. All of the balloons and boxes you will be using to do this will be identified in the first image above, the '''The Main PhotoToonToolbar'''.<br />
<br />
* Making and placing your '''Title''': If you know what you would like your title to be, you can start with that. It can always be changed later. When you start a project in FotoToon there will already be a tiny box for the title in a narrow band across the top of the project window. You can drag the upper left corner of the box to enlarge it (look for the cursor arrow to change to a thinner double headed arrow). You can also move it around in the band across the top. Click on the box and type all or part of your title. Then you can change the type style and size using the pull downs in the '''Text Pulldown''' menu (see 11e and 11f in the picture above). Experiment until you find a style and size you like. You can also change the color of the type. Don't worry if it isn't perfect, you can always come back later and change it. Notice that you can erase part of the text by backspacing over it.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallAddTitle.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this image you can see that we selected '''bold''', a '''red''' color from the color palette, a '''type size''' of 48, and the '''Font''' "Georgia".<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Text Balloons''': You can place the text balloons wherever you like within a pane. Click on the pane, then on the balloon you want to use (see 3,4,and 5 above for explanations). The balloon will appear in the pane. You can drag it to the position where you want it, and also can drag the little tail to point to the source of the dialogue. Add the words to the balloon in the same way you added them to the Title box.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:AddBalloonsCropSM3.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this image you can see that we have added 4 dialogue balloons (#3 in the main toolbar). We could also have used the "cloud" balloon (#4 in the main toolbar), or the "whisper" balloon (#5 in the main toolbar). The first pane is OK, but the first balloon in the second pane needs to be dragged to a better shape and size. The second ballon in the second pane appears just as it does when it is first added. It still needs to have text added and to be resized (by dragging a corner). You can see that our '''type size''' is 12, '''text color''' is black, and we are still using the Georgia '''font'''.<br />
<br />
As you work with the various text items, you may wish to eliminate one entirely. Just click on it, then on the icon with the minus (-) sign (#10 in the main toolbar), and it will disappear.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Exclamation Balloons''': You may wish to include special exclamations to your project. Choose the exclamation balloon (# 6 in the main toolbar). It is possible to eliminate the one longer point on the balloon by dragging it so that it matched the others. Again, type into the balloon just as you did in the title box and dialogue balloons.<br />
<br />
* Adding extra '''Text Boxes''': You can add a text box anywhere in any pane by clicking on the pane and then on the box icon in the diagram (#7 in the main toolbar).<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:Exclamations&Boxes.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
In this example you can see we have added 4 '''exclamation balloons''' and one extra '''text box'''. We used the same '''text size''', '''font''', and '''color''' as in the rest of the project. You could choose to use different ones in your project.<br />
<br />
===Exporting Your Project===<br />
<br />
Now, if you have followed the instructions above, you should have a small, completed FotoToon Project. You may have decided to use the same photos that are in the sample, or you may have chosen to use images you have imported. These can be from your camera, your XO, downloads from the web, projects you have made in other Activities, drawings you made in Paint, or even photos you have modified in Paint (import, then add things and/or crop as you like). When finished, your project will look something like this:<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonFoodFinalSm.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Notice the little red cursor mark at the end of the title in the image. This export was done in FotoToon 11. The update, FotoToon 12 eliminates all stray cursors when exporting. Always be sure you are using the latest version of an Activity.<br />
<br />
Regardless of what you have made for your project, you will probably want to share it with others. You can do this as an email attachment or print it out as a paper copy. To do this, you need to '''export''' your project as an image stored in your Journal. The instructions for exporting your project are shown above. We will repeat them here as well.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
* Look in the Journal. Your project should appear there with the name you gave it before exporting. If you forgot to give it a name, it will just say "FotoToon." If this happened, rename it now, in the Journal before you forget to do it.<br />
<br />
==Extending FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Modifying FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
==Where to report problems==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Credits==<br />
<br />
<br />
== FotoToon 12==</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon&diff=270202Help Activity refresh/Chapter/FotoToon2012-04-29T20:59:54Z<p>Cbigenho: /* The Export Pulldown */</p>
<hr />
<div>[[File:FotoToonIcon.png]]<br />
='''About FotoToon 12'''=<br />
The '''FotoToon''' Activity will allow you to create everything from a simple "comic" strip to a long elaborate illustrated document. You will be able to import many kinds of images into the panes of your project and add text bubbles to help tell the story. You can use photo images taken with the XO or imported from a camera, drawings made with Activities such as Paint, and images of all kinds downloaded from the web. This could include photos, charts and graphs, maps, and the like. <br><br />
This introduction to '''FotoToon''' will show you how to get started with a simple 4 panel project. If you want to learn to do more, you can watch the videos about using '''FotoToon''' that are available for viewing here (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE).<br />
<br />
='''Where to get FotoToon 12'''=<br />
'''FotoToon''' is not included on the basic 11.3.0 (.883) release of Sugar. To use it, you must download it from the Sugar Labs Activity library at: http://activities.sugarlabs.org/es-ES/sugar/addon/4253 You will find instructions for downloading this and other Activities here: (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE)<BR> You will notice that the description of the Activity and other information are in Spanish. That is because '''FotoToon''' was developed in Argentina. However, don't worry! '''FotoToon''' works in other languages as well!<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''', like many other Sugar Activities, is often updated to fix "bugs" that users report. There was one update, from version 11 to version 12 during the time this instruction chapter was written. By the time you use it, there may be others. The changes are usually minor and should not interfere with the usefulness of this information. Always try to be sure you are using the latest version.<br />
<br />
='''Using FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
=='''The Toolbars'''==<br />
<br />
=== '''The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToon12 Main Screen.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
The '''FotoToon Toolbar''' has 13 icons including 2 with pulldown menus. The '''main FotoToon''' toolbar allows you to access many features of the Activity. Here is a description of what each of the icons will allow you to do:<br />
<br />
* 1. The '''FotoToon''' icon. When you hover your cursor over this icon you will open a small pulldown that allows you to export your work as an image. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 2. The '''Add Image''' icon. This icon allows you to add an image to your project. It can be a photo you take with the XO or digital camera, or import from the web. It can also be a picture, page, or project you create in another Sugar Activity.<br />
<br />
The next four icons allow you to add text to your drawings and photos. They include:<br />
* 3. A normal dialogue Globe<br />
* 4. A cloud shape to tell what a character is silently Thinking<br />
* 5. A dotted globe which indicates a character is talking in a Whisper<br />
* 6. An exclamation bubble to add things like "Pow!" "Bang!" and "Wham!"<br />
* 7. Is a box where you can put the Title of your project. Just above it is a box icon that allows you to add more rectangular text boxes to your project.<br />
* 8. The Movement icon allows you to add little curves to indicate motion, highlight an object with a sunburst, add some parallel lines to show horizontal or vertical motion, or add a little light bulb to show that someone had a bright idea.<br />
* 9. The circular arrow allows you to click on an object, then on this icon and rotate it clockwise 1/4 turn (90 degrees) with each click.<br />
* 10. This icon allows you to delete something you have added.<br />
* 11. This icon opens and closes the Text pulldown where you can select the font and size of your text as well as select bold, italics, or other colors for your words. Click it to open, and when finished, click again to close. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 12. The familiar stop-sign icon is one way to stop the '''FotoToon''' Activity. You can also use the keyboard shortcut: ctrl-Q.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
==='''The Text Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonTextPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Text Pulldown''' menu allows you to control the appearance of the text you add to your project. Generally, they apply to everything in the box or bubble you are currently working on. You do not have to highlight the text to change it.<br />
<br />
* 11a- Selecting this icon will change the text you are working on to '''Bold'''. Clicking it again reverts back to regular text,<br />
<br />
* 11b- Selecting this icon will change the text your are working on to ''Italics''.<br />
<br />
Note: clicking on both of these icons, in any order, will give you '''''Bold Italic''''' text. Clicking both again, in any order, will get you back to regular text.<br />
<br />
* 11c- Clicking on this icon will open the Text Color Pallete. See below for information on how to use it.<br />
<br />
* 11d- This is a non-functioning icon that identifies this as the Text Pulldown toolbar.<br />
<br />
* 11e- This little pull down allows you to choose the size of the text you are working on.<br />
<br />
* 11f- This pull down offers a choice of 37 different fonts, listed in alphabetical order. Some, such as "Ding Bats" don't actually produce anything. Be sure to test the font on your text to see if it looks the way you would like it to.<br />
<br />
==='''The Color Pallete Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:ScreenshotofFTColorPallete.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Color Pallete Pulldown''' allows you to choose the color of your font. It will apply to everything in the box or bubble but can vary from one box or bubble to the next as you choose. There are 12 preset colors you can use, or you can create a custom color by selecting one of the preset colors and dragging the sliders to give more or less Red, Green, or Blue in the selected color. The little circle at the top of the Color Pallete shows the current color. When you are satisfied with the color you have selected/modified, click on the little circle to accept the chosen color and close the Color Pallete. It may take a few seconds for the new color to appear in the text box. But, don't worry, it will!<br />
<br />
='''Learning with FotoToon 12'''=<br />
=='''Plan Ahead'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''' can be used for a wide variety of learning activities, but the general process is always similar. For the sample project in this section, we will make a 4 panel page using 4 photos. This is a good way to get started since the page can be printed on a single page. <br />
<br />
Here are the general steps you need to complete before you build your first FotoToon project:<br />
<br />
* '''Step One: Decide what your project will be about.''' You can tell a story about anything. For example, it could be about your pets, your home, your family, your town, or, even some photos you took at a party. Any topic is fine for our first project. The sample project will be about "Healthy Snacks" and the photos will be pictures of food.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Two: Make a plan.''' Before you begin you should make a plan that will guide you through the construction of your project. Some people like to draw a little sketch of each pane showing what will be in the picture and a suggestion for what words will be added. If you like the panes can each be on a separate small piece of paper so you can re-arrange them easily This is called a '''Story Board'''. You may have another way you would like to make your plan, just be sure to include information about what pictures you will use, where you will get them, and what text you plan to add.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Three: Gather your images.''' For starters, we will use images that were taken either with a camera, or using the '''Record Activity''' on the XO. Any image that can be imported to the '''Journal''' on your XO and viewed in '''Image Viewer''' can be used. It is a good idea to rename each of the photos you will be using in the Journal. The name can include the number of the pane you plan to use it in so it is easy to find when you begin putting things together.<br />
<br />
==='''Place Your Images'''===<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Journal''' and check to be sure your images are there and can be viewed in the Image Viewer (click on the file to open it and check). Be sure the images have names that include the number of the pane you plan to place them (1,2,3, or 4).<br />
<br />
* Open '''FotoToon''' and find the '''"Add Photo"''' icon (number 2 in the '''FotoToon''' main toolbar shown above). A list of available images will appear. Click on the one you want to put in the first pane. When it has loaded, you can either leave it or remove it with the minus sign icon (number 10 in the main toolbar shown above). '''Warning:''' You can only remove the last image entered. That is why it is important to number the images according to the panes you wish to place them in. After the first image has been placed, continue adding images until all four for your first project have been placed. If you decide later that you want to change their order after they have been placed, you will need to delete them and replace them in the new order. ''It is best to get your final placement before adding any text.''<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallImportImages.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
If you would like to use the same images that will be used in this sample project, you will find them at these links. Go to each link, upload the photo to a usb drive, plug it into your XO, and open by clicking on the image names. They will open in the Image Viewer and be automatically saved so you can access them for your project. <br />
<br />
* Pane-1 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:1-Apple-Fries.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-2 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:2-Soda-Milk.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-3 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:3-Cookies-Yogurt.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-4 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:4-HealthySnacks.png<br />
<br />
==='''Add Dialogue and Titles'''===<br />
<br />
If you have planned well with your storyboard, you will have a pretty good idea of what you want to put in your dialogue balloons and text boxes. You may even have a title in mind for your project. You can actually start this process anywhere in your project. All of the balloons and boxes you will be using to do this will be identified in the first image above, the '''The Main PhotoToonToolbar'''.<br />
<br />
* Making and placing your '''Title''': If you know what you would like your title to be, you can start with that. It can always be changed later. When you start a project in FotoToon there will already be a tiny box for the title in a narrow band across the top of the project window. You can drag the upper left corner of the box to enlarge it (look for the cursor arrow to change to a thinner double headed arrow). You can also move it around in the band across the top. Click on the box and type all or part of your title. Then you can change the type style and size using the pull downs in the '''Text Pulldown''' menu (see 11e and 11f in the picture above). Experiment until you find a style and size you like. You can also change the color of the type. Don't worry if it isn't perfect, you can always come back later and change it. Notice that you can erase part of the text by backspacing over it.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallAddTitle.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this image you can see that we selected '''bold''', a '''red''' color from the color palette, a '''type size''' of 48, and the '''Font''' "Georgia".<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Text Balloons''': You can place the text balloons wherever you like within a pane. Click on the pane, then on the balloon you want to use (see 3,4,and 5 above for explanations). The balloon will appear in the pane. You can drag it to the position where you want it, and also can drag the little tail to point to the source of the dialogue. Add the words to the balloon in the same way you added them to the Title box.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:AddBalloonsCropSM3.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this image you can see that we have added 4 dialogue balloons (#3 in the main toolbar). We could also have used the "cloud" balloon (#4 in the main toolbar), or the "whisper" balloon (#5 in the main toolbar). The first pane is OK, but the first balloon in the second pane needs to be dragged to a better shape and size. The second ballon in the second pane appears just as it does when it is first added. It still needs to have text added and to be resized (by dragging a corner). You can see that our '''type size''' is 12, '''text color''' is black, and we are still using the Georgia '''font'''.<br />
<br />
As you work with the various text items, you may wish to eliminate one entirely. Just click on it, then on the icon with the minus (-) sign (#10 in the main toolbar), and it will disappear.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Exclamation Balloons''': You may wish to include special exclamations to your project. Choose the exclamation balloon (# 6 in the main toolbar). It is possible to eliminate the one longer point on the balloon by dragging it so that it matched the others. Again, type into the balloon just as you did in the title box and dialogue balloons.<br />
<br />
* Adding extra '''Text Boxes''': You can add a text box anywhere in any pane by clicking on the pane and then on the box icon in the diagram (#7 in the main toolbar).<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:Exclamations&Boxes.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
In this example you can see we have added 4 '''exclamation balloons''' and one extra '''text box'''. We used the same '''text size''', '''font''', and '''color''' as in the rest of the project. You could choose to use different ones in your project.<br />
<br />
===Exporting Your Project===<br />
<br />
Now, if you have followed the instructions above, you should have a small, completed FotoToon Project. You may have decided to use the same photos that are in the sample, or you may have chosen to use images you have imported. These can be from your camera, your XO, downloads from the web, projects you have made in other Activities, drawings you made in Paint, or even photos you have modified in Paint (import, then add things and/or crop as you like). When finished, your project will look something like this:<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonFoodFinalSm.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Notice the little red cursor mark at the end of the title in the image. This export was done in FotoToon 11. The update, FotoToon 12 eliminates all stray cursors when exporting. Always be sure you are using the latest version of an Activity.<br />
<br />
Regardless of what you have made for your project, you will probably want to share it with others. You can do this as an email attachment or print it out as a paper copy. To do this, you need to '''export''' your project as an image stored in your Journal. The instructions for exporting your project are shown above. We will repeat them here as well.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
* Look in the Journal. Your project should appear there with the name you gave it before exporting. If you forgot to give it a name, it will just say "FotoToon." If this happened, rename it now, in the Journal before you forget to do it.<br />
<br />
==Extending FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Modifying FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
==Where to report problems==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Credits==<br />
<br />
<br />
== FotoToon 12==</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon&diff=270201Help Activity refresh/Chapter/FotoToon2012-04-29T20:59:38Z<p>Cbigenho: /* The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar */</p>
<hr />
<div>[[File:FotoToonIcon.png]]<br />
='''About FotoToon 12'''=<br />
The '''FotoToon''' Activity will allow you to create everything from a simple "comic" strip to a long elaborate illustrated document. You will be able to import many kinds of images into the panes of your project and add text bubbles to help tell the story. You can use photo images taken with the XO or imported from a camera, drawings made with Activities such as Paint, and images of all kinds downloaded from the web. This could include photos, charts and graphs, maps, and the like. <br><br />
This introduction to '''FotoToon''' will show you how to get started with a simple 4 panel project. If you want to learn to do more, you can watch the videos about using '''FotoToon''' that are available for viewing here (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE).<br />
<br />
='''Where to get FotoToon 12'''=<br />
'''FotoToon''' is not included on the basic 11.3.0 (.883) release of Sugar. To use it, you must download it from the Sugar Labs Activity library at: http://activities.sugarlabs.org/es-ES/sugar/addon/4253 You will find instructions for downloading this and other Activities here: (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE)<BR> You will notice that the description of the Activity and other information are in Spanish. That is because '''FotoToon''' was developed in Argentina. However, don't worry! '''FotoToon''' works in other languages as well!<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''', like many other Sugar Activities, is often updated to fix "bugs" that users report. There was one update, from version 11 to version 12 during the time this instruction chapter was written. By the time you use it, there may be others. The changes are usually minor and should not interfere with the usefulness of this information. Always try to be sure you are using the latest version.<br />
<br />
='''Using FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
=='''The Toolbars'''==<br />
<br />
=== '''The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToon12 Main Screen.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
The '''FotoToon Toolbar''' has 13 icons including 2 with pulldown menus. The '''main FotoToon''' toolbar allows you to access many features of the Activity. Here is a description of what each of the icons will allow you to do:<br />
<br />
* 1. The '''FotoToon''' icon. When you hover your cursor over this icon you will open a small pulldown that allows you to export your work as an image. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 2. The '''Add Image''' icon. This icon allows you to add an image to your project. It can be a photo you take with the XO or digital camera, or import from the web. It can also be a picture, page, or project you create in another Sugar Activity.<br />
<br />
The next four icons allow you to add text to your drawings and photos. They include:<br />
* 3. A normal dialogue Globe<br />
* 4. A cloud shape to tell what a character is silently Thinking<br />
* 5. A dotted globe which indicates a character is talking in a Whisper<br />
* 6. An exclamation bubble to add things like "Pow!" "Bang!" and "Wham!"<br />
* 7. Is a box where you can put the Title of your project. Just above it is a box icon that allows you to add more rectangular text boxes to your project.<br />
* 8. The Movement icon allows you to add little curves to indicate motion, highlight an object with a sunburst, add some parallel lines to show horizontal or vertical motion, or add a little light bulb to show that someone had a bright idea.<br />
* 9. The circular arrow allows you to click on an object, then on this icon and rotate it clockwise 1/4 turn (90 degrees) with each click.<br />
* 10. This icon allows you to delete something you have added.<br />
* 11. This icon opens and closes the Text pulldown where you can select the font and size of your text as well as select bold, italics, or other colors for your words. Click it to open, and when finished, click again to close. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 12. The familiar stop-sign icon is one way to stop the '''FotoToon''' Activity. You can also use the keyboard shortcut: ctrl-Q.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
==='''The Text Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonTextPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Text Pulldown''' menu allows you to control the appearance of the text you add to your project. Generally, they apply to everything in the box or bubble you are currently working on. You do not have to highlight the text to change it.<br />
<br />
* 11a- Selecting this icon will change the text you are working on to '''Bold'''. Clicking it again reverts back to regular text,<br />
<br />
* 11b- Selecting this icon will change the text your are working on to ''Italics''.<br />
<br />
Note: clicking on both of these icons, in any order, will give you '''''Bold Italic''''' text. Clicking both again, in any order, will get you back to regular text.<br />
<br />
* 11c- Clicking on this icon will open the Text Color Pallete. See below for information on how to use it.<br />
<br />
* 11d- This is a non-functioning icon that identifies this as the Text Pulldown toolbar.<br />
<br />
* 11e- This little pull down allows you to choose the size of the text you are working on.<br />
<br />
* 11f- This pull down offers a choice of 37 different fonts, listed in alphabetical order. Some, such as "Ding Bats" don't actually produce anything. Be sure to test the font on your text to see if it looks the way you would like it to.<br />
<br />
==='''The Color Pallete Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:ScreenshotofFTColorPallete.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Color Pallete Pulldown''' allows you to choose the color of your font. It will apply to everything in the box or bubble but can vary from one box or bubble to the next as you choose. There are 12 preset colors you can use, or you can create a custom color by selecting one of the preset colors and dragging the sliders to give more or less Red, Green, or Blue in the selected color. The little circle at the top of the Color Pallete shows the current color. When you are satisfied with the color you have selected/modified, click on the little circle to accept the chosen color and close the Color Pallete. It may take a few seconds for the new color to appear in the text box. But, don't worry, it will!<br />
<br />
='''Learning with FotoToon 12'''=<br />
=='''Plan Ahead'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''' can be used for a wide variety of learning activities, but the general process is always similar. For the sample project in this section, we will make a 4 panel page using 4 photos. This is a good way to get started since the page can be printed on a single page. <br />
<br />
Here are the general steps you need to complete before you build your first FotoToon project:<br />
<br />
* '''Step One: Decide what your project will be about.''' You can tell a story about anything. For example, it could be about your pets, your home, your family, your town, or, even some photos you took at a party. Any topic is fine for our first project. The sample project will be about "Healthy Snacks" and the photos will be pictures of food.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Two: Make a plan.''' Before you begin you should make a plan that will guide you through the construction of your project. Some people like to draw a little sketch of each pane showing what will be in the picture and a suggestion for what words will be added. If you like the panes can each be on a separate small piece of paper so you can re-arrange them easily This is called a '''Story Board'''. You may have another way you would like to make your plan, just be sure to include information about what pictures you will use, where you will get them, and what text you plan to add.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Three: Gather your images.''' For starters, we will use images that were taken either with a camera, or using the '''Record Activity''' on the XO. Any image that can be imported to the '''Journal''' on your XO and viewed in '''Image Viewer''' can be used. It is a good idea to rename each of the photos you will be using in the Journal. The name can include the number of the pane you plan to use it in so it is easy to find when you begin putting things together.<br />
<br />
==='''Place Your Images'''===<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Journal''' and check to be sure your images are there and can be viewed in the Image Viewer (click on the file to open it and check). Be sure the images have names that include the number of the pane you plan to place them (1,2,3, or 4).<br />
<br />
* Open '''FotoToon''' and find the '''"Add Photo"''' icon (number 2 in the '''FotoToon''' main toolbar shown above). A list of available images will appear. Click on the one you want to put in the first pane. When it has loaded, you can either leave it or remove it with the minus sign icon (number 10 in the main toolbar shown above). '''Warning:''' You can only remove the last image entered. That is why it is important to number the images according to the panes you wish to place them in. After the first image has been placed, continue adding images until all four for your first project have been placed. If you decide later that you want to change their order after they have been placed, you will need to delete them and replace them in the new order. ''It is best to get your final placement before adding any text.''<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallImportImages.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
If you would like to use the same images that will be used in this sample project, you will find them at these links. Go to each link, upload the photo to a usb drive, plug it into your XO, and open by clicking on the image names. They will open in the Image Viewer and be automatically saved so you can access them for your project. <br />
<br />
* Pane-1 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:1-Apple-Fries.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-2 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:2-Soda-Milk.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-3 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:3-Cookies-Yogurt.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-4 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:4-HealthySnacks.png<br />
<br />
==='''Add Dialogue and Titles'''===<br />
<br />
If you have planned well with your storyboard, you will have a pretty good idea of what you want to put in your dialogue balloons and text boxes. You may even have a title in mind for your project. You can actually start this process anywhere in your project. All of the balloons and boxes you will be using to do this will be identified in the first image above, the '''The Main PhotoToonToolbar'''.<br />
<br />
* Making and placing your '''Title''': If you know what you would like your title to be, you can start with that. It can always be changed later. When you start a project in FotoToon there will already be a tiny box for the title in a narrow band across the top of the project window. You can drag the upper left corner of the box to enlarge it (look for the cursor arrow to change to a thinner double headed arrow). You can also move it around in the band across the top. Click on the box and type all or part of your title. Then you can change the type style and size using the pull downs in the '''Text Pulldown''' menu (see 11e and 11f in the picture above). Experiment until you find a style and size you like. You can also change the color of the type. Don't worry if it isn't perfect, you can always come back later and change it. Notice that you can erase part of the text by backspacing over it.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallAddTitle.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this image you can see that we selected '''bold''', a '''red''' color from the color palette, a '''type size''' of 48, and the '''Font''' "Georgia".<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Text Balloons''': You can place the text balloons wherever you like within a pane. Click on the pane, then on the balloon you want to use (see 3,4,and 5 above for explanations). The balloon will appear in the pane. You can drag it to the position where you want it, and also can drag the little tail to point to the source of the dialogue. Add the words to the balloon in the same way you added them to the Title box.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:AddBalloonsCropSM3.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this image you can see that we have added 4 dialogue balloons (#3 in the main toolbar). We could also have used the "cloud" balloon (#4 in the main toolbar), or the "whisper" balloon (#5 in the main toolbar). The first pane is OK, but the first balloon in the second pane needs to be dragged to a better shape and size. The second ballon in the second pane appears just as it does when it is first added. It still needs to have text added and to be resized (by dragging a corner). You can see that our '''type size''' is 12, '''text color''' is black, and we are still using the Georgia '''font'''.<br />
<br />
As you work with the various text items, you may wish to eliminate one entirely. Just click on it, then on the icon with the minus (-) sign (#10 in the main toolbar), and it will disappear.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Exclamation Balloons''': You may wish to include special exclamations to your project. Choose the exclamation balloon (# 6 in the main toolbar). It is possible to eliminate the one longer point on the balloon by dragging it so that it matched the others. Again, type into the balloon just as you did in the title box and dialogue balloons.<br />
<br />
* Adding extra '''Text Boxes''': You can add a text box anywhere in any pane by clicking on the pane and then on the box icon in the diagram (#7 in the main toolbar).<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:Exclamations&Boxes.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
In this example you can see we have added 4 '''exclamation balloons''' and one extra '''text box'''. We used the same '''text size''', '''font''', and '''color''' as in the rest of the project. You could choose to use different ones in your project.<br />
<br />
===Exporting Your Project===<br />
<br />
Now, if you have followed the instructions above, you should have a small, completed FotoToon Project. You may have decided to use the same photos that are in the sample, or you may have chosen to use images you have imported. These can be from your camera, your XO, downloads from the web, projects you have made in other Activities, drawings you made in Paint, or even photos you have modified in Paint (import, then add things and/or crop as you like). When finished, your project will look something like this:<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonFoodFinalSm.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Notice the little red cursor mark at the end of the title in the image. This export was done in FotoToon 11. The update, FotoToon 12 eliminates all stray cursors when exporting. Always be sure you are using the latest version of an Activity.<br />
<br />
Regardless of what you have made for your project, you will probably want to share it with others. You can do this as an email attachment or print it out as a paper copy. To do this, you need to '''export''' your project as an image stored in your Journal. The instructions for exporting your project are shown above. We will repeat them here as well.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
* Look in the Journal. Your project should appear there with the name you gave it before exporting. If you forgot to give it a name, it will just say "FotoToon." If this happened, rename it now, in the Journal before you forget to do it.<br />
<br />
==Extending FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Modifying FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
==Where to report problems==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Credits==<br />
<br />
<br />
== FotoToon 12==</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon&diff=270200Help Activity refresh/Chapter/FotoToon2012-04-29T20:59:10Z<p>Cbigenho: /* The Export Pulldown */</p>
<hr />
<div>[[File:FotoToonIcon.png]]<br />
='''About FotoToon 12'''=<br />
The '''FotoToon''' Activity will allow you to create everything from a simple "comic" strip to a long elaborate illustrated document. You will be able to import many kinds of images into the panes of your project and add text bubbles to help tell the story. You can use photo images taken with the XO or imported from a camera, drawings made with Activities such as Paint, and images of all kinds downloaded from the web. This could include photos, charts and graphs, maps, and the like. <br><br />
This introduction to '''FotoToon''' will show you how to get started with a simple 4 panel project. If you want to learn to do more, you can watch the videos about using '''FotoToon''' that are available for viewing here (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE).<br />
<br />
='''Where to get FotoToon 12'''=<br />
'''FotoToon''' is not included on the basic 11.3.0 (.883) release of Sugar. To use it, you must download it from the Sugar Labs Activity library at: http://activities.sugarlabs.org/es-ES/sugar/addon/4253 You will find instructions for downloading this and other Activities here: (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE)<BR> You will notice that the description of the Activity and other information are in Spanish. That is because '''FotoToon''' was developed in Argentina. However, don't worry! '''FotoToon''' works in other languages as well!<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''', like many other Sugar Activities, is often updated to fix "bugs" that users report. There was one update, from version 11 to version 12 during the time this instruction chapter was written. By the time you use it, there may be others. The changes are usually minor and should not interfere with the usefulness of this information. Always try to be sure you are using the latest version.<br />
<br />
='''Using FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
=='''The Toolbars'''==<br />
<br />
=== '''The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToon12 Main Screen.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''FotoToon Toolbar''' has 13 icons including 2 with pulldown menus. The '''main FotoToon''' toolbar allows you to access many features of the Activity. Here is a description of what each of the icons will allow you to do:<br />
<br />
* 1. The '''FotoToon''' icon. When you hover your cursor over this icon you will open a small pulldown that allows you to export your work as an image. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 2. The '''Add Image''' icon. This icon allows you to add an image to your project. It can be a photo you take with the XO or digital camera, or import from the web. It can also be a picture, page, or project you create in another Sugar Activity.<br />
<br />
The next four icons allow you to add text to your drawings and photos. They include:<br />
* 3. A normal dialogue Globe<br />
* 4. A cloud shape to tell what a character is silently Thinking<br />
* 5. A dotted globe which indicates a character is talking in a Whisper<br />
* 6. An exclamation bubble to add things like "Pow!" "Bang!" and "Wham!"<br />
* 7. Is a box where you can put the Title of your project. Just above it is a box icon that allows you to add more rectangular text boxes to your project.<br />
* 8. The Movement icon allows you to add little curves to indicate motion, highlight an object with a sunburst, add some parallel lines to show horizontal or vertical motion, or add a little light bulb to show that someone had a bright idea.<br />
* 9. The circular arrow allows you to click on an object, then on this icon and rotate it clockwise 1/4 turn (90 degrees) with each click.<br />
* 10. This icon allows you to delete something you have added.<br />
* 11. This icon opens and closes the Text pulldown where you can select the font and size of your text as well as select bold, italics, or other colors for your words. Click it to open, and when finished, click again to close. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 12. The familiar stop-sign icon is one way to stop the '''FotoToon''' Activity. You can also use the keyboard shortcut: ctrl-Q.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
==='''The Text Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonTextPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Text Pulldown''' menu allows you to control the appearance of the text you add to your project. Generally, they apply to everything in the box or bubble you are currently working on. You do not have to highlight the text to change it.<br />
<br />
* 11a- Selecting this icon will change the text you are working on to '''Bold'''. Clicking it again reverts back to regular text,<br />
<br />
* 11b- Selecting this icon will change the text your are working on to ''Italics''.<br />
<br />
Note: clicking on both of these icons, in any order, will give you '''''Bold Italic''''' text. Clicking both again, in any order, will get you back to regular text.<br />
<br />
* 11c- Clicking on this icon will open the Text Color Pallete. See below for information on how to use it.<br />
<br />
* 11d- This is a non-functioning icon that identifies this as the Text Pulldown toolbar.<br />
<br />
* 11e- This little pull down allows you to choose the size of the text you are working on.<br />
<br />
* 11f- This pull down offers a choice of 37 different fonts, listed in alphabetical order. Some, such as "Ding Bats" don't actually produce anything. Be sure to test the font on your text to see if it looks the way you would like it to.<br />
<br />
==='''The Color Pallete Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:ScreenshotofFTColorPallete.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Color Pallete Pulldown''' allows you to choose the color of your font. It will apply to everything in the box or bubble but can vary from one box or bubble to the next as you choose. There are 12 preset colors you can use, or you can create a custom color by selecting one of the preset colors and dragging the sliders to give more or less Red, Green, or Blue in the selected color. The little circle at the top of the Color Pallete shows the current color. When you are satisfied with the color you have selected/modified, click on the little circle to accept the chosen color and close the Color Pallete. It may take a few seconds for the new color to appear in the text box. But, don't worry, it will!<br />
<br />
='''Learning with FotoToon 12'''=<br />
=='''Plan Ahead'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''' can be used for a wide variety of learning activities, but the general process is always similar. For the sample project in this section, we will make a 4 panel page using 4 photos. This is a good way to get started since the page can be printed on a single page. <br />
<br />
Here are the general steps you need to complete before you build your first FotoToon project:<br />
<br />
* '''Step One: Decide what your project will be about.''' You can tell a story about anything. For example, it could be about your pets, your home, your family, your town, or, even some photos you took at a party. Any topic is fine for our first project. The sample project will be about "Healthy Snacks" and the photos will be pictures of food.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Two: Make a plan.''' Before you begin you should make a plan that will guide you through the construction of your project. Some people like to draw a little sketch of each pane showing what will be in the picture and a suggestion for what words will be added. If you like the panes can each be on a separate small piece of paper so you can re-arrange them easily This is called a '''Story Board'''. You may have another way you would like to make your plan, just be sure to include information about what pictures you will use, where you will get them, and what text you plan to add.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Three: Gather your images.''' For starters, we will use images that were taken either with a camera, or using the '''Record Activity''' on the XO. Any image that can be imported to the '''Journal''' on your XO and viewed in '''Image Viewer''' can be used. It is a good idea to rename each of the photos you will be using in the Journal. The name can include the number of the pane you plan to use it in so it is easy to find when you begin putting things together.<br />
<br />
==='''Place Your Images'''===<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Journal''' and check to be sure your images are there and can be viewed in the Image Viewer (click on the file to open it and check). Be sure the images have names that include the number of the pane you plan to place them (1,2,3, or 4).<br />
<br />
* Open '''FotoToon''' and find the '''"Add Photo"''' icon (number 2 in the '''FotoToon''' main toolbar shown above). A list of available images will appear. Click on the one you want to put in the first pane. When it has loaded, you can either leave it or remove it with the minus sign icon (number 10 in the main toolbar shown above). '''Warning:''' You can only remove the last image entered. That is why it is important to number the images according to the panes you wish to place them in. After the first image has been placed, continue adding images until all four for your first project have been placed. If you decide later that you want to change their order after they have been placed, you will need to delete them and replace them in the new order. ''It is best to get your final placement before adding any text.''<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallImportImages.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
If you would like to use the same images that will be used in this sample project, you will find them at these links. Go to each link, upload the photo to a usb drive, plug it into your XO, and open by clicking on the image names. They will open in the Image Viewer and be automatically saved so you can access them for your project. <br />
<br />
* Pane-1 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:1-Apple-Fries.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-2 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:2-Soda-Milk.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-3 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:3-Cookies-Yogurt.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-4 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:4-HealthySnacks.png<br />
<br />
==='''Add Dialogue and Titles'''===<br />
<br />
If you have planned well with your storyboard, you will have a pretty good idea of what you want to put in your dialogue balloons and text boxes. You may even have a title in mind for your project. You can actually start this process anywhere in your project. All of the balloons and boxes you will be using to do this will be identified in the first image above, the '''The Main PhotoToonToolbar'''.<br />
<br />
* Making and placing your '''Title''': If you know what you would like your title to be, you can start with that. It can always be changed later. When you start a project in FotoToon there will already be a tiny box for the title in a narrow band across the top of the project window. You can drag the upper left corner of the box to enlarge it (look for the cursor arrow to change to a thinner double headed arrow). You can also move it around in the band across the top. Click on the box and type all or part of your title. Then you can change the type style and size using the pull downs in the '''Text Pulldown''' menu (see 11e and 11f in the picture above). Experiment until you find a style and size you like. You can also change the color of the type. Don't worry if it isn't perfect, you can always come back later and change it. Notice that you can erase part of the text by backspacing over it.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallAddTitle.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this image you can see that we selected '''bold''', a '''red''' color from the color palette, a '''type size''' of 48, and the '''Font''' "Georgia".<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Text Balloons''': You can place the text balloons wherever you like within a pane. Click on the pane, then on the balloon you want to use (see 3,4,and 5 above for explanations). The balloon will appear in the pane. You can drag it to the position where you want it, and also can drag the little tail to point to the source of the dialogue. Add the words to the balloon in the same way you added them to the Title box.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:AddBalloonsCropSM3.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this image you can see that we have added 4 dialogue balloons (#3 in the main toolbar). We could also have used the "cloud" balloon (#4 in the main toolbar), or the "whisper" balloon (#5 in the main toolbar). The first pane is OK, but the first balloon in the second pane needs to be dragged to a better shape and size. The second ballon in the second pane appears just as it does when it is first added. It still needs to have text added and to be resized (by dragging a corner). You can see that our '''type size''' is 12, '''text color''' is black, and we are still using the Georgia '''font'''.<br />
<br />
As you work with the various text items, you may wish to eliminate one entirely. Just click on it, then on the icon with the minus (-) sign (#10 in the main toolbar), and it will disappear.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Exclamation Balloons''': You may wish to include special exclamations to your project. Choose the exclamation balloon (# 6 in the main toolbar). It is possible to eliminate the one longer point on the balloon by dragging it so that it matched the others. Again, type into the balloon just as you did in the title box and dialogue balloons.<br />
<br />
* Adding extra '''Text Boxes''': You can add a text box anywhere in any pane by clicking on the pane and then on the box icon in the diagram (#7 in the main toolbar).<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:Exclamations&Boxes.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
In this example you can see we have added 4 '''exclamation balloons''' and one extra '''text box'''. We used the same '''text size''', '''font''', and '''color''' as in the rest of the project. You could choose to use different ones in your project.<br />
<br />
===Exporting Your Project===<br />
<br />
Now, if you have followed the instructions above, you should have a small, completed FotoToon Project. You may have decided to use the same photos that are in the sample, or you may have chosen to use images you have imported. These can be from your camera, your XO, downloads from the web, projects you have made in other Activities, drawings you made in Paint, or even photos you have modified in Paint (import, then add things and/or crop as you like). When finished, your project will look something like this:<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonFoodFinalSm.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Notice the little red cursor mark at the end of the title in the image. This export was done in FotoToon 11. The update, FotoToon 12 eliminates all stray cursors when exporting. Always be sure you are using the latest version of an Activity.<br />
<br />
Regardless of what you have made for your project, you will probably want to share it with others. You can do this as an email attachment or print it out as a paper copy. To do this, you need to '''export''' your project as an image stored in your Journal. The instructions for exporting your project are shown above. We will repeat them here as well.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
* Look in the Journal. Your project should appear there with the name you gave it before exporting. If you forgot to give it a name, it will just say "FotoToon." If this happened, rename it now, in the Journal before you forget to do it.<br />
<br />
==Extending FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Modifying FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
==Where to report problems==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Credits==<br />
<br />
<br />
== FotoToon 12==</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon&diff=270199Help Activity refresh/Chapter/FotoToon2012-04-29T20:58:48Z<p>Cbigenho: /* Exporting Your Project */</p>
<hr />
<div>[[File:FotoToonIcon.png]]<br />
='''About FotoToon 12'''=<br />
The '''FotoToon''' Activity will allow you to create everything from a simple "comic" strip to a long elaborate illustrated document. You will be able to import many kinds of images into the panes of your project and add text bubbles to help tell the story. You can use photo images taken with the XO or imported from a camera, drawings made with Activities such as Paint, and images of all kinds downloaded from the web. This could include photos, charts and graphs, maps, and the like. <br><br />
This introduction to '''FotoToon''' will show you how to get started with a simple 4 panel project. If you want to learn to do more, you can watch the videos about using '''FotoToon''' that are available for viewing here (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE).<br />
<br />
='''Where to get FotoToon 12'''=<br />
'''FotoToon''' is not included on the basic 11.3.0 (.883) release of Sugar. To use it, you must download it from the Sugar Labs Activity library at: http://activities.sugarlabs.org/es-ES/sugar/addon/4253 You will find instructions for downloading this and other Activities here: (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE)<BR> You will notice that the description of the Activity and other information are in Spanish. That is because '''FotoToon''' was developed in Argentina. However, don't worry! '''FotoToon''' works in other languages as well!<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''', like many other Sugar Activities, is often updated to fix "bugs" that users report. There was one update, from version 11 to version 12 during the time this instruction chapter was written. By the time you use it, there may be others. The changes are usually minor and should not interfere with the usefulness of this information. Always try to be sure you are using the latest version.<br />
<br />
='''Using FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
=='''The Toolbars'''==<br />
<br />
=== '''The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToon12 Main Screen.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''FotoToon Toolbar''' has 13 icons including 2 with pulldown menus. The '''main FotoToon''' toolbar allows you to access many features of the Activity. Here is a description of what each of the icons will allow you to do:<br />
<br />
* 1. The '''FotoToon''' icon. When you hover your cursor over this icon you will open a small pulldown that allows you to export your work as an image. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 2. The '''Add Image''' icon. This icon allows you to add an image to your project. It can be a photo you take with the XO or digital camera, or import from the web. It can also be a picture, page, or project you create in another Sugar Activity.<br />
<br />
The next four icons allow you to add text to your drawings and photos. They include:<br />
* 3. A normal dialogue Globe<br />
* 4. A cloud shape to tell what a character is silently Thinking<br />
* 5. A dotted globe which indicates a character is talking in a Whisper<br />
* 6. An exclamation bubble to add things like "Pow!" "Bang!" and "Wham!"<br />
* 7. Is a box where you can put the Title of your project. Just above it is a box icon that allows you to add more rectangular text boxes to your project.<br />
* 8. The Movement icon allows you to add little curves to indicate motion, highlight an object with a sunburst, add some parallel lines to show horizontal or vertical motion, or add a little light bulb to show that someone had a bright idea.<br />
* 9. The circular arrow allows you to click on an object, then on this icon and rotate it clockwise 1/4 turn (90 degrees) with each click.<br />
* 10. This icon allows you to delete something you have added.<br />
* 11. This icon opens and closes the Text pulldown where you can select the font and size of your text as well as select bold, italics, or other colors for your words. Click it to open, and when finished, click again to close. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 12. The familiar stop-sign icon is one way to stop the '''FotoToon''' Activity. You can also use the keyboard shortcut: ctrl-Q.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
==='''The Text Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonTextPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Text Pulldown''' menu allows you to control the appearance of the text you add to your project. Generally, they apply to everything in the box or bubble you are currently working on. You do not have to highlight the text to change it.<br />
<br />
* 11a- Selecting this icon will change the text you are working on to '''Bold'''. Clicking it again reverts back to regular text,<br />
<br />
* 11b- Selecting this icon will change the text your are working on to ''Italics''.<br />
<br />
Note: clicking on both of these icons, in any order, will give you '''''Bold Italic''''' text. Clicking both again, in any order, will get you back to regular text.<br />
<br />
* 11c- Clicking on this icon will open the Text Color Pallete. See below for information on how to use it.<br />
<br />
* 11d- This is a non-functioning icon that identifies this as the Text Pulldown toolbar.<br />
<br />
* 11e- This little pull down allows you to choose the size of the text you are working on.<br />
<br />
* 11f- This pull down offers a choice of 37 different fonts, listed in alphabetical order. Some, such as "Ding Bats" don't actually produce anything. Be sure to test the font on your text to see if it looks the way you would like it to.<br />
<br />
==='''The Color Pallete Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:ScreenshotofFTColorPallete.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Color Pallete Pulldown''' allows you to choose the color of your font. It will apply to everything in the box or bubble but can vary from one box or bubble to the next as you choose. There are 12 preset colors you can use, or you can create a custom color by selecting one of the preset colors and dragging the sliders to give more or less Red, Green, or Blue in the selected color. The little circle at the top of the Color Pallete shows the current color. When you are satisfied with the color you have selected/modified, click on the little circle to accept the chosen color and close the Color Pallete. It may take a few seconds for the new color to appear in the text box. But, don't worry, it will!<br />
<br />
='''Learning with FotoToon 12'''=<br />
=='''Plan Ahead'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''' can be used for a wide variety of learning activities, but the general process is always similar. For the sample project in this section, we will make a 4 panel page using 4 photos. This is a good way to get started since the page can be printed on a single page. <br />
<br />
Here are the general steps you need to complete before you build your first FotoToon project:<br />
<br />
* '''Step One: Decide what your project will be about.''' You can tell a story about anything. For example, it could be about your pets, your home, your family, your town, or, even some photos you took at a party. Any topic is fine for our first project. The sample project will be about "Healthy Snacks" and the photos will be pictures of food.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Two: Make a plan.''' Before you begin you should make a plan that will guide you through the construction of your project. Some people like to draw a little sketch of each pane showing what will be in the picture and a suggestion for what words will be added. If you like the panes can each be on a separate small piece of paper so you can re-arrange them easily This is called a '''Story Board'''. You may have another way you would like to make your plan, just be sure to include information about what pictures you will use, where you will get them, and what text you plan to add.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Three: Gather your images.''' For starters, we will use images that were taken either with a camera, or using the '''Record Activity''' on the XO. Any image that can be imported to the '''Journal''' on your XO and viewed in '''Image Viewer''' can be used. It is a good idea to rename each of the photos you will be using in the Journal. The name can include the number of the pane you plan to use it in so it is easy to find when you begin putting things together.<br />
<br />
==='''Place Your Images'''===<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Journal''' and check to be sure your images are there and can be viewed in the Image Viewer (click on the file to open it and check). Be sure the images have names that include the number of the pane you plan to place them (1,2,3, or 4).<br />
<br />
* Open '''FotoToon''' and find the '''"Add Photo"''' icon (number 2 in the '''FotoToon''' main toolbar shown above). A list of available images will appear. Click on the one you want to put in the first pane. When it has loaded, you can either leave it or remove it with the minus sign icon (number 10 in the main toolbar shown above). '''Warning:''' You can only remove the last image entered. That is why it is important to number the images according to the panes you wish to place them in. After the first image has been placed, continue adding images until all four for your first project have been placed. If you decide later that you want to change their order after they have been placed, you will need to delete them and replace them in the new order. ''It is best to get your final placement before adding any text.''<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallImportImages.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
If you would like to use the same images that will be used in this sample project, you will find them at these links. Go to each link, upload the photo to a usb drive, plug it into your XO, and open by clicking on the image names. They will open in the Image Viewer and be automatically saved so you can access them for your project. <br />
<br />
* Pane-1 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:1-Apple-Fries.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-2 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:2-Soda-Milk.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-3 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:3-Cookies-Yogurt.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-4 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:4-HealthySnacks.png<br />
<br />
==='''Add Dialogue and Titles'''===<br />
<br />
If you have planned well with your storyboard, you will have a pretty good idea of what you want to put in your dialogue balloons and text boxes. You may even have a title in mind for your project. You can actually start this process anywhere in your project. All of the balloons and boxes you will be using to do this will be identified in the first image above, the '''The Main PhotoToonToolbar'''.<br />
<br />
* Making and placing your '''Title''': If you know what you would like your title to be, you can start with that. It can always be changed later. When you start a project in FotoToon there will already be a tiny box for the title in a narrow band across the top of the project window. You can drag the upper left corner of the box to enlarge it (look for the cursor arrow to change to a thinner double headed arrow). You can also move it around in the band across the top. Click on the box and type all or part of your title. Then you can change the type style and size using the pull downs in the '''Text Pulldown''' menu (see 11e and 11f in the picture above). Experiment until you find a style and size you like. You can also change the color of the type. Don't worry if it isn't perfect, you can always come back later and change it. Notice that you can erase part of the text by backspacing over it.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallAddTitle.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this image you can see that we selected '''bold''', a '''red''' color from the color palette, a '''type size''' of 48, and the '''Font''' "Georgia".<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Text Balloons''': You can place the text balloons wherever you like within a pane. Click on the pane, then on the balloon you want to use (see 3,4,and 5 above for explanations). The balloon will appear in the pane. You can drag it to the position where you want it, and also can drag the little tail to point to the source of the dialogue. Add the words to the balloon in the same way you added them to the Title box.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:AddBalloonsCropSM3.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this image you can see that we have added 4 dialogue balloons (#3 in the main toolbar). We could also have used the "cloud" balloon (#4 in the main toolbar), or the "whisper" balloon (#5 in the main toolbar). The first pane is OK, but the first balloon in the second pane needs to be dragged to a better shape and size. The second ballon in the second pane appears just as it does when it is first added. It still needs to have text added and to be resized (by dragging a corner). You can see that our '''type size''' is 12, '''text color''' is black, and we are still using the Georgia '''font'''.<br />
<br />
As you work with the various text items, you may wish to eliminate one entirely. Just click on it, then on the icon with the minus (-) sign (#10 in the main toolbar), and it will disappear.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Exclamation Balloons''': You may wish to include special exclamations to your project. Choose the exclamation balloon (# 6 in the main toolbar). It is possible to eliminate the one longer point on the balloon by dragging it so that it matched the others. Again, type into the balloon just as you did in the title box and dialogue balloons.<br />
<br />
* Adding extra '''Text Boxes''': You can add a text box anywhere in any pane by clicking on the pane and then on the box icon in the diagram (#7 in the main toolbar).<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:Exclamations&Boxes.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
In this example you can see we have added 4 '''exclamation balloons''' and one extra '''text box'''. We used the same '''text size''', '''font''', and '''color''' as in the rest of the project. You could choose to use different ones in your project.<br />
<br />
===Exporting Your Project===<br />
<br />
Now, if you have followed the instructions above, you should have a small, completed FotoToon Project. You may have decided to use the same photos that are in the sample, or you may have chosen to use images you have imported. These can be from your camera, your XO, downloads from the web, projects you have made in other Activities, drawings you made in Paint, or even photos you have modified in Paint (import, then add things and/or crop as you like). When finished, your project will look something like this:<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonFoodFinalSm.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Notice the little red cursor mark at the end of the title in the image. This export was done in FotoToon 11. The update, FotoToon 12 eliminates all stray cursors when exporting. Always be sure you are using the latest version of an Activity.<br />
<br />
Regardless of what you have made for your project, you will probably want to share it with others. You can do this as an email attachment or print it out as a paper copy. To do this, you need to '''export''' your project as an image stored in your Journal. The instructions for exporting your project are shown above. We will repeat them here as well.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
* Look in the Journal. Your project should appear there with the name you gave it before exporting. If you forgot to give it a name, it will just say "FotoToon." If this happened, rename it now, in the Journal before you forget to do it.<br />
<br />
==Extending FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Modifying FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
==Where to report problems==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Credits==<br />
<br />
<br />
== FotoToon 12==</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon&diff=270198Help Activity refresh/Chapter/FotoToon2012-04-29T20:57:29Z<p>Cbigenho: /* Exporting Your Project */</p>
<hr />
<div>[[File:FotoToonIcon.png]]<br />
='''About FotoToon 12'''=<br />
The '''FotoToon''' Activity will allow you to create everything from a simple "comic" strip to a long elaborate illustrated document. You will be able to import many kinds of images into the panes of your project and add text bubbles to help tell the story. You can use photo images taken with the XO or imported from a camera, drawings made with Activities such as Paint, and images of all kinds downloaded from the web. This could include photos, charts and graphs, maps, and the like. <br><br />
This introduction to '''FotoToon''' will show you how to get started with a simple 4 panel project. If you want to learn to do more, you can watch the videos about using '''FotoToon''' that are available for viewing here (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE).<br />
<br />
='''Where to get FotoToon 12'''=<br />
'''FotoToon''' is not included on the basic 11.3.0 (.883) release of Sugar. To use it, you must download it from the Sugar Labs Activity library at: http://activities.sugarlabs.org/es-ES/sugar/addon/4253 You will find instructions for downloading this and other Activities here: (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE)<BR> You will notice that the description of the Activity and other information are in Spanish. That is because '''FotoToon''' was developed in Argentina. However, don't worry! '''FotoToon''' works in other languages as well!<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''', like many other Sugar Activities, is often updated to fix "bugs" that users report. There was one update, from version 11 to version 12 during the time this instruction chapter was written. By the time you use it, there may be others. The changes are usually minor and should not interfere with the usefulness of this information. Always try to be sure you are using the latest version.<br />
<br />
='''Using FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
=='''The Toolbars'''==<br />
<br />
=== '''The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToon12 Main Screen.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''FotoToon Toolbar''' has 13 icons including 2 with pulldown menus. The '''main FotoToon''' toolbar allows you to access many features of the Activity. Here is a description of what each of the icons will allow you to do:<br />
<br />
* 1. The '''FotoToon''' icon. When you hover your cursor over this icon you will open a small pulldown that allows you to export your work as an image. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 2. The '''Add Image''' icon. This icon allows you to add an image to your project. It can be a photo you take with the XO or digital camera, or import from the web. It can also be a picture, page, or project you create in another Sugar Activity.<br />
<br />
The next four icons allow you to add text to your drawings and photos. They include:<br />
* 3. A normal dialogue Globe<br />
* 4. A cloud shape to tell what a character is silently Thinking<br />
* 5. A dotted globe which indicates a character is talking in a Whisper<br />
* 6. An exclamation bubble to add things like "Pow!" "Bang!" and "Wham!"<br />
* 7. Is a box where you can put the Title of your project. Just above it is a box icon that allows you to add more rectangular text boxes to your project.<br />
* 8. The Movement icon allows you to add little curves to indicate motion, highlight an object with a sunburst, add some parallel lines to show horizontal or vertical motion, or add a little light bulb to show that someone had a bright idea.<br />
* 9. The circular arrow allows you to click on an object, then on this icon and rotate it clockwise 1/4 turn (90 degrees) with each click.<br />
* 10. This icon allows you to delete something you have added.<br />
* 11. This icon opens and closes the Text pulldown where you can select the font and size of your text as well as select bold, italics, or other colors for your words. Click it to open, and when finished, click again to close. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 12. The familiar stop-sign icon is one way to stop the '''FotoToon''' Activity. You can also use the keyboard shortcut: ctrl-Q.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
==='''The Text Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonTextPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Text Pulldown''' menu allows you to control the appearance of the text you add to your project. Generally, they apply to everything in the box or bubble you are currently working on. You do not have to highlight the text to change it.<br />
<br />
* 11a- Selecting this icon will change the text you are working on to '''Bold'''. Clicking it again reverts back to regular text,<br />
<br />
* 11b- Selecting this icon will change the text your are working on to ''Italics''.<br />
<br />
Note: clicking on both of these icons, in any order, will give you '''''Bold Italic''''' text. Clicking both again, in any order, will get you back to regular text.<br />
<br />
* 11c- Clicking on this icon will open the Text Color Pallete. See below for information on how to use it.<br />
<br />
* 11d- This is a non-functioning icon that identifies this as the Text Pulldown toolbar.<br />
<br />
* 11e- This little pull down allows you to choose the size of the text you are working on.<br />
<br />
* 11f- This pull down offers a choice of 37 different fonts, listed in alphabetical order. Some, such as "Ding Bats" don't actually produce anything. Be sure to test the font on your text to see if it looks the way you would like it to.<br />
<br />
==='''The Color Pallete Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:ScreenshotofFTColorPallete.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Color Pallete Pulldown''' allows you to choose the color of your font. It will apply to everything in the box or bubble but can vary from one box or bubble to the next as you choose. There are 12 preset colors you can use, or you can create a custom color by selecting one of the preset colors and dragging the sliders to give more or less Red, Green, or Blue in the selected color. The little circle at the top of the Color Pallete shows the current color. When you are satisfied with the color you have selected/modified, click on the little circle to accept the chosen color and close the Color Pallete. It may take a few seconds for the new color to appear in the text box. But, don't worry, it will!<br />
<br />
='''Learning with FotoToon 12'''=<br />
=='''Plan Ahead'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''' can be used for a wide variety of learning activities, but the general process is always similar. For the sample project in this section, we will make a 4 panel page using 4 photos. This is a good way to get started since the page can be printed on a single page. <br />
<br />
Here are the general steps you need to complete before you build your first FotoToon project:<br />
<br />
* '''Step One: Decide what your project will be about.''' You can tell a story about anything. For example, it could be about your pets, your home, your family, your town, or, even some photos you took at a party. Any topic is fine for our first project. The sample project will be about "Healthy Snacks" and the photos will be pictures of food.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Two: Make a plan.''' Before you begin you should make a plan that will guide you through the construction of your project. Some people like to draw a little sketch of each pane showing what will be in the picture and a suggestion for what words will be added. If you like the panes can each be on a separate small piece of paper so you can re-arrange them easily This is called a '''Story Board'''. You may have another way you would like to make your plan, just be sure to include information about what pictures you will use, where you will get them, and what text you plan to add.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Three: Gather your images.''' For starters, we will use images that were taken either with a camera, or using the '''Record Activity''' on the XO. Any image that can be imported to the '''Journal''' on your XO and viewed in '''Image Viewer''' can be used. It is a good idea to rename each of the photos you will be using in the Journal. The name can include the number of the pane you plan to use it in so it is easy to find when you begin putting things together.<br />
<br />
==='''Place Your Images'''===<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Journal''' and check to be sure your images are there and can be viewed in the Image Viewer (click on the file to open it and check). Be sure the images have names that include the number of the pane you plan to place them (1,2,3, or 4).<br />
<br />
* Open '''FotoToon''' and find the '''"Add Photo"''' icon (number 2 in the '''FotoToon''' main toolbar shown above). A list of available images will appear. Click on the one you want to put in the first pane. When it has loaded, you can either leave it or remove it with the minus sign icon (number 10 in the main toolbar shown above). '''Warning:''' You can only remove the last image entered. That is why it is important to number the images according to the panes you wish to place them in. After the first image has been placed, continue adding images until all four for your first project have been placed. If you decide later that you want to change their order after they have been placed, you will need to delete them and replace them in the new order. ''It is best to get your final placement before adding any text.''<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallImportImages.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
If you would like to use the same images that will be used in this sample project, you will find them at these links. Go to each link, upload the photo to a usb drive, plug it into your XO, and open by clicking on the image names. They will open in the Image Viewer and be automatically saved so you can access them for your project. <br />
<br />
* Pane-1 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:1-Apple-Fries.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-2 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:2-Soda-Milk.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-3 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:3-Cookies-Yogurt.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-4 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:4-HealthySnacks.png<br />
<br />
==='''Add Dialogue and Titles'''===<br />
<br />
If you have planned well with your storyboard, you will have a pretty good idea of what you want to put in your dialogue balloons and text boxes. You may even have a title in mind for your project. You can actually start this process anywhere in your project. All of the balloons and boxes you will be using to do this will be identified in the first image above, the '''The Main PhotoToonToolbar'''.<br />
<br />
* Making and placing your '''Title''': If you know what you would like your title to be, you can start with that. It can always be changed later. When you start a project in FotoToon there will already be a tiny box for the title in a narrow band across the top of the project window. You can drag the upper left corner of the box to enlarge it (look for the cursor arrow to change to a thinner double headed arrow). You can also move it around in the band across the top. Click on the box and type all or part of your title. Then you can change the type style and size using the pull downs in the '''Text Pulldown''' menu (see 11e and 11f in the picture above). Experiment until you find a style and size you like. You can also change the color of the type. Don't worry if it isn't perfect, you can always come back later and change it. Notice that you can erase part of the text by backspacing over it.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallAddTitle.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this image you can see that we selected '''bold''', a '''red''' color from the color palette, a '''type size''' of 48, and the '''Font''' "Georgia".<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Text Balloons''': You can place the text balloons wherever you like within a pane. Click on the pane, then on the balloon you want to use (see 3,4,and 5 above for explanations). The balloon will appear in the pane. You can drag it to the position where you want it, and also can drag the little tail to point to the source of the dialogue. Add the words to the balloon in the same way you added them to the Title box.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:AddBalloonsCropSM3.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this image you can see that we have added 4 dialogue balloons (#3 in the main toolbar). We could also have used the "cloud" balloon (#4 in the main toolbar), or the "whisper" balloon (#5 in the main toolbar). The first pane is OK, but the first balloon in the second pane needs to be dragged to a better shape and size. The second ballon in the second pane appears just as it does when it is first added. It still needs to have text added and to be resized (by dragging a corner). You can see that our '''type size''' is 12, '''text color''' is black, and we are still using the Georgia '''font'''.<br />
<br />
As you work with the various text items, you may wish to eliminate one entirely. Just click on it, then on the icon with the minus (-) sign (#10 in the main toolbar), and it will disappear.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Exclamation Balloons''': You may wish to include special exclamations to your project. Choose the exclamation balloon (# 6 in the main toolbar). It is possible to eliminate the one longer point on the balloon by dragging it so that it matched the others. Again, type into the balloon just as you did in the title box and dialogue balloons.<br />
<br />
* Adding extra '''Text Boxes''': You can add a text box anywhere in any pane by clicking on the pane and then on the box icon in the diagram (#7 in the main toolbar).<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:Exclamations&Boxes.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
In this example you can see we have added 4 '''exclamation balloons''' and one extra '''text box'''. We used the same '''text size''', '''font''', and '''color''' as in the rest of the project. You could choose to use different ones in your project.<br />
<br />
===Exporting Your Project===<br />
<br />
Now, if you have followed the instructions above, you should have a small, completed FotoToon Project. You may have decided to use the same photos that are in the sample, or you may have chosen to use images you have imported. These can be from your camera, your XO, downloads from the web, projects you have made in other Activities, drawings you made in Paint, or even photos you have modified in Paint (import, then add things and/or crop as you like). When finished, your project will look something like this:<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonFoodFinalSm.png]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Notice the little red cursor mark at the end of the title in the image. This export was done in FotoToon 11. The update, FotoToon 12 eliminates all stray cursors when exporting. Always be sure you are using the latest version of an Activity.<br />
<br />
Regardless of what you have made for your project, you will probably want to share it with others. You can do this as an email attachment or print it out as a paper copy. To do this, you need to '''export''' your project as an image stored in your Journal. The instructions for exporting your project are shown above. We will repeat them here as well.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
* Look in the Journal. Your project should appear there with the name you gave it before exporting. If you forgot to give it a name, it will just say "FotoToon." If this happened, rename it now, in the Journal before you forget to do it.<br />
<br />
==Extending FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Modifying FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
==Where to report problems==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Credits==<br />
<br />
<br />
== FotoToon 12==</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon&diff=270197Help Activity refresh/Chapter/FotoToon2012-04-29T20:47:12Z<p>Cbigenho: /* Exporting Your Project */</p>
<hr />
<div>[[File:FotoToonIcon.png]]<br />
='''About FotoToon 12'''=<br />
The '''FotoToon''' Activity will allow you to create everything from a simple "comic" strip to a long elaborate illustrated document. You will be able to import many kinds of images into the panes of your project and add text bubbles to help tell the story. You can use photo images taken with the XO or imported from a camera, drawings made with Activities such as Paint, and images of all kinds downloaded from the web. This could include photos, charts and graphs, maps, and the like. <br><br />
This introduction to '''FotoToon''' will show you how to get started with a simple 4 panel project. If you want to learn to do more, you can watch the videos about using '''FotoToon''' that are available for viewing here (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE).<br />
<br />
='''Where to get FotoToon 12'''=<br />
'''FotoToon''' is not included on the basic 11.3.0 (.883) release of Sugar. To use it, you must download it from the Sugar Labs Activity library at: http://activities.sugarlabs.org/es-ES/sugar/addon/4253 You will find instructions for downloading this and other Activities here: (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE)<BR> You will notice that the description of the Activity and other information are in Spanish. That is because '''FotoToon''' was developed in Argentina. However, don't worry! '''FotoToon''' works in other languages as well!<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''', like many other Sugar Activities, is often updated to fix "bugs" that users report. There was one update, from version 11 to version 12 during the time this instruction chapter was written. By the time you use it, there may be others. The changes are usually minor and should not interfere with the usefulness of this information. Always try to be sure you are using the latest version.<br />
<br />
='''Using FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
=='''The Toolbars'''==<br />
<br />
=== '''The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToon12 Main Screen.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''FotoToon Toolbar''' has 13 icons including 2 with pulldown menus. The '''main FotoToon''' toolbar allows you to access many features of the Activity. Here is a description of what each of the icons will allow you to do:<br />
<br />
* 1. The '''FotoToon''' icon. When you hover your cursor over this icon you will open a small pulldown that allows you to export your work as an image. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 2. The '''Add Image''' icon. This icon allows you to add an image to your project. It can be a photo you take with the XO or digital camera, or import from the web. It can also be a picture, page, or project you create in another Sugar Activity.<br />
<br />
The next four icons allow you to add text to your drawings and photos. They include:<br />
* 3. A normal dialogue Globe<br />
* 4. A cloud shape to tell what a character is silently Thinking<br />
* 5. A dotted globe which indicates a character is talking in a Whisper<br />
* 6. An exclamation bubble to add things like "Pow!" "Bang!" and "Wham!"<br />
* 7. Is a box where you can put the Title of your project. Just above it is a box icon that allows you to add more rectangular text boxes to your project.<br />
* 8. The Movement icon allows you to add little curves to indicate motion, highlight an object with a sunburst, add some parallel lines to show horizontal or vertical motion, or add a little light bulb to show that someone had a bright idea.<br />
* 9. The circular arrow allows you to click on an object, then on this icon and rotate it clockwise 1/4 turn (90 degrees) with each click.<br />
* 10. This icon allows you to delete something you have added.<br />
* 11. This icon opens and closes the Text pulldown where you can select the font and size of your text as well as select bold, italics, or other colors for your words. Click it to open, and when finished, click again to close. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 12. The familiar stop-sign icon is one way to stop the '''FotoToon''' Activity. You can also use the keyboard shortcut: ctrl-Q.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
==='''The Text Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonTextPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Text Pulldown''' menu allows you to control the appearance of the text you add to your project. Generally, they apply to everything in the box or bubble you are currently working on. You do not have to highlight the text to change it.<br />
<br />
* 11a- Selecting this icon will change the text you are working on to '''Bold'''. Clicking it again reverts back to regular text,<br />
<br />
* 11b- Selecting this icon will change the text your are working on to ''Italics''.<br />
<br />
Note: clicking on both of these icons, in any order, will give you '''''Bold Italic''''' text. Clicking both again, in any order, will get you back to regular text.<br />
<br />
* 11c- Clicking on this icon will open the Text Color Pallete. See below for information on how to use it.<br />
<br />
* 11d- This is a non-functioning icon that identifies this as the Text Pulldown toolbar.<br />
<br />
* 11e- This little pull down allows you to choose the size of the text you are working on.<br />
<br />
* 11f- This pull down offers a choice of 37 different fonts, listed in alphabetical order. Some, such as "Ding Bats" don't actually produce anything. Be sure to test the font on your text to see if it looks the way you would like it to.<br />
<br />
==='''The Color Pallete Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:ScreenshotofFTColorPallete.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Color Pallete Pulldown''' allows you to choose the color of your font. It will apply to everything in the box or bubble but can vary from one box or bubble to the next as you choose. There are 12 preset colors you can use, or you can create a custom color by selecting one of the preset colors and dragging the sliders to give more or less Red, Green, or Blue in the selected color. The little circle at the top of the Color Pallete shows the current color. When you are satisfied with the color you have selected/modified, click on the little circle to accept the chosen color and close the Color Pallete. It may take a few seconds for the new color to appear in the text box. But, don't worry, it will!<br />
<br />
='''Learning with FotoToon 12'''=<br />
=='''Plan Ahead'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''' can be used for a wide variety of learning activities, but the general process is always similar. For the sample project in this section, we will make a 4 panel page using 4 photos. This is a good way to get started since the page can be printed on a single page. <br />
<br />
Here are the general steps you need to complete before you build your first FotoToon project:<br />
<br />
* '''Step One: Decide what your project will be about.''' You can tell a story about anything. For example, it could be about your pets, your home, your family, your town, or, even some photos you took at a party. Any topic is fine for our first project. The sample project will be about "Healthy Snacks" and the photos will be pictures of food.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Two: Make a plan.''' Before you begin you should make a plan that will guide you through the construction of your project. Some people like to draw a little sketch of each pane showing what will be in the picture and a suggestion for what words will be added. If you like the panes can each be on a separate small piece of paper so you can re-arrange them easily This is called a '''Story Board'''. You may have another way you would like to make your plan, just be sure to include information about what pictures you will use, where you will get them, and what text you plan to add.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Three: Gather your images.''' For starters, we will use images that were taken either with a camera, or using the '''Record Activity''' on the XO. Any image that can be imported to the '''Journal''' on your XO and viewed in '''Image Viewer''' can be used. It is a good idea to rename each of the photos you will be using in the Journal. The name can include the number of the pane you plan to use it in so it is easy to find when you begin putting things together.<br />
<br />
==='''Place Your Images'''===<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Journal''' and check to be sure your images are there and can be viewed in the Image Viewer (click on the file to open it and check). Be sure the images have names that include the number of the pane you plan to place them (1,2,3, or 4).<br />
<br />
* Open '''FotoToon''' and find the '''"Add Photo"''' icon (number 2 in the '''FotoToon''' main toolbar shown above). A list of available images will appear. Click on the one you want to put in the first pane. When it has loaded, you can either leave it or remove it with the minus sign icon (number 10 in the main toolbar shown above). '''Warning:''' You can only remove the last image entered. That is why it is important to number the images according to the panes you wish to place them in. After the first image has been placed, continue adding images until all four for your first project have been placed. If you decide later that you want to change their order after they have been placed, you will need to delete them and replace them in the new order. ''It is best to get your final placement before adding any text.''<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallImportImages.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
If you would like to use the same images that will be used in this sample project, you will find them at these links. Go to each link, upload the photo to a usb drive, plug it into your XO, and open by clicking on the image names. They will open in the Image Viewer and be automatically saved so you can access them for your project. <br />
<br />
* Pane-1 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:1-Apple-Fries.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-2 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:2-Soda-Milk.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-3 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:3-Cookies-Yogurt.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-4 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:4-HealthySnacks.png<br />
<br />
==='''Add Dialogue and Titles'''===<br />
<br />
If you have planned well with your storyboard, you will have a pretty good idea of what you want to put in your dialogue balloons and text boxes. You may even have a title in mind for your project. You can actually start this process anywhere in your project. All of the balloons and boxes you will be using to do this will be identified in the first image above, the '''The Main PhotoToonToolbar'''.<br />
<br />
* Making and placing your '''Title''': If you know what you would like your title to be, you can start with that. It can always be changed later. When you start a project in FotoToon there will already be a tiny box for the title in a narrow band across the top of the project window. You can drag the upper left corner of the box to enlarge it (look for the cursor arrow to change to a thinner double headed arrow). You can also move it around in the band across the top. Click on the box and type all or part of your title. Then you can change the type style and size using the pull downs in the '''Text Pulldown''' menu (see 11e and 11f in the picture above). Experiment until you find a style and size you like. You can also change the color of the type. Don't worry if it isn't perfect, you can always come back later and change it. Notice that you can erase part of the text by backspacing over it.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallAddTitle.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this image you can see that we selected '''bold''', a '''red''' color from the color palette, a '''type size''' of 48, and the '''Font''' "Georgia".<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Text Balloons''': You can place the text balloons wherever you like within a pane. Click on the pane, then on the balloon you want to use (see 3,4,and 5 above for explanations). The balloon will appear in the pane. You can drag it to the position where you want it, and also can drag the little tail to point to the source of the dialogue. Add the words to the balloon in the same way you added them to the Title box.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:AddBalloonsCropSM3.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this image you can see that we have added 4 dialogue balloons (#3 in the main toolbar). We could also have used the "cloud" balloon (#4 in the main toolbar), or the "whisper" balloon (#5 in the main toolbar). The first pane is OK, but the first balloon in the second pane needs to be dragged to a better shape and size. The second ballon in the second pane appears just as it does when it is first added. It still needs to have text added and to be resized (by dragging a corner). You can see that our '''type size''' is 12, '''text color''' is black, and we are still using the Georgia '''font'''.<br />
<br />
As you work with the various text items, you may wish to eliminate one entirely. Just click on it, then on the icon with the minus (-) sign (#10 in the main toolbar), and it will disappear.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Exclamation Balloons''': You may wish to include special exclamations to your project. Choose the exclamation balloon (# 6 in the main toolbar). It is possible to eliminate the one longer point on the balloon by dragging it so that it matched the others. Again, type into the balloon just as you did in the title box and dialogue balloons.<br />
<br />
* Adding extra '''Text Boxes''': You can add a text box anywhere in any pane by clicking on the pane and then on the box icon in the diagram (#7 in the main toolbar).<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:Exclamations&Boxes.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
In this example you can see we have added 4 '''exclamation balloons''' and one extra '''text box'''. We used the same '''text size''', '''font''', and '''color''' as in the rest of the project. You could choose to use different ones in your project.<br />
<br />
===Exporting Your Project===<br />
<br />
Now, if you have followed the instructions above, you should have a small, completed FotoToon Project. You may have decided to use the same photos that are in the sample, or you may have chosen to use images you have imported. These can be from your camera, your XO, downloads from the web, drawings you made in Paint, or even photos you have modified in Paint (import, then add things and/or crop as you like). When finished, your project will look something like this:<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonFoodFinalSm.png]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Notice the little red cursor mark at the end of the title in the image. This export was done in FotoToon 11. The update, FotoToon 12 eliminates all stray cursors when exporting. Always be sure you are using the latest version of an Activity.<br />
<br />
Regardless of what you have made for your project, you will probably want to share it with others. You can do this as an email attachment or print it out as a paper copy. To do this, you need to '''export''' your project as an image stored in your Journal. Here's how to do it:<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Export Pulldown''' and follow the instructions in '''1a''' above. We will repeat them here as well.<br />
<br />
==Extending FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Modifying FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
==Where to report problems==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Credits==<br />
<br />
<br />
== FotoToon 12==</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=File:FotoToonFoodFinalSm.png&diff=270196File:FotoToonFoodFinalSm.png2012-04-29T20:40:43Z<p>Cbigenho: Final image from FotoToon11. Update (12) eliminates the stray cursor in the title</p>
<hr />
<div>Final image from FotoToon11. Update (12) eliminates the stray cursor in the title</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon&diff=270142Help Activity refresh/Chapter/FotoToon2012-04-26T22:14:44Z<p>Cbigenho: /* Exporting Your Project */</p>
<hr />
<div>[[File:FotoToonIcon.png]]<br />
='''About FotoToon 12'''=<br />
The '''FotoToon''' Activity will allow you to create everything from a simple "comic" strip to a long elaborate illustrated document. You will be able to import many kinds of images into the panes of your project and add text bubbles to help tell the story. You can use photo images taken with the XO or imported from a camera, drawings made with Activities such as Paint, and images of all kinds downloaded from the web. This could include photos, charts and graphs, maps, and the like. <br><br />
This introduction to '''FotoToon''' will show you how to get started with a simple 4 panel project. If you want to learn to do more, you can watch the videos about using '''FotoToon''' that are available for viewing here (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE).<br />
<br />
='''Where to get FotoToon 12'''=<br />
'''FotoToon''' is not included on the basic 11.3.0 (.883) release of Sugar. To use it, you must download it from the Sugar Labs Activity library at: http://activities.sugarlabs.org/es-ES/sugar/addon/4253 You will find instructions for downloading this and other Activities here: (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE)<BR> You will notice that the description of the Activity and other information are in Spanish. That is because '''FotoToon''' was developed in Argentina. However, don't worry! '''FotoToon''' works in other languages as well!<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''', like many other Sugar Activities, is often updated to fix "bugs" that users report. There was one update, from version 11 to version 12 during the time this instruction chapter was written. By the time you use it, there may be others. The changes are usually minor and should not interfere with the usefulness of this information. Always try to be sure you are using the latest version.<br />
<br />
='''Using FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
=='''The Toolbars'''==<br />
<br />
=== '''The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToon12 Main Screen.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''FotoToon Toolbar''' has 13 icons including 2 with pulldown menus. The '''main FotoToon''' toolbar allows you to access many features of the Activity. Here is a description of what each of the icons will allow you to do:<br />
<br />
* 1. The '''FotoToon''' icon. When you hover your cursor over this icon you will open a small pulldown that allows you to export your work as an image. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 2. The '''Add Image''' icon. This icon allows you to add an image to your project. It can be a photo you take with the XO or digital camera, or import from the web. It can also be a picture, page, or project you create in another Sugar Activity.<br />
<br />
The next four icons allow you to add text to your drawings and photos. They include:<br />
* 3. A normal dialogue Globe<br />
* 4. A cloud shape to tell what a character is silently Thinking<br />
* 5. A dotted globe which indicates a character is talking in a Whisper<br />
* 6. An exclamation bubble to add things like "Pow!" "Bang!" and "Wham!"<br />
* 7. Is a box where you can put the Title of your project. Just above it is a box icon that allows you to add more rectangular text boxes to your project.<br />
* 8. The Movement icon allows you to add little curves to indicate motion, highlight an object with a sunburst, add some parallel lines to show horizontal or vertical motion, or add a little light bulb to show that someone had a bright idea.<br />
* 9. The circular arrow allows you to click on an object, then on this icon and rotate it clockwise 1/4 turn (90 degrees) with each click.<br />
* 10. This icon allows you to delete something you have added.<br />
* 11. This icon opens and closes the Text pulldown where you can select the font and size of your text as well as select bold, italics, or other colors for your words. Click it to open, and when finished, click again to close. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 12. The familiar stop-sign icon is one way to stop the '''FotoToon''' Activity. You can also use the keyboard shortcut: ctrl-Q.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
==='''The Text Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonTextPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Text Pulldown''' menu allows you to control the appearance of the text you add to your project. Generally, they apply to everything in the box or bubble you are currently working on. You do not have to highlight the text to change it.<br />
<br />
* 11a- Selecting this icon will change the text you are working on to '''Bold'''. Clicking it again reverts back to regular text,<br />
<br />
* 11b- Selecting this icon will change the text your are working on to ''Italics''.<br />
<br />
Note: clicking on both of these icons, in any order, will give you '''''Bold Italic''''' text. Clicking both again, in any order, will get you back to regular text.<br />
<br />
* 11c- Clicking on this icon will open the Text Color Pallete. See below for information on how to use it.<br />
<br />
* 11d- This is a non-functioning icon that identifies this as the Text Pulldown toolbar.<br />
<br />
* 11e- This little pull down allows you to choose the size of the text you are working on.<br />
<br />
* 11f- This pull down offers a choice of 37 different fonts, listed in alphabetical order. Some, such as "Ding Bats" don't actually produce anything. Be sure to test the font on your text to see if it looks the way you would like it to.<br />
<br />
==='''The Color Pallete Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:ScreenshotofFTColorPallete.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Color Pallete Pulldown''' allows you to choose the color of your font. It will apply to everything in the box or bubble but can vary from one box or bubble to the next as you choose. There are 12 preset colors you can use, or you can create a custom color by selecting one of the preset colors and dragging the sliders to give more or less Red, Green, or Blue in the selected color. The little circle at the top of the Color Pallete shows the current color. When you are satisfied with the color you have selected/modified, click on the little circle to accept the chosen color and close the Color Pallete. It may take a few seconds for the new color to appear in the text box. But, don't worry, it will!<br />
<br />
='''Learning with FotoToon 12'''=<br />
=='''Plan Ahead'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''' can be used for a wide variety of learning activities, but the general process is always similar. For the sample project in this section, we will make a 4 panel page using 4 photos. This is a good way to get started since the page can be printed on a single page. <br />
<br />
Here are the general steps you need to complete before you build your first FotoToon project:<br />
<br />
* '''Step One: Decide what your project will be about.''' You can tell a story about anything. For example, it could be about your pets, your home, your family, your town, or, even some photos you took at a party. Any topic is fine for our first project. The sample project will be about "Healthy Snacks" and the photos will be pictures of food.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Two: Make a plan.''' Before you begin you should make a plan that will guide you through the construction of your project. Some people like to draw a little sketch of each pane showing what will be in the picture and a suggestion for what words will be added. If you like the panes can each be on a separate small piece of paper so you can re-arrange them easily This is called a '''Story Board'''. You may have another way you would like to make your plan, just be sure to include information about what pictures you will use, where you will get them, and what text you plan to add.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Three: Gather your images.''' For starters, we will use images that were taken either with a camera, or using the '''Record Activity''' on the XO. Any image that can be imported to the '''Journal''' on your XO and viewed in '''Image Viewer''' can be used. It is a good idea to rename each of the photos you will be using in the Journal. The name can include the number of the pane you plan to use it in so it is easy to find when you begin putting things together.<br />
<br />
==='''Place Your Images'''===<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Journal''' and check to be sure your images are there and can be viewed in the Image Viewer (click on the file to open it and check). Be sure the images have names that include the number of the pane you plan to place them (1,2,3, or 4).<br />
<br />
* Open '''FotoToon''' and find the '''"Add Photo"''' icon (number 2 in the '''FotoToon''' main toolbar shown above). A list of available images will appear. Click on the one you want to put in the first pane. When it has loaded, you can either leave it or remove it with the minus sign icon (number 10 in the main toolbar shown above). '''Warning:''' You can only remove the last image entered. That is why it is important to number the images according to the panes you wish to place them in. After the first image has been placed, continue adding images until all four for your first project have been placed. If you decide later that you want to change their order after they have been placed, you will need to delete them and replace them in the new order. ''It is best to get your final placement before adding any text.''<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallImportImages.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
If you would like to use the same images that will be used in this sample project, you will find them at these links. Go to each link, upload the photo to a usb drive, plug it into your XO, and open by clicking on the image names. They will open in the Image Viewer and be automatically saved so you can access them for your project. <br />
<br />
* Pane-1 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:1-Apple-Fries.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-2 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:2-Soda-Milk.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-3 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:3-Cookies-Yogurt.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-4 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:4-HealthySnacks.png<br />
<br />
==='''Add Dialogue and Titles'''===<br />
<br />
If you have planned well with your storyboard, you will have a pretty good idea of what you want to put in your dialogue balloons and text boxes. You may even have a title in mind for your project. You can actually start this process anywhere in your project. All of the balloons and boxes you will be using to do this will be identified in the first image above, the '''The Main PhotoToonToolbar'''.<br />
<br />
* Making and placing your '''Title''': If you know what you would like your title to be, you can start with that. It can always be changed later. When you start a project in FotoToon there will already be a tiny box for the title in a narrow band across the top of the project window. You can drag the upper left corner of the box to enlarge it (look for the cursor arrow to change to a thinner double headed arrow). You can also move it around in the band across the top. Click on the box and type all or part of your title. Then you can change the type style and size using the pull downs in the '''Text Pulldown''' menu (see 11e and 11f in the picture above). Experiment until you find a style and size you like. You can also change the color of the type. Don't worry if it isn't perfect, you can always come back later and change it. Notice that you can erase part of the text by backspacing over it.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallAddTitle.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this image you can see that we selected '''bold''', a '''red''' color from the color palette, a '''type size''' of 48, and the '''Font''' "Georgia".<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Text Balloons''': You can place the text balloons wherever you like within a pane. Click on the pane, then on the balloon you want to use (see 3,4,and 5 above for explanations). The balloon will appear in the pane. You can drag it to the position where you want it, and also can drag the little tail to point to the source of the dialogue. Add the words to the balloon in the same way you added them to the Title box.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:AddBalloonsCropSM3.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this image you can see that we have added 4 dialogue balloons (#3 in the main toolbar). We could also have used the "cloud" balloon (#4 in the main toolbar), or the "whisper" balloon (#5 in the main toolbar). The first pane is OK, but the first balloon in the second pane needs to be dragged to a better shape and size. The second ballon in the second pane appears just as it does when it is first added. It still needs to have text added and to be resized (by dragging a corner). You can see that our '''type size''' is 12, '''text color''' is black, and we are still using the Georgia '''font'''.<br />
<br />
As you work with the various text items, you may wish to eliminate one entirely. Just click on it, then on the icon with the minus (-) sign (#10 in the main toolbar), and it will disappear.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Exclamation Balloons''': You may wish to include special exclamations to your project. Choose the exclamation balloon (# 6 in the main toolbar). It is possible to eliminate the one longer point on the balloon by dragging it so that it matched the others. Again, type into the balloon just as you did in the title box and dialogue balloons.<br />
<br />
* Adding extra '''Text Boxes''': You can add a text box anywhere in any pane by clicking on the pane and then on the box icon in the diagram (#7 in the main toolbar).<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:Exclamations&Boxes.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
In this example you can see we have added 4 '''exclamation balloons''' and one extra '''text box'''. We used the same '''text size''', '''font''', and '''color''' as in the rest of the project. You could choose to use different ones in your project.<br />
<br />
===Exporting Your Project===<br />
<br />
Now, if you have followed the instructions above, you should have a small, completed FotoToon Project. You may have decided to use the same photos that are in the sample, or you may have chosen to use images you have imported. These can be from your camera, your XO, downloads from the web, drawings you made in Paint, Photos you have modified in Paint (import, then add things and/or crop as you like). <br />
<br />
Regardless of what you have made for your project, you will probably want to share it with others. You can do this as an email attachment or print it out for a paper copy. To do this, you need to '''export''' your project as an image stored in your Journal. Here's how to do it:<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Export Pulldown''' and follow the instructions in '''1a''' above.<br />
<br />
==Extending FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Modifying FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
==Where to report problems==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Credits==<br />
<br />
<br />
== FotoToon 12==</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon&diff=270141Help Activity refresh/Chapter/FotoToon2012-04-26T22:14:20Z<p>Cbigenho: /* Exporting Your Project */</p>
<hr />
<div>[[File:FotoToonIcon.png]]<br />
='''About FotoToon 12'''=<br />
The '''FotoToon''' Activity will allow you to create everything from a simple "comic" strip to a long elaborate illustrated document. You will be able to import many kinds of images into the panes of your project and add text bubbles to help tell the story. You can use photo images taken with the XO or imported from a camera, drawings made with Activities such as Paint, and images of all kinds downloaded from the web. This could include photos, charts and graphs, maps, and the like. <br><br />
This introduction to '''FotoToon''' will show you how to get started with a simple 4 panel project. If you want to learn to do more, you can watch the videos about using '''FotoToon''' that are available for viewing here (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE).<br />
<br />
='''Where to get FotoToon 12'''=<br />
'''FotoToon''' is not included on the basic 11.3.0 (.883) release of Sugar. To use it, you must download it from the Sugar Labs Activity library at: http://activities.sugarlabs.org/es-ES/sugar/addon/4253 You will find instructions for downloading this and other Activities here: (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE)<BR> You will notice that the description of the Activity and other information are in Spanish. That is because '''FotoToon''' was developed in Argentina. However, don't worry! '''FotoToon''' works in other languages as well!<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''', like many other Sugar Activities, is often updated to fix "bugs" that users report. There was one update, from version 11 to version 12 during the time this instruction chapter was written. By the time you use it, there may be others. The changes are usually minor and should not interfere with the usefulness of this information. Always try to be sure you are using the latest version.<br />
<br />
='''Using FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
=='''The Toolbars'''==<br />
<br />
=== '''The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToon12 Main Screen.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''FotoToon Toolbar''' has 13 icons including 2 with pulldown menus. The '''main FotoToon''' toolbar allows you to access many features of the Activity. Here is a description of what each of the icons will allow you to do:<br />
<br />
* 1. The '''FotoToon''' icon. When you hover your cursor over this icon you will open a small pulldown that allows you to export your work as an image. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 2. The '''Add Image''' icon. This icon allows you to add an image to your project. It can be a photo you take with the XO or digital camera, or import from the web. It can also be a picture, page, or project you create in another Sugar Activity.<br />
<br />
The next four icons allow you to add text to your drawings and photos. They include:<br />
* 3. A normal dialogue Globe<br />
* 4. A cloud shape to tell what a character is silently Thinking<br />
* 5. A dotted globe which indicates a character is talking in a Whisper<br />
* 6. An exclamation bubble to add things like "Pow!" "Bang!" and "Wham!"<br />
* 7. Is a box where you can put the Title of your project. Just above it is a box icon that allows you to add more rectangular text boxes to your project.<br />
* 8. The Movement icon allows you to add little curves to indicate motion, highlight an object with a sunburst, add some parallel lines to show horizontal or vertical motion, or add a little light bulb to show that someone had a bright idea.<br />
* 9. The circular arrow allows you to click on an object, then on this icon and rotate it clockwise 1/4 turn (90 degrees) with each click.<br />
* 10. This icon allows you to delete something you have added.<br />
* 11. This icon opens and closes the Text pulldown where you can select the font and size of your text as well as select bold, italics, or other colors for your words. Click it to open, and when finished, click again to close. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 12. The familiar stop-sign icon is one way to stop the '''FotoToon''' Activity. You can also use the keyboard shortcut: ctrl-Q.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
==='''The Text Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonTextPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Text Pulldown''' menu allows you to control the appearance of the text you add to your project. Generally, they apply to everything in the box or bubble you are currently working on. You do not have to highlight the text to change it.<br />
<br />
* 11a- Selecting this icon will change the text you are working on to '''Bold'''. Clicking it again reverts back to regular text,<br />
<br />
* 11b- Selecting this icon will change the text your are working on to ''Italics''.<br />
<br />
Note: clicking on both of these icons, in any order, will give you '''''Bold Italic''''' text. Clicking both again, in any order, will get you back to regular text.<br />
<br />
* 11c- Clicking on this icon will open the Text Color Pallete. See below for information on how to use it.<br />
<br />
* 11d- This is a non-functioning icon that identifies this as the Text Pulldown toolbar.<br />
<br />
* 11e- This little pull down allows you to choose the size of the text you are working on.<br />
<br />
* 11f- This pull down offers a choice of 37 different fonts, listed in alphabetical order. Some, such as "Ding Bats" don't actually produce anything. Be sure to test the font on your text to see if it looks the way you would like it to.<br />
<br />
==='''The Color Pallete Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:ScreenshotofFTColorPallete.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Color Pallete Pulldown''' allows you to choose the color of your font. It will apply to everything in the box or bubble but can vary from one box or bubble to the next as you choose. There are 12 preset colors you can use, or you can create a custom color by selecting one of the preset colors and dragging the sliders to give more or less Red, Green, or Blue in the selected color. The little circle at the top of the Color Pallete shows the current color. When you are satisfied with the color you have selected/modified, click on the little circle to accept the chosen color and close the Color Pallete. It may take a few seconds for the new color to appear in the text box. But, don't worry, it will!<br />
<br />
='''Learning with FotoToon 12'''=<br />
=='''Plan Ahead'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''' can be used for a wide variety of learning activities, but the general process is always similar. For the sample project in this section, we will make a 4 panel page using 4 photos. This is a good way to get started since the page can be printed on a single page. <br />
<br />
Here are the general steps you need to complete before you build your first FotoToon project:<br />
<br />
* '''Step One: Decide what your project will be about.''' You can tell a story about anything. For example, it could be about your pets, your home, your family, your town, or, even some photos you took at a party. Any topic is fine for our first project. The sample project will be about "Healthy Snacks" and the photos will be pictures of food.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Two: Make a plan.''' Before you begin you should make a plan that will guide you through the construction of your project. Some people like to draw a little sketch of each pane showing what will be in the picture and a suggestion for what words will be added. If you like the panes can each be on a separate small piece of paper so you can re-arrange them easily This is called a '''Story Board'''. You may have another way you would like to make your plan, just be sure to include information about what pictures you will use, where you will get them, and what text you plan to add.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Three: Gather your images.''' For starters, we will use images that were taken either with a camera, or using the '''Record Activity''' on the XO. Any image that can be imported to the '''Journal''' on your XO and viewed in '''Image Viewer''' can be used. It is a good idea to rename each of the photos you will be using in the Journal. The name can include the number of the pane you plan to use it in so it is easy to find when you begin putting things together.<br />
<br />
==='''Place Your Images'''===<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Journal''' and check to be sure your images are there and can be viewed in the Image Viewer (click on the file to open it and check). Be sure the images have names that include the number of the pane you plan to place them (1,2,3, or 4).<br />
<br />
* Open '''FotoToon''' and find the '''"Add Photo"''' icon (number 2 in the '''FotoToon''' main toolbar shown above). A list of available images will appear. Click on the one you want to put in the first pane. When it has loaded, you can either leave it or remove it with the minus sign icon (number 10 in the main toolbar shown above). '''Warning:''' You can only remove the last image entered. That is why it is important to number the images according to the panes you wish to place them in. After the first image has been placed, continue adding images until all four for your first project have been placed. If you decide later that you want to change their order after they have been placed, you will need to delete them and replace them in the new order. ''It is best to get your final placement before adding any text.''<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallImportImages.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
If you would like to use the same images that will be used in this sample project, you will find them at these links. Go to each link, upload the photo to a usb drive, plug it into your XO, and open by clicking on the image names. They will open in the Image Viewer and be automatically saved so you can access them for your project. <br />
<br />
* Pane-1 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:1-Apple-Fries.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-2 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:2-Soda-Milk.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-3 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:3-Cookies-Yogurt.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-4 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:4-HealthySnacks.png<br />
<br />
==='''Add Dialogue and Titles'''===<br />
<br />
If you have planned well with your storyboard, you will have a pretty good idea of what you want to put in your dialogue balloons and text boxes. You may even have a title in mind for your project. You can actually start this process anywhere in your project. All of the balloons and boxes you will be using to do this will be identified in the first image above, the '''The Main PhotoToonToolbar'''.<br />
<br />
* Making and placing your '''Title''': If you know what you would like your title to be, you can start with that. It can always be changed later. When you start a project in FotoToon there will already be a tiny box for the title in a narrow band across the top of the project window. You can drag the upper left corner of the box to enlarge it (look for the cursor arrow to change to a thinner double headed arrow). You can also move it around in the band across the top. Click on the box and type all or part of your title. Then you can change the type style and size using the pull downs in the '''Text Pulldown''' menu (see 11e and 11f in the picture above). Experiment until you find a style and size you like. You can also change the color of the type. Don't worry if it isn't perfect, you can always come back later and change it. Notice that you can erase part of the text by backspacing over it.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallAddTitle.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this image you can see that we selected '''bold''', a '''red''' color from the color palette, a '''type size''' of 48, and the '''Font''' "Georgia".<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Text Balloons''': You can place the text balloons wherever you like within a pane. Click on the pane, then on the balloon you want to use (see 3,4,and 5 above for explanations). The balloon will appear in the pane. You can drag it to the position where you want it, and also can drag the little tail to point to the source of the dialogue. Add the words to the balloon in the same way you added them to the Title box.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:AddBalloonsCropSM3.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this image you can see that we have added 4 dialogue balloons (#3 in the main toolbar). We could also have used the "cloud" balloon (#4 in the main toolbar), or the "whisper" balloon (#5 in the main toolbar). The first pane is OK, but the first balloon in the second pane needs to be dragged to a better shape and size. The second ballon in the second pane appears just as it does when it is first added. It still needs to have text added and to be resized (by dragging a corner). You can see that our '''type size''' is 12, '''text color''' is black, and we are still using the Georgia '''font'''.<br />
<br />
As you work with the various text items, you may wish to eliminate one entirely. Just click on it, then on the icon with the minus (-) sign (#10 in the main toolbar), and it will disappear.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Exclamation Balloons''': You may wish to include special exclamations to your project. Choose the exclamation balloon (# 6 in the main toolbar). It is possible to eliminate the one longer point on the balloon by dragging it so that it matched the others. Again, type into the balloon just as you did in the title box and dialogue balloons.<br />
<br />
* Adding extra '''Text Boxes''': You can add a text box anywhere in any pane by clicking on the pane and then on the box icon in the diagram (#7 in the main toolbar).<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:Exclamations&Boxes.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
In this example you can see we have added 4 '''exclamation balloons''' and one extra '''text box'''. We used the same '''text size''', '''font''', and '''color''' as in the rest of the project. You could choose to use different ones in your project.<br />
<br />
===Exporting Your Project===<br />
<br />
Now, if you have followed the instructions above, you should have a small, completed FotoToon Project. You may have decided to use the same photos that are in the sample, or you may have chosen to use images you have imported. These can be from your camera, your XO, downloads from the web, drawings you made in Paint, Photos you have modified in Paint (import, then add things and/or crop as you like). <br />
<br />
Regardless of what you have made for your project, you will probably want to share it with others. You can do this as an email attachment or print it out for a paper copy. To do this, you need to '''export''' your project as an image stored in your Journal. Here's how to do it:<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Export Pulldown''' and follow the instructions in 1a above.<br />
<br />
==Extending FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Modifying FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
==Where to report problems==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Credits==<br />
<br />
<br />
== FotoToon 12==</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon&diff=270140Help Activity refresh/Chapter/FotoToon2012-04-26T22:12:00Z<p>Cbigenho: /* Exporting Your Project */</p>
<hr />
<div>[[File:FotoToonIcon.png]]<br />
='''About FotoToon 12'''=<br />
The '''FotoToon''' Activity will allow you to create everything from a simple "comic" strip to a long elaborate illustrated document. You will be able to import many kinds of images into the panes of your project and add text bubbles to help tell the story. You can use photo images taken with the XO or imported from a camera, drawings made with Activities such as Paint, and images of all kinds downloaded from the web. This could include photos, charts and graphs, maps, and the like. <br><br />
This introduction to '''FotoToon''' will show you how to get started with a simple 4 panel project. If you want to learn to do more, you can watch the videos about using '''FotoToon''' that are available for viewing here (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE).<br />
<br />
='''Where to get FotoToon 12'''=<br />
'''FotoToon''' is not included on the basic 11.3.0 (.883) release of Sugar. To use it, you must download it from the Sugar Labs Activity library at: http://activities.sugarlabs.org/es-ES/sugar/addon/4253 You will find instructions for downloading this and other Activities here: (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE)<BR> You will notice that the description of the Activity and other information are in Spanish. That is because '''FotoToon''' was developed in Argentina. However, don't worry! '''FotoToon''' works in other languages as well!<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''', like many other Sugar Activities, is often updated to fix "bugs" that users report. There was one update, from version 11 to version 12 during the time this instruction chapter was written. By the time you use it, there may be others. The changes are usually minor and should not interfere with the usefulness of this information. Always try to be sure you are using the latest version.<br />
<br />
='''Using FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
=='''The Toolbars'''==<br />
<br />
=== '''The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToon12 Main Screen.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''FotoToon Toolbar''' has 13 icons including 2 with pulldown menus. The '''main FotoToon''' toolbar allows you to access many features of the Activity. Here is a description of what each of the icons will allow you to do:<br />
<br />
* 1. The '''FotoToon''' icon. When you hover your cursor over this icon you will open a small pulldown that allows you to export your work as an image. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 2. The '''Add Image''' icon. This icon allows you to add an image to your project. It can be a photo you take with the XO or digital camera, or import from the web. It can also be a picture, page, or project you create in another Sugar Activity.<br />
<br />
The next four icons allow you to add text to your drawings and photos. They include:<br />
* 3. A normal dialogue Globe<br />
* 4. A cloud shape to tell what a character is silently Thinking<br />
* 5. A dotted globe which indicates a character is talking in a Whisper<br />
* 6. An exclamation bubble to add things like "Pow!" "Bang!" and "Wham!"<br />
* 7. Is a box where you can put the Title of your project. Just above it is a box icon that allows you to add more rectangular text boxes to your project.<br />
* 8. The Movement icon allows you to add little curves to indicate motion, highlight an object with a sunburst, add some parallel lines to show horizontal or vertical motion, or add a little light bulb to show that someone had a bright idea.<br />
* 9. The circular arrow allows you to click on an object, then on this icon and rotate it clockwise 1/4 turn (90 degrees) with each click.<br />
* 10. This icon allows you to delete something you have added.<br />
* 11. This icon opens and closes the Text pulldown where you can select the font and size of your text as well as select bold, italics, or other colors for your words. Click it to open, and when finished, click again to close. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 12. The familiar stop-sign icon is one way to stop the '''FotoToon''' Activity. You can also use the keyboard shortcut: ctrl-Q.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
==='''The Text Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonTextPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Text Pulldown''' menu allows you to control the appearance of the text you add to your project. Generally, they apply to everything in the box or bubble you are currently working on. You do not have to highlight the text to change it.<br />
<br />
* 11a- Selecting this icon will change the text you are working on to '''Bold'''. Clicking it again reverts back to regular text,<br />
<br />
* 11b- Selecting this icon will change the text your are working on to ''Italics''.<br />
<br />
Note: clicking on both of these icons, in any order, will give you '''''Bold Italic''''' text. Clicking both again, in any order, will get you back to regular text.<br />
<br />
* 11c- Clicking on this icon will open the Text Color Pallete. See below for information on how to use it.<br />
<br />
* 11d- This is a non-functioning icon that identifies this as the Text Pulldown toolbar.<br />
<br />
* 11e- This little pull down allows you to choose the size of the text you are working on.<br />
<br />
* 11f- This pull down offers a choice of 37 different fonts, listed in alphabetical order. Some, such as "Ding Bats" don't actually produce anything. Be sure to test the font on your text to see if it looks the way you would like it to.<br />
<br />
==='''The Color Pallete Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:ScreenshotofFTColorPallete.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Color Pallete Pulldown''' allows you to choose the color of your font. It will apply to everything in the box or bubble but can vary from one box or bubble to the next as you choose. There are 12 preset colors you can use, or you can create a custom color by selecting one of the preset colors and dragging the sliders to give more or less Red, Green, or Blue in the selected color. The little circle at the top of the Color Pallete shows the current color. When you are satisfied with the color you have selected/modified, click on the little circle to accept the chosen color and close the Color Pallete. It may take a few seconds for the new color to appear in the text box. But, don't worry, it will!<br />
<br />
='''Learning with FotoToon 12'''=<br />
=='''Plan Ahead'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''' can be used for a wide variety of learning activities, but the general process is always similar. For the sample project in this section, we will make a 4 panel page using 4 photos. This is a good way to get started since the page can be printed on a single page. <br />
<br />
Here are the general steps you need to complete before you build your first FotoToon project:<br />
<br />
* '''Step One: Decide what your project will be about.''' You can tell a story about anything. For example, it could be about your pets, your home, your family, your town, or, even some photos you took at a party. Any topic is fine for our first project. The sample project will be about "Healthy Snacks" and the photos will be pictures of food.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Two: Make a plan.''' Before you begin you should make a plan that will guide you through the construction of your project. Some people like to draw a little sketch of each pane showing what will be in the picture and a suggestion for what words will be added. If you like the panes can each be on a separate small piece of paper so you can re-arrange them easily This is called a '''Story Board'''. You may have another way you would like to make your plan, just be sure to include information about what pictures you will use, where you will get them, and what text you plan to add.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Three: Gather your images.''' For starters, we will use images that were taken either with a camera, or using the '''Record Activity''' on the XO. Any image that can be imported to the '''Journal''' on your XO and viewed in '''Image Viewer''' can be used. It is a good idea to rename each of the photos you will be using in the Journal. The name can include the number of the pane you plan to use it in so it is easy to find when you begin putting things together.<br />
<br />
==='''Place Your Images'''===<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Journal''' and check to be sure your images are there and can be viewed in the Image Viewer (click on the file to open it and check). Be sure the images have names that include the number of the pane you plan to place them (1,2,3, or 4).<br />
<br />
* Open '''FotoToon''' and find the '''"Add Photo"''' icon (number 2 in the '''FotoToon''' main toolbar shown above). A list of available images will appear. Click on the one you want to put in the first pane. When it has loaded, you can either leave it or remove it with the minus sign icon (number 10 in the main toolbar shown above). '''Warning:''' You can only remove the last image entered. That is why it is important to number the images according to the panes you wish to place them in. After the first image has been placed, continue adding images until all four for your first project have been placed. If you decide later that you want to change their order after they have been placed, you will need to delete them and replace them in the new order. ''It is best to get your final placement before adding any text.''<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallImportImages.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
If you would like to use the same images that will be used in this sample project, you will find them at these links. Go to each link, upload the photo to a usb drive, plug it into your XO, and open by clicking on the image names. They will open in the Image Viewer and be automatically saved so you can access them for your project. <br />
<br />
* Pane-1 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:1-Apple-Fries.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-2 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:2-Soda-Milk.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-3 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:3-Cookies-Yogurt.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-4 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:4-HealthySnacks.png<br />
<br />
==='''Add Dialogue and Titles'''===<br />
<br />
If you have planned well with your storyboard, you will have a pretty good idea of what you want to put in your dialogue balloons and text boxes. You may even have a title in mind for your project. You can actually start this process anywhere in your project. All of the balloons and boxes you will be using to do this will be identified in the first image above, the '''The Main PhotoToonToolbar'''.<br />
<br />
* Making and placing your '''Title''': If you know what you would like your title to be, you can start with that. It can always be changed later. When you start a project in FotoToon there will already be a tiny box for the title in a narrow band across the top of the project window. You can drag the upper left corner of the box to enlarge it (look for the cursor arrow to change to a thinner double headed arrow). You can also move it around in the band across the top. Click on the box and type all or part of your title. Then you can change the type style and size using the pull downs in the '''Text Pulldown''' menu (see 11e and 11f in the picture above). Experiment until you find a style and size you like. You can also change the color of the type. Don't worry if it isn't perfect, you can always come back later and change it. Notice that you can erase part of the text by backspacing over it.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallAddTitle.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this image you can see that we selected '''bold''', a '''red''' color from the color palette, a '''type size''' of 48, and the '''Font''' "Georgia".<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Text Balloons''': You can place the text balloons wherever you like within a pane. Click on the pane, then on the balloon you want to use (see 3,4,and 5 above for explanations). The balloon will appear in the pane. You can drag it to the position where you want it, and also can drag the little tail to point to the source of the dialogue. Add the words to the balloon in the same way you added them to the Title box.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:AddBalloonsCropSM3.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this image you can see that we have added 4 dialogue balloons (#3 in the main toolbar). We could also have used the "cloud" balloon (#4 in the main toolbar), or the "whisper" balloon (#5 in the main toolbar). The first pane is OK, but the first balloon in the second pane needs to be dragged to a better shape and size. The second ballon in the second pane appears just as it does when it is first added. It still needs to have text added and to be resized (by dragging a corner). You can see that our '''type size''' is 12, '''text color''' is black, and we are still using the Georgia '''font'''.<br />
<br />
As you work with the various text items, you may wish to eliminate one entirely. Just click on it, then on the icon with the minus (-) sign (#10 in the main toolbar), and it will disappear.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Exclamation Balloons''': You may wish to include special exclamations to your project. Choose the exclamation balloon (# 6 in the main toolbar). It is possible to eliminate the one longer point on the balloon by dragging it so that it matched the others. Again, type into the balloon just as you did in the title box and dialogue balloons.<br />
<br />
* Adding extra '''Text Boxes''': You can add a text box anywhere in any pane by clicking on the pane and then on the box icon in the diagram (#7 in the main toolbar).<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:Exclamations&Boxes.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
In this example you can see we have added 4 '''exclamation balloons''' and one extra '''text box'''. We used the same '''text size''', '''font''', and '''color''' as in the rest of the project. You could choose to use different ones in your project.<br />
<br />
===Exporting Your Project===<br />
<br />
Now, if you have followed the instructions above, you should have a small, completed FotoToon Project. You may have decided to use the same photos that are in the sample, or you may have chosen to use images you have imported. These can be from your camera, your XO, downloads from the web, drawings you made in Paint, Photos you have modified in Paint (import, then add things and/or crop as you like). <br />
<br />
Regardless of what you have made for your project, you will probably want to share it with others. You can do this as an email attachment or print it out for a paper copy. To do this, you need to '''export''' your project as an image stored in your Journal. Here's how to do it:<br />
<br />
* Open the<br />
<br />
==Extending FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Modifying FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
==Where to report problems==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Credits==<br />
<br />
<br />
== FotoToon 12==</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/TOC&diff=270139Help Activity refresh/TOC2012-04-26T22:02:12Z<p>Cbigenho: /* (3) Activities (Walter) */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{draft}}<br />
<br />
== OS Version ==<br />
<br />
We're primarily documenting [http://wiki.laptop.org/go/Release_notes/11.3.0 OS 11.3.0 / build 883 / Sugar 0.94].<br />
<br />
== Status of Work ==<br />
<br />
* '''E'''mpty<br />
* '''D'''raft<br />
* '''R'''eview<br />
* '''F'''inal<br />
<br />
== (0) Introduction (Christoph, Holt) ==<br />
* [[Help Activity refresh/Chapter/About this Manual|About this Manual]] [D]<br />
** Updating this Manual; other versions<br />
* [[Help Activity refresh/Chapter/About OLPC|About OLPC]] [D]<br />
* [[Help Activity refresh/Chapter/About Sugar|About Sugar]] [D]<br />
** version in this manual<br />
* [[Help Activity refresh/Chapter/How to Volunteer|How to Volunteer]] (Holt, Ed, Nancie) [D]<br />
** Upgrading your volunteer experience<br />
* Note on getting Support (cf. 4. Support)<br />
<br />
== (1) Hardware (George, Sameer) ==<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Getting Started|Getting Started]] [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Opening the XO|Opening the XO]] [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Starting the XO|Starting the XO]] [D]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Ports|Ports]] [D]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Keyboard|Keyboard]] [D]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Maintenance / Caring for your XO|Maintenance / Caring for your XO]] [D]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Repairs / Troubleshooting / Support|Battery / Charging]] [D]<br />
** consider new content in the Support, Safety section of http://booki.flossmanuals.net/xo-users-manual-rev-2011/_edit/<br />
**: --[[User:FGrose|FGrose]] 16:42, 6 April 2012 (UTC)<br />
** [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Note on Unbricking/Reflashing|Note on Unbricking/Reflashing (cf. Support)]]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Disassembly Guide|Repair and Disassembly Guide]] [human-readable link to: http://wiki.laptop.org/go/Disassembly]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/XO-1, XO-1.5, XO-1.75 Specifications|XO-1, XO-1.5, XO-1.75 Specifications]] [D]<br />
<br />
== (2) Core Software (Christoph) ==<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/OS Version and Updating|OS Version and Updating (cf. Support)]] [E]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/About the User Interface|About the User Interface]] (Sandra) [E]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Home View|Home View]] [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Activity View|Activity View]] [E]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Neighborhood View + Connecting to the Internet|Neighborhood View + Connecting to the Internet]] [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Group View|Group View]] [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/The Frame|The Frame]] [R] (Nancie, Christoph)<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Journal|Journal]] [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/My Settings|My Settings]] (Christoph & Ed, WAS: Personalizing Sugar) [D~R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Gnome|GNOME]] [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/XS school server|XS school server]] (George & Sameer) [R]<br />
** Note on finding the XS version and updating (cf. Support)<br />
<br />
== (3) Activities (Walter) ==<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/What is an Activity|What is an Activity]] (Sandra) [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Launching Activities|Launching Activities]] (Sandra/[[User:Skierpage|skierpage]]) [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Switching Activities|Switching Activities]] (Christoph) [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Exiting Activities|Exiting Activities]] (Sandra) [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Collaborating|Collaborating]] (Ed) [R]<br />
* Finding and Installing Activities (ref. Support 4)<br />
** Note on updating Activities (cf. Support)<br />
<br />
<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Browse|Browse]] (Cherry Withers) [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Calculate|Calculate]] (Ed) [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Chat|Chat]] (Sandra) [R]<br />
* [http://wiki.sugarlabs.org/go/Activities/Dimensions Dimensions] (Walter) [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Discovery|Discovery]] (Mokurai [Ed]) [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon|FotoToon]] (video:Mark. text: CBigenho) [D]<br />
* Labyrinth (Fernando Comenzana /Uruguay, CBigenho will translate)[E]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Measure|Measure]] (Tony F) [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Memorize|Memorize]] (Sandra) [R]<br />
* [http://wiki.sugarlabs.org/go/Activities/Paint Paint] (TonyF)<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Pippy|Pippy]] (George) [R]<br />
* [http://wiki.sugarlabs.org/go/Activities/Portfolio Portfolio] (Walter) [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Record|Record]] (video:Mark) [E]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Read|Read]] (Sandra) [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Terminal|Terminal]] (Ed) [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/TamTam|Tam Tam]] (CBigenho, Harriet) [R]<br />
* [http://wiki.sugarlabs.org/go/Activities/TurtleArt/Help Turtle Art] (Walter, Ed, Sandra) [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Write|Write]] (Laura) [D]<br />
* [http://wiki.sugarlabs.org/go/Activities/XoEditor XoEditor] (Walter) [R]<br />
* [http://wiki.sugarlabs.org/go/Activities/Paint Paint] (no need to include developers info) (TonyF) [R]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Activities/Activity Sampler|Activity Sampler]] [D] with 2~3 sentence summaries for as many Activities as possible (also to be used for w.s.o, git, etc.)<br />
** suggestion: taking current descriptions from ASLO (Ed?)<br />
<br />
== (4) Network (George) ==<br />
* [[Help Activity refresh/Chapter/Give Me the Internet|Give Me the Internet]] (George) [D]<br />
* [[Help Activity refresh/Chapter/Getting Connected |Getting Connected ]] (George) [D]<br />
* [[Help Activity refresh/Chapter/Troubleshooting Connectivity|Troubleshooting Connectivity]] (George) [D]<br />
<br />
== (5) Support (Holt, Nancie) ==<br />
* [[Help Activity refresh/Chapter/Upgrade all your Software|Upgrade all your Software]] (Holt, Nancie) [R]<br />
** Finding your Sugar version; update other versions<br />
* How to Unbrick, Change language: keyboard and OS (ref Section 2) [E]<br />
* [[Help Activity refresh/Chapter/How to Install and Update Activities|How to Install and Update Activities]] (Christoph) [E]<br />
* [[Help Activity refresh/Chapter/Getting Support|Getting Support]] (Holt, Nancie) [R]<br />
<br />
== (x) Appendices ==<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Keyboard_Shortcuts|Keyboard Shortcuts]] (Sandra) [E]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Glossary|Glossary]] (Ed) [D]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Credits|Credits]] (incl. 2008 contributors) (Christoph) [E]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Other_OS_options|Other OS options: PuppyXO, DebXO]] (SJ) [E]<br />
<br />
== FANTASIES BELOW ==<br />
<br />
Topics with nobody confirmed responsible:<br />
<br />
* eToys -> MAYBE Cherry Withers<br />
* Labyrinth (Fernando Comenzana /Uruguay)<br />
* ... (?)<br />
* BE Quizzes (elise@whatisbe.com Elise Moussa)</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/TOC&diff=270138Help Activity refresh/TOC2012-04-26T22:01:50Z<p>Cbigenho: /* (3) Activities (Walter) */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{draft}}<br />
<br />
== OS Version ==<br />
<br />
We're primarily documenting [http://wiki.laptop.org/go/Release_notes/11.3.0 OS 11.3.0 / build 883 / Sugar 0.94].<br />
<br />
== Status of Work ==<br />
<br />
* '''E'''mpty<br />
* '''D'''raft<br />
* '''R'''eview<br />
* '''F'''inal<br />
<br />
== (0) Introduction (Christoph, Holt) ==<br />
* [[Help Activity refresh/Chapter/About this Manual|About this Manual]] [D]<br />
** Updating this Manual; other versions<br />
* [[Help Activity refresh/Chapter/About OLPC|About OLPC]] [D]<br />
* [[Help Activity refresh/Chapter/About Sugar|About Sugar]] [D]<br />
** version in this manual<br />
* [[Help Activity refresh/Chapter/How to Volunteer|How to Volunteer]] (Holt, Ed, Nancie) [D]<br />
** Upgrading your volunteer experience<br />
* Note on getting Support (cf. 4. Support)<br />
<br />
== (1) Hardware (George, Sameer) ==<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Getting Started|Getting Started]] [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Opening the XO|Opening the XO]] [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Starting the XO|Starting the XO]] [D]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Ports|Ports]] [D]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Keyboard|Keyboard]] [D]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Maintenance / Caring for your XO|Maintenance / Caring for your XO]] [D]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Repairs / Troubleshooting / Support|Battery / Charging]] [D]<br />
** consider new content in the Support, Safety section of http://booki.flossmanuals.net/xo-users-manual-rev-2011/_edit/<br />
**: --[[User:FGrose|FGrose]] 16:42, 6 April 2012 (UTC)<br />
** [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Note on Unbricking/Reflashing|Note on Unbricking/Reflashing (cf. Support)]]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Disassembly Guide|Repair and Disassembly Guide]] [human-readable link to: http://wiki.laptop.org/go/Disassembly]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/XO-1, XO-1.5, XO-1.75 Specifications|XO-1, XO-1.5, XO-1.75 Specifications]] [D]<br />
<br />
== (2) Core Software (Christoph) ==<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/OS Version and Updating|OS Version and Updating (cf. Support)]] [E]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/About the User Interface|About the User Interface]] (Sandra) [E]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Home View|Home View]] [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Activity View|Activity View]] [E]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Neighborhood View + Connecting to the Internet|Neighborhood View + Connecting to the Internet]] [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Group View|Group View]] [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/The Frame|The Frame]] [R] (Nancie, Christoph)<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Journal|Journal]] [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/My Settings|My Settings]] (Christoph & Ed, WAS: Personalizing Sugar) [D~R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Gnome|GNOME]] [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/XS school server|XS school server]] (George & Sameer) [R]<br />
** Note on finding the XS version and updating (cf. Support)<br />
<br />
== (3) Activities (Walter) ==<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/What is an Activity|What is an Activity]] (Sandra) [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Launching Activities|Launching Activities]] (Sandra/[[User:Skierpage|skierpage]]) [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Switching Activities|Switching Activities]] (Christoph) [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Exiting Activities|Exiting Activities]] (Sandra) [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Collaborating|Collaborating]] (Ed) [R]<br />
* Finding and Installing Activities (ref. Support 4)<br />
** Note on updating Activities (cf. Support)<br />
<br />
<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Browse|Browse]] (Cherry Withers) [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Calculate|Calculate]] (Ed) [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Chat|Chat]] (Sandra) [R]<br />
* [http://wiki.sugarlabs.org/go/Activities/Dimensions Dimensions] (Walter) [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Discovery|Discovery]] (Mokurai [Ed]) [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon|FotoToon]] (video:Mark. text: CBigenho) [R]<br />
* Labyrinth (Fernando Comenzana /Uruguay, CBigenho will translate)[E]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Measure|Measure]] (Tony F) [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Memorize|Memorize]] (Sandra) [R]<br />
* [http://wiki.sugarlabs.org/go/Activities/Paint Paint] (TonyF)<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Pippy|Pippy]] (George) [R]<br />
* [http://wiki.sugarlabs.org/go/Activities/Portfolio Portfolio] (Walter) [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Record|Record]] (video:Mark) [E]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Read|Read]] (Sandra) [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Terminal|Terminal]] (Ed) [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/TamTam|Tam Tam]] (CBigenho, Harriet) [R]<br />
* [http://wiki.sugarlabs.org/go/Activities/TurtleArt/Help Turtle Art] (Walter, Ed, Sandra) [R]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Write|Write]] (Laura) [D]<br />
* [http://wiki.sugarlabs.org/go/Activities/XoEditor XoEditor] (Walter) [R]<br />
* [http://wiki.sugarlabs.org/go/Activities/Paint Paint] (no need to include developers info) (TonyF) [R]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Activities/Activity Sampler|Activity Sampler]] [D] with 2~3 sentence summaries for as many Activities as possible (also to be used for w.s.o, git, etc.)<br />
** suggestion: taking current descriptions from ASLO (Ed?)<br />
<br />
== (4) Network (George) ==<br />
* [[Help Activity refresh/Chapter/Give Me the Internet|Give Me the Internet]] (George) [D]<br />
* [[Help Activity refresh/Chapter/Getting Connected |Getting Connected ]] (George) [D]<br />
* [[Help Activity refresh/Chapter/Troubleshooting Connectivity|Troubleshooting Connectivity]] (George) [D]<br />
<br />
== (5) Support (Holt, Nancie) ==<br />
* [[Help Activity refresh/Chapter/Upgrade all your Software|Upgrade all your Software]] (Holt, Nancie) [R]<br />
** Finding your Sugar version; update other versions<br />
* How to Unbrick, Change language: keyboard and OS (ref Section 2) [E]<br />
* [[Help Activity refresh/Chapter/How to Install and Update Activities|How to Install and Update Activities]] (Christoph) [E]<br />
* [[Help Activity refresh/Chapter/Getting Support|Getting Support]] (Holt, Nancie) [R]<br />
<br />
== (x) Appendices ==<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Keyboard_Shortcuts|Keyboard Shortcuts]] (Sandra) [E]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Glossary|Glossary]] (Ed) [D]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Credits|Credits]] (incl. 2008 contributors) (Christoph) [E]<br />
* [[Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/Other_OS_options|Other OS options: PuppyXO, DebXO]] (SJ) [E]<br />
<br />
== FANTASIES BELOW ==<br />
<br />
Topics with nobody confirmed responsible:<br />
<br />
* eToys -> MAYBE Cherry Withers<br />
* Labyrinth (Fernando Comenzana /Uruguay)<br />
* ... (?)<br />
* BE Quizzes (elise@whatisbe.com Elise Moussa)</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon&diff=270103Help Activity refresh/Chapter/FotoToon2012-04-25T23:01:26Z<p>Cbigenho: /* Add Dialogue and Titles */</p>
<hr />
<div>[[File:FotoToonIcon.png]]<br />
='''About FotoToon 12'''=<br />
The '''FotoToon''' Activity will allow you to create everything from a simple "comic" strip to a long elaborate illustrated document. You will be able to import many kinds of images into the panes of your project and add text bubbles to help tell the story. You can use photo images taken with the XO or imported from a camera, drawings made with Activities such as Paint, and images of all kinds downloaded from the web. This could include photos, charts and graphs, maps, and the like. <br><br />
This introduction to '''FotoToon''' will show you how to get started with a simple 4 panel project. If you want to learn to do more, you can watch the videos about using '''FotoToon''' that are available for viewing here (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE).<br />
<br />
='''Where to get FotoToon 12'''=<br />
'''FotoToon''' is not included on the basic 11.3.0 (.883) release of Sugar. To use it, you must download it from the Sugar Labs Activity library at: http://activities.sugarlabs.org/es-ES/sugar/addon/4253 You will find instructions for downloading this and other Activities here: (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE)<BR> You will notice that the description of the Activity and other information are in Spanish. That is because '''FotoToon''' was developed in Argentina. However, don't worry! '''FotoToon''' works in other languages as well!<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''', like many other Sugar Activities, is often updated to fix "bugs" that users report. There was one update, from version 11 to version 12 during the time this instruction chapter was written. By the time you use it, there may be others. The changes are usually minor and should not interfere with the usefulness of this information. Always try to be sure you are using the latest version.<br />
<br />
='''Using FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
=='''The Toolbars'''==<br />
<br />
=== '''The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToon12 Main Screen.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''FotoToon Toolbar''' has 13 icons including 2 with pulldown menus. The '''main FotoToon''' toolbar allows you to access many features of the Activity. Here is a description of what each of the icons will allow you to do:<br />
<br />
* 1. The '''FotoToon''' icon. When you hover your cursor over this icon you will open a small pulldown that allows you to export your work as an image. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 2. The '''Add Image''' icon. This icon allows you to add an image to your project. It can be a photo you take with the XO or digital camera, or import from the web. It can also be a picture, page, or project you create in another Sugar Activity.<br />
<br />
The next four icons allow you to add text to your drawings and photos. They include:<br />
* 3. A normal dialogue Globe<br />
* 4. A cloud shape to tell what a character is silently Thinking<br />
* 5. A dotted globe which indicates a character is talking in a Whisper<br />
* 6. An exclamation bubble to add things like "Pow!" "Bang!" and "Wham!"<br />
* 7. Is a box where you can put the Title of your project. Just above it is a box icon that allows you to add more rectangular text boxes to your project.<br />
* 8. The Movement icon allows you to add little curves to indicate motion, highlight an object with a sunburst, add some parallel lines to show horizontal or vertical motion, or add a little light bulb to show that someone had a bright idea.<br />
* 9. The circular arrow allows you to click on an object, then on this icon and rotate it clockwise 1/4 turn (90 degrees) with each click.<br />
* 10. This icon allows you to delete something you have added.<br />
* 11. This icon opens and closes the Text pulldown where you can select the font and size of your text as well as select bold, italics, or other colors for your words. Click it to open, and when finished, click again to close. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 12. The familiar stop-sign icon is one way to stop the '''FotoToon''' Activity. You can also use the keyboard shortcut: ctrl-Q.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
==='''The Text Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonTextPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Text Pulldown''' menu allows you to control the appearance of the text you add to your project. Generally, they apply to everything in the box or bubble you are currently working on. You do not have to highlight the text to change it.<br />
<br />
* 11a- Selecting this icon will change the text you are working on to '''Bold'''. Clicking it again reverts back to regular text,<br />
<br />
* 11b- Selecting this icon will change the text your are working on to ''Italics''.<br />
<br />
Note: clicking on both of these icons, in any order, will give you '''''Bold Italic''''' text. Clicking both again, in any order, will get you back to regular text.<br />
<br />
* 11c- Clicking on this icon will open the Text Color Pallete. See below for information on how to use it.<br />
<br />
* 11d- This is a non-functioning icon that identifies this as the Text Pulldown toolbar.<br />
<br />
* 11e- This little pull down allows you to choose the size of the text you are working on.<br />
<br />
* 11f- This pull down offers a choice of 37 different fonts, listed in alphabetical order. Some, such as "Ding Bats" don't actually produce anything. Be sure to test the font on your text to see if it looks the way you would like it to.<br />
<br />
==='''The Color Pallete Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:ScreenshotofFTColorPallete.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Color Pallete Pulldown''' allows you to choose the color of your font. It will apply to everything in the box or bubble but can vary from one box or bubble to the next as you choose. There are 12 preset colors you can use, or you can create a custom color by selecting one of the preset colors and dragging the sliders to give more or less Red, Green, or Blue in the selected color. The little circle at the top of the Color Pallete shows the current color. When you are satisfied with the color you have selected/modified, click on the little circle to accept the chosen color and close the Color Pallete. It may take a few seconds for the new color to appear in the text box. But, don't worry, it will!<br />
<br />
='''Learning with FotoToon 12'''=<br />
=='''Plan Ahead'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''' can be used for a wide variety of learning activities, but the general process is always similar. For the sample project in this section, we will make a 4 panel page using 4 photos. This is a good way to get started since the page can be printed on a single page. <br />
<br />
Here are the general steps you need to complete before you build your first FotoToon project:<br />
<br />
* '''Step One: Decide what your project will be about.''' You can tell a story about anything. For example, it could be about your pets, your home, your family, your town, or, even some photos you took at a party. Any topic is fine for our first project. The sample project will be about "Healthy Snacks" and the photos will be pictures of food.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Two: Make a plan.''' Before you begin you should make a plan that will guide you through the construction of your project. Some people like to draw a little sketch of each pane showing what will be in the picture and a suggestion for what words will be added. If you like the panes can each be on a separate small piece of paper so you can re-arrange them easily This is called a '''Story Board'''. You may have another way you would like to make your plan, just be sure to include information about what pictures you will use, where you will get them, and what text you plan to add.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Three: Gather your images.''' For starters, we will use images that were taken either with a camera, or using the '''Record Activity''' on the XO. Any image that can be imported to the '''Journal''' on your XO and viewed in '''Image Viewer''' can be used. It is a good idea to rename each of the photos you will be using in the Journal. The name can include the number of the pane you plan to use it in so it is easy to find when you begin putting things together.<br />
<br />
==='''Place Your Images'''===<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Journal''' and check to be sure your images are there and can be viewed in the Image Viewer (click on the file to open it and check). Be sure the images have names that include the number of the pane you plan to place them (1,2,3, or 4).<br />
<br />
* Open '''FotoToon''' and find the '''"Add Photo"''' icon (number 2 in the '''FotoToon''' main toolbar shown above). A list of available images will appear. Click on the one you want to put in the first pane. When it has loaded, you can either leave it or remove it with the minus sign icon (number 10 in the main toolbar shown above). '''Warning:''' You can only remove the last image entered. That is why it is important to number the images according to the panes you wish to place them in. After the first image has been placed, continue adding images until all four for your first project have been placed. If you decide later that you want to change their order after they have been placed, you will need to delete them and replace them in the new order. ''It is best to get your final placement before adding any text.''<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallImportImages.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
If you would like to use the same images that will be used in this sample project, you will find them at these links. Go to each link, upload the photo to a usb drive, plug it into your XO, and open by clicking on the image names. They will open in the Image Viewer and be automatically saved so you can access them for your project. <br />
<br />
* Pane-1 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:1-Apple-Fries.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-2 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:2-Soda-Milk.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-3 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:3-Cookies-Yogurt.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-4 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:4-HealthySnacks.png<br />
<br />
==='''Add Dialogue and Titles'''===<br />
<br />
If you have planned well with your storyboard, you will have a pretty good idea of what you want to put in your dialogue balloons and text boxes. You may even have a title in mind for your project. You can actually start this process anywhere in your project. All of the balloons and boxes you will be using to do this will be identified in the first image above, the '''The Main PhotoToonToolbar'''.<br />
<br />
* Making and placing your '''Title''': If you know what you would like your title to be, you can start with that. It can always be changed later. When you start a project in FotoToon there will already be a tiny box for the title in a narrow band across the top of the project window. You can drag the upper left corner of the box to enlarge it (look for the cursor arrow to change to a thinner double headed arrow). You can also move it around in the band across the top. Click on the box and type all or part of your title. Then you can change the type style and size using the pull downs in the '''Text Pulldown''' menu (see 11e and 11f in the picture above). Experiment until you find a style and size you like. You can also change the color of the type. Don't worry if it isn't perfect, you can always come back later and change it. Notice that you can erase part of the text by backspacing over it.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallAddTitle.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this image you can see that we selected '''bold''', a '''red''' color from the color palette, a '''type size''' of 48, and the '''Font''' "Georgia".<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Text Balloons''': You can place the text balloons wherever you like within a pane. Click on the pane, then on the balloon you want to use (see 3,4,and 5 above for explanations). The balloon will appear in the pane. You can drag it to the position where you want it, and also can drag the little tail to point to the source of the dialogue. Add the words to the balloon in the same way you added them to the Title box.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:AddBalloonsCropSM3.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this image you can see that we have added 4 dialogue balloons (#3 in the main toolbar). We could also have used the "cloud" balloon (#4 in the main toolbar), or the "whisper" balloon (#5 in the main toolbar). The first pane is OK, but the first balloon in the second pane needs to be dragged to a better shape and size. The second ballon in the second pane appears just as it does when it is first added. It still needs to have text added and to be resized (by dragging a corner). You can see that our '''type size''' is 12, '''text color''' is black, and we are still using the Georgia '''font'''.<br />
<br />
As you work with the various text items, you may wish to eliminate one entirely. Just click on it, then on the icon with the minus (-) sign (#10 in the main toolbar), and it will disappear.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Exclamation Balloons''': You may wish to include special exclamations to your project. Choose the exclamation balloon (# 6 in the main toolbar). It is possible to eliminate the one longer point on the balloon by dragging it so that it matched the others. Again, type into the balloon just as you did in the title box and dialogue balloons.<br />
<br />
* Adding extra '''Text Boxes''': You can add a text box anywhere in any pane by clicking on the pane and then on the box icon in the diagram (#7 in the main toolbar).<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:Exclamations&Boxes.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
In this example you can see we have added 4 '''exclamation balloons''' and one extra '''text box'''. We used the same '''text size''', '''font''', and '''color''' as in the rest of the project. You could choose to use different ones in your project.<br />
<br />
===Exporting Your Project===<br />
<br />
==Extending FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Modifying FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
==Where to report problems==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Credits==<br />
<br />
<br />
== FotoToon 12==</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=File:Exclamations%26Boxes.png&diff=270102File:Exclamations&Boxes.png2012-04-25T22:51:43Z<p>Cbigenho: </p>
<hr />
<div></div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon&diff=270101Help Activity refresh/Chapter/FotoToon2012-04-25T22:41:07Z<p>Cbigenho: /* Place Your Images */</p>
<hr />
<div>[[File:FotoToonIcon.png]]<br />
='''About FotoToon 12'''=<br />
The '''FotoToon''' Activity will allow you to create everything from a simple "comic" strip to a long elaborate illustrated document. You will be able to import many kinds of images into the panes of your project and add text bubbles to help tell the story. You can use photo images taken with the XO or imported from a camera, drawings made with Activities such as Paint, and images of all kinds downloaded from the web. This could include photos, charts and graphs, maps, and the like. <br><br />
This introduction to '''FotoToon''' will show you how to get started with a simple 4 panel project. If you want to learn to do more, you can watch the videos about using '''FotoToon''' that are available for viewing here (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE).<br />
<br />
='''Where to get FotoToon 12'''=<br />
'''FotoToon''' is not included on the basic 11.3.0 (.883) release of Sugar. To use it, you must download it from the Sugar Labs Activity library at: http://activities.sugarlabs.org/es-ES/sugar/addon/4253 You will find instructions for downloading this and other Activities here: (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE)<BR> You will notice that the description of the Activity and other information are in Spanish. That is because '''FotoToon''' was developed in Argentina. However, don't worry! '''FotoToon''' works in other languages as well!<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''', like many other Sugar Activities, is often updated to fix "bugs" that users report. There was one update, from version 11 to version 12 during the time this instruction chapter was written. By the time you use it, there may be others. The changes are usually minor and should not interfere with the usefulness of this information. Always try to be sure you are using the latest version.<br />
<br />
='''Using FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
=='''The Toolbars'''==<br />
<br />
=== '''The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToon12 Main Screen.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''FotoToon Toolbar''' has 13 icons including 2 with pulldown menus. The '''main FotoToon''' toolbar allows you to access many features of the Activity. Here is a description of what each of the icons will allow you to do:<br />
<br />
* 1. The '''FotoToon''' icon. When you hover your cursor over this icon you will open a small pulldown that allows you to export your work as an image. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 2. The '''Add Image''' icon. This icon allows you to add an image to your project. It can be a photo you take with the XO or digital camera, or import from the web. It can also be a picture, page, or project you create in another Sugar Activity.<br />
<br />
The next four icons allow you to add text to your drawings and photos. They include:<br />
* 3. A normal dialogue Globe<br />
* 4. A cloud shape to tell what a character is silently Thinking<br />
* 5. A dotted globe which indicates a character is talking in a Whisper<br />
* 6. An exclamation bubble to add things like "Pow!" "Bang!" and "Wham!"<br />
* 7. Is a box where you can put the Title of your project. Just above it is a box icon that allows you to add more rectangular text boxes to your project.<br />
* 8. The Movement icon allows you to add little curves to indicate motion, highlight an object with a sunburst, add some parallel lines to show horizontal or vertical motion, or add a little light bulb to show that someone had a bright idea.<br />
* 9. The circular arrow allows you to click on an object, then on this icon and rotate it clockwise 1/4 turn (90 degrees) with each click.<br />
* 10. This icon allows you to delete something you have added.<br />
* 11. This icon opens and closes the Text pulldown where you can select the font and size of your text as well as select bold, italics, or other colors for your words. Click it to open, and when finished, click again to close. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 12. The familiar stop-sign icon is one way to stop the '''FotoToon''' Activity. You can also use the keyboard shortcut: ctrl-Q.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
==='''The Text Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonTextPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Text Pulldown''' menu allows you to control the appearance of the text you add to your project. Generally, they apply to everything in the box or bubble you are currently working on. You do not have to highlight the text to change it.<br />
<br />
* 11a- Selecting this icon will change the text you are working on to '''Bold'''. Clicking it again reverts back to regular text,<br />
<br />
* 11b- Selecting this icon will change the text your are working on to ''Italics''.<br />
<br />
Note: clicking on both of these icons, in any order, will give you '''''Bold Italic''''' text. Clicking both again, in any order, will get you back to regular text.<br />
<br />
* 11c- Clicking on this icon will open the Text Color Pallete. See below for information on how to use it.<br />
<br />
* 11d- This is a non-functioning icon that identifies this as the Text Pulldown toolbar.<br />
<br />
* 11e- This little pull down allows you to choose the size of the text you are working on.<br />
<br />
* 11f- This pull down offers a choice of 37 different fonts, listed in alphabetical order. Some, such as "Ding Bats" don't actually produce anything. Be sure to test the font on your text to see if it looks the way you would like it to.<br />
<br />
==='''The Color Pallete Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:ScreenshotofFTColorPallete.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Color Pallete Pulldown''' allows you to choose the color of your font. It will apply to everything in the box or bubble but can vary from one box or bubble to the next as you choose. There are 12 preset colors you can use, or you can create a custom color by selecting one of the preset colors and dragging the sliders to give more or less Red, Green, or Blue in the selected color. The little circle at the top of the Color Pallete shows the current color. When you are satisfied with the color you have selected/modified, click on the little circle to accept the chosen color and close the Color Pallete. It may take a few seconds for the new color to appear in the text box. But, don't worry, it will!<br />
<br />
='''Learning with FotoToon 12'''=<br />
=='''Plan Ahead'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''' can be used for a wide variety of learning activities, but the general process is always similar. For the sample project in this section, we will make a 4 panel page using 4 photos. This is a good way to get started since the page can be printed on a single page. <br />
<br />
Here are the general steps you need to complete before you build your first FotoToon project:<br />
<br />
* '''Step One: Decide what your project will be about.''' You can tell a story about anything. For example, it could be about your pets, your home, your family, your town, or, even some photos you took at a party. Any topic is fine for our first project. The sample project will be about "Healthy Snacks" and the photos will be pictures of food.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Two: Make a plan.''' Before you begin you should make a plan that will guide you through the construction of your project. Some people like to draw a little sketch of each pane showing what will be in the picture and a suggestion for what words will be added. If you like the panes can each be on a separate small piece of paper so you can re-arrange them easily This is called a '''Story Board'''. You may have another way you would like to make your plan, just be sure to include information about what pictures you will use, where you will get them, and what text you plan to add.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Three: Gather your images.''' For starters, we will use images that were taken either with a camera, or using the '''Record Activity''' on the XO. Any image that can be imported to the '''Journal''' on your XO and viewed in '''Image Viewer''' can be used. It is a good idea to rename each of the photos you will be using in the Journal. The name can include the number of the pane you plan to use it in so it is easy to find when you begin putting things together.<br />
<br />
==='''Place Your Images'''===<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Journal''' and check to be sure your images are there and can be viewed in the Image Viewer (click on the file to open it and check). Be sure the images have names that include the number of the pane you plan to place them (1,2,3, or 4).<br />
<br />
* Open '''FotoToon''' and find the '''"Add Photo"''' icon (number 2 in the '''FotoToon''' main toolbar shown above). A list of available images will appear. Click on the one you want to put in the first pane. When it has loaded, you can either leave it or remove it with the minus sign icon (number 10 in the main toolbar shown above). '''Warning:''' You can only remove the last image entered. That is why it is important to number the images according to the panes you wish to place them in. After the first image has been placed, continue adding images until all four for your first project have been placed. If you decide later that you want to change their order after they have been placed, you will need to delete them and replace them in the new order. ''It is best to get your final placement before adding any text.''<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallImportImages.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
If you would like to use the same images that will be used in this sample project, you will find them at these links. Go to each link, upload the photo to a usb drive, plug it into your XO, and open by clicking on the image names. They will open in the Image Viewer and be automatically saved so you can access them for your project. <br />
<br />
* Pane-1 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:1-Apple-Fries.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-2 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:2-Soda-Milk.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-3 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:3-Cookies-Yogurt.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-4 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:4-HealthySnacks.png<br />
<br />
==='''Add Dialogue and Titles'''===<br />
<br />
If you have planned well with your storyboard, you will have a pretty good idea of what you want to put in your dialogue balloons and text boxes. You may even have a title in mind for your project. You can actually start this process anywhere in your project. All of the balloons and boxes you will be using to do this will be identified in the first image above, the '''The Main PhotoToonToolbar'''.<br />
<br />
* Making and placing your '''Title''': If you know what you would like your title to be, you can start with that. It can always be changed later. When you start a project in FotoToon there will already be a tiny box for the title in a narrow band across the top of the project window. You can drag the upper left corner of the box to enlarge it (look for the cursor arrow to change to a thinner double headed arrow). You can also move it around in the band across the top. Click on the box and type all or part of your title. Then you can change the type style and size using the pull downs in the '''Text Pulldown''' menu (see 11e and 11f in the picture above). Experiment until you find a style and size you like. You can also change the color of the type. Don't worry if it isn't perfect, you can always come back later and change it. Notice that you can erase part of the text by backspacing over it.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallAddTitle.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this image you can see that we selected '''bold''', a '''red''' color from the color palette, a '''type size''' of 48, and the '''Font''' "Georgia".<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Text Balloons''': You can place the text balloons wherever you like within a pane. Click on the pane, then on the balloon you want to use (see 3,4,and 5 above for explanations). The balloon will appear in the pane. You can drag it to the position where you want it, and also can drag the little tail to point to the source of the dialogue. Add the words to the balloon in the same way you added them to the Title box.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:AddBalloonsCropSM3.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this image you can see that we have added 4 dialogue balloons (#3 in the main toolbar). We could also have used the "cloud" balloon (#4 in the main toolbar), or the "whisper" balloon (#5 in the main toolbar). The first pane is OK, but the first balloon in the second pane needs to be dragged to a better shape and size. The second ballon in the second pane appears just as it does when it is first added. It still needs to have text added and to be resized (by dragging a corner). You can see that our '''type size''' is 12, '''text color''' is black, and we are still using the Georgia '''font'''.<br />
<br />
As you work with the various text items, you may wish to eliminate one entirely. Just click on it, then on the icon with the minus (-) sign (see number 10 above), and it will disappear.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Exclamation Balloons''': You may wish to include special exclamations to your project. Choose the exclamation balloon (see 6 above). It is possible to eliminate the one longer point on the balloon by dragging it so that it matched the others. Again, type into the balloon just as you did in the title box and dialogue balloons.<br />
<br />
* Adding extra '''Text Boxes''': You can add a text box anywhere in any pane by clicking on the pane and then on the box icon in the diagram (see 7 above).<br />
<br />
===Exporting Your Project===<br />
<br />
==Extending FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Modifying FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
==Where to report problems==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Credits==<br />
<br />
<br />
== FotoToon 12==</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=File:SmallImportImages.png&diff=270100File:SmallImportImages.png2012-04-25T22:39:40Z<p>Cbigenho: uploaded a new version of "File:SmallImportImages.png"</p>
<hr />
<div></div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon&diff=270099Help Activity refresh/Chapter/FotoToon2012-04-25T22:36:26Z<p>Cbigenho: /* Add Dialogue and Titles */</p>
<hr />
<div>[[File:FotoToonIcon.png]]<br />
='''About FotoToon 12'''=<br />
The '''FotoToon''' Activity will allow you to create everything from a simple "comic" strip to a long elaborate illustrated document. You will be able to import many kinds of images into the panes of your project and add text bubbles to help tell the story. You can use photo images taken with the XO or imported from a camera, drawings made with Activities such as Paint, and images of all kinds downloaded from the web. This could include photos, charts and graphs, maps, and the like. <br><br />
This introduction to '''FotoToon''' will show you how to get started with a simple 4 panel project. If you want to learn to do more, you can watch the videos about using '''FotoToon''' that are available for viewing here (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE).<br />
<br />
='''Where to get FotoToon 12'''=<br />
'''FotoToon''' is not included on the basic 11.3.0 (.883) release of Sugar. To use it, you must download it from the Sugar Labs Activity library at: http://activities.sugarlabs.org/es-ES/sugar/addon/4253 You will find instructions for downloading this and other Activities here: (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE)<BR> You will notice that the description of the Activity and other information are in Spanish. That is because '''FotoToon''' was developed in Argentina. However, don't worry! '''FotoToon''' works in other languages as well!<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''', like many other Sugar Activities, is often updated to fix "bugs" that users report. There was one update, from version 11 to version 12 during the time this instruction chapter was written. By the time you use it, there may be others. The changes are usually minor and should not interfere with the usefulness of this information. Always try to be sure you are using the latest version.<br />
<br />
='''Using FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
=='''The Toolbars'''==<br />
<br />
=== '''The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToon12 Main Screen.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''FotoToon Toolbar''' has 13 icons including 2 with pulldown menus. The '''main FotoToon''' toolbar allows you to access many features of the Activity. Here is a description of what each of the icons will allow you to do:<br />
<br />
* 1. The '''FotoToon''' icon. When you hover your cursor over this icon you will open a small pulldown that allows you to export your work as an image. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 2. The '''Add Image''' icon. This icon allows you to add an image to your project. It can be a photo you take with the XO or digital camera, or import from the web. It can also be a picture, page, or project you create in another Sugar Activity.<br />
<br />
The next four icons allow you to add text to your drawings and photos. They include:<br />
* 3. A normal dialogue Globe<br />
* 4. A cloud shape to tell what a character is silently Thinking<br />
* 5. A dotted globe which indicates a character is talking in a Whisper<br />
* 6. An exclamation bubble to add things like "Pow!" "Bang!" and "Wham!"<br />
* 7. Is a box where you can put the Title of your project. Just above it is a box icon that allows you to add more rectangular text boxes to your project.<br />
* 8. The Movement icon allows you to add little curves to indicate motion, highlight an object with a sunburst, add some parallel lines to show horizontal or vertical motion, or add a little light bulb to show that someone had a bright idea.<br />
* 9. The circular arrow allows you to click on an object, then on this icon and rotate it clockwise 1/4 turn (90 degrees) with each click.<br />
* 10. This icon allows you to delete something you have added.<br />
* 11. This icon opens and closes the Text pulldown where you can select the font and size of your text as well as select bold, italics, or other colors for your words. Click it to open, and when finished, click again to close. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 12. The familiar stop-sign icon is one way to stop the '''FotoToon''' Activity. You can also use the keyboard shortcut: ctrl-Q.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
==='''The Text Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonTextPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Text Pulldown''' menu allows you to control the appearance of the text you add to your project. Generally, they apply to everything in the box or bubble you are currently working on. You do not have to highlight the text to change it.<br />
<br />
* 11a- Selecting this icon will change the text you are working on to '''Bold'''. Clicking it again reverts back to regular text,<br />
<br />
* 11b- Selecting this icon will change the text your are working on to ''Italics''.<br />
<br />
Note: clicking on both of these icons, in any order, will give you '''''Bold Italic''''' text. Clicking both again, in any order, will get you back to regular text.<br />
<br />
* 11c- Clicking on this icon will open the Text Color Pallete. See below for information on how to use it.<br />
<br />
* 11d- This is a non-functioning icon that identifies this as the Text Pulldown toolbar.<br />
<br />
* 11e- This little pull down allows you to choose the size of the text you are working on.<br />
<br />
* 11f- This pull down offers a choice of 37 different fonts, listed in alphabetical order. Some, such as "Ding Bats" don't actually produce anything. Be sure to test the font on your text to see if it looks the way you would like it to.<br />
<br />
==='''The Color Pallete Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:ScreenshotofFTColorPallete.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Color Pallete Pulldown''' allows you to choose the color of your font. It will apply to everything in the box or bubble but can vary from one box or bubble to the next as you choose. There are 12 preset colors you can use, or you can create a custom color by selecting one of the preset colors and dragging the sliders to give more or less Red, Green, or Blue in the selected color. The little circle at the top of the Color Pallete shows the current color. When you are satisfied with the color you have selected/modified, click on the little circle to accept the chosen color and close the Color Pallete. It may take a few seconds for the new color to appear in the text box. But, don't worry, it will!<br />
<br />
='''Learning with FotoToon 12'''=<br />
=='''Plan Ahead'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''' can be used for a wide variety of learning activities, but the general process is always similar. For the sample project in this section, we will make a 4 panel page using 4 photos. This is a good way to get started since the page can be printed on a single page. <br />
<br />
Here are the general steps you need to complete before you build your first FotoToon project:<br />
<br />
* '''Step One: Decide what your project will be about.''' You can tell a story about anything. For example, it could be about your pets, your home, your family, your town, or, even some photos you took at a party. Any topic is fine for our first project. The sample project will be about "Healthy Snacks" and the photos will be pictures of food.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Two: Make a plan.''' Before you begin you should make a plan that will guide you through the construction of your project. Some people like to draw a little sketch of each pane showing what will be in the picture and a suggestion for what words will be added. If you like the panes can each be on a separate small piece of paper so you can re-arrange them easily This is called a '''Story Board'''. You may have another way you would like to make your plan, just be sure to include information about what pictures you will use, where you will get them, and what text you plan to add.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Three: Gather your images.''' For starters, we will use images that were taken either with a camera, or using the '''Record Activity''' on the XO. Any image that can be imported to the '''Journal''' on your XO and viewed in '''Image Viewer''' can be used. It is a good idea to rename each of the photos you will be using in the Journal. The name can include the number of the pane you plan to use it in so it is easy to find when you begin putting things together.<br />
<br />
==='''Place Your Images'''===<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Journal''' and check to be sure your images are there and can be viewed in the Image Viewer (click on the file to open it and check). Be sure the images have names that include the number of the pane you plan to place them (1,2,3, or 4).<br />
<br />
* Open '''FotoToon''' and find the '''"Add Photo"''' icon (number 2 in the '''FotoToon''' main toolbar shown above). A list of available images will appear. Click on the one you want to put in the first pane. When it has loaded, you can either leave it or remove it with the minus sign icon (number 10 in the main toolbar shown above). '''Warning:''' You can only remove the last image entered. That is why it is important to number the images according to the panes you wish to place them in. After the first image has been placed, continue adding images until all four for your first project have been placed. If you decide later that you want to change their order after they have been placed, you will need to delete them and replace them in the new order. ''It is best to get your final placement before adding any text.''<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallImportImages.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
If you would like to use the same images that will be used in this sample project, you will find them at these links. Go to each link, upload the photo to a usb drive, plug it into your XO, and open by clicking on the image names. They will open in the Image Viewer and be automatically saved so you can access them for your project. <br />
<br />
* Pane-1 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:1-Apple-Fries.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-2 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:2-Soda-Milk.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-3 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:3-Cookies-Yogurt.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-4 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:4-HealthySnacks.png<br />
<br />
==='''Add Dialogue and Titles'''===<br />
<br />
If you have planned well with your storyboard, you will have a pretty good idea of what you want to put in your dialogue balloons and text boxes. You may even have a title in mind for your project. You can actually start this process anywhere in your project. All of the balloons and boxes you will be using to do this will be identified in the first image above, the '''The Main PhotoToonToolbar'''.<br />
<br />
* Making and placing your '''Title''': If you know what you would like your title to be, you can start with that. It can always be changed later. When you start a project in FotoToon there will already be a tiny box for the title in a narrow band across the top of the project window. You can drag the upper left corner of the box to enlarge it (look for the cursor arrow to change to a thinner double headed arrow). You can also move it around in the band across the top. Click on the box and type all or part of your title. Then you can change the type style and size using the pull downs in the '''Text Pulldown''' menu (see 11e and 11f in the picture above). Experiment until you find a style and size you like. You can also change the color of the type. Don't worry if it isn't perfect, you can always come back later and change it. Notice that you can erase part of the text by backspacing over it.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallAddTitle.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this image you can see that we selected '''bold''', a '''red''' color from the color palette, a '''type size''' of 48, and the '''Font''' "Georgia".<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Text Balloons''': You can place the text balloons wherever you like within a pane. Click on the pane, then on the balloon you want to use (see 3,4,and 5 above for explanations). The balloon will appear in the pane. You can drag it to the position where you want it, and also can drag the little tail to point to the source of the dialogue. Add the words to the balloon in the same way you added them to the Title box.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:AddBalloonsCropSM3.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this image you can see that we have added 4 dialogue balloons (#3 in the main toolbar). We could also have used the "cloud" balloon (#4 in the main toolbar), or the "whisper" balloon (#5 in the main toolbar). The first pane is OK, but the first balloon in the second pane needs to be dragged to a better shape and size. The second ballon in the second pane appears just as it does when it is first added. It still needs to have text added and to be resized (by dragging a corner). You can see that our '''type size''' is 12, '''text color''' is black, and we are still using the Georgia '''font'''.<br />
<br />
As you work with the various text items, you may wish to eliminate one entirely. Just click on it, then on the icon with the minus (-) sign (see number 10 above), and it will disappear.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Exclamation Balloons''': You may wish to include special exclamations to your project. Choose the exclamation balloon (see 6 above). It is possible to eliminate the one longer point on the balloon by dragging it so that it matched the others. Again, type into the balloon just as you did in the title box and dialogue balloons.<br />
<br />
* Adding extra '''Text Boxes''': You can add a text box anywhere in any pane by clicking on the pane and then on the box icon in the diagram (see 7 above).<br />
<br />
===Exporting Your Project===<br />
<br />
==Extending FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Modifying FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
==Where to report problems==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Credits==<br />
<br />
<br />
== FotoToon 12==</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon&diff=270098Help Activity refresh/Chapter/FotoToon2012-04-25T22:33:10Z<p>Cbigenho: /* Add Dialogue and Titles */</p>
<hr />
<div>[[File:FotoToonIcon.png]]<br />
='''About FotoToon 12'''=<br />
The '''FotoToon''' Activity will allow you to create everything from a simple "comic" strip to a long elaborate illustrated document. You will be able to import many kinds of images into the panes of your project and add text bubbles to help tell the story. You can use photo images taken with the XO or imported from a camera, drawings made with Activities such as Paint, and images of all kinds downloaded from the web. This could include photos, charts and graphs, maps, and the like. <br><br />
This introduction to '''FotoToon''' will show you how to get started with a simple 4 panel project. If you want to learn to do more, you can watch the videos about using '''FotoToon''' that are available for viewing here (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE).<br />
<br />
='''Where to get FotoToon 12'''=<br />
'''FotoToon''' is not included on the basic 11.3.0 (.883) release of Sugar. To use it, you must download it from the Sugar Labs Activity library at: http://activities.sugarlabs.org/es-ES/sugar/addon/4253 You will find instructions for downloading this and other Activities here: (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE)<BR> You will notice that the description of the Activity and other information are in Spanish. That is because '''FotoToon''' was developed in Argentina. However, don't worry! '''FotoToon''' works in other languages as well!<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''', like many other Sugar Activities, is often updated to fix "bugs" that users report. There was one update, from version 11 to version 12 during the time this instruction chapter was written. By the time you use it, there may be others. The changes are usually minor and should not interfere with the usefulness of this information. Always try to be sure you are using the latest version.<br />
<br />
='''Using FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
=='''The Toolbars'''==<br />
<br />
=== '''The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToon12 Main Screen.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''FotoToon Toolbar''' has 13 icons including 2 with pulldown menus. The '''main FotoToon''' toolbar allows you to access many features of the Activity. Here is a description of what each of the icons will allow you to do:<br />
<br />
* 1. The '''FotoToon''' icon. When you hover your cursor over this icon you will open a small pulldown that allows you to export your work as an image. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 2. The '''Add Image''' icon. This icon allows you to add an image to your project. It can be a photo you take with the XO or digital camera, or import from the web. It can also be a picture, page, or project you create in another Sugar Activity.<br />
<br />
The next four icons allow you to add text to your drawings and photos. They include:<br />
* 3. A normal dialogue Globe<br />
* 4. A cloud shape to tell what a character is silently Thinking<br />
* 5. A dotted globe which indicates a character is talking in a Whisper<br />
* 6. An exclamation bubble to add things like "Pow!" "Bang!" and "Wham!"<br />
* 7. Is a box where you can put the Title of your project. Just above it is a box icon that allows you to add more rectangular text boxes to your project.<br />
* 8. The Movement icon allows you to add little curves to indicate motion, highlight an object with a sunburst, add some parallel lines to show horizontal or vertical motion, or add a little light bulb to show that someone had a bright idea.<br />
* 9. The circular arrow allows you to click on an object, then on this icon and rotate it clockwise 1/4 turn (90 degrees) with each click.<br />
* 10. This icon allows you to delete something you have added.<br />
* 11. This icon opens and closes the Text pulldown where you can select the font and size of your text as well as select bold, italics, or other colors for your words. Click it to open, and when finished, click again to close. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 12. The familiar stop-sign icon is one way to stop the '''FotoToon''' Activity. You can also use the keyboard shortcut: ctrl-Q.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
==='''The Text Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonTextPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Text Pulldown''' menu allows you to control the appearance of the text you add to your project. Generally, they apply to everything in the box or bubble you are currently working on. You do not have to highlight the text to change it.<br />
<br />
* 11a- Selecting this icon will change the text you are working on to '''Bold'''. Clicking it again reverts back to regular text,<br />
<br />
* 11b- Selecting this icon will change the text your are working on to ''Italics''.<br />
<br />
Note: clicking on both of these icons, in any order, will give you '''''Bold Italic''''' text. Clicking both again, in any order, will get you back to regular text.<br />
<br />
* 11c- Clicking on this icon will open the Text Color Pallete. See below for information on how to use it.<br />
<br />
* 11d- This is a non-functioning icon that identifies this as the Text Pulldown toolbar.<br />
<br />
* 11e- This little pull down allows you to choose the size of the text you are working on.<br />
<br />
* 11f- This pull down offers a choice of 37 different fonts, listed in alphabetical order. Some, such as "Ding Bats" don't actually produce anything. Be sure to test the font on your text to see if it looks the way you would like it to.<br />
<br />
==='''The Color Pallete Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:ScreenshotofFTColorPallete.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Color Pallete Pulldown''' allows you to choose the color of your font. It will apply to everything in the box or bubble but can vary from one box or bubble to the next as you choose. There are 12 preset colors you can use, or you can create a custom color by selecting one of the preset colors and dragging the sliders to give more or less Red, Green, or Blue in the selected color. The little circle at the top of the Color Pallete shows the current color. When you are satisfied with the color you have selected/modified, click on the little circle to accept the chosen color and close the Color Pallete. It may take a few seconds for the new color to appear in the text box. But, don't worry, it will!<br />
<br />
='''Learning with FotoToon 12'''=<br />
=='''Plan Ahead'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''' can be used for a wide variety of learning activities, but the general process is always similar. For the sample project in this section, we will make a 4 panel page using 4 photos. This is a good way to get started since the page can be printed on a single page. <br />
<br />
Here are the general steps you need to complete before you build your first FotoToon project:<br />
<br />
* '''Step One: Decide what your project will be about.''' You can tell a story about anything. For example, it could be about your pets, your home, your family, your town, or, even some photos you took at a party. Any topic is fine for our first project. The sample project will be about "Healthy Snacks" and the photos will be pictures of food.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Two: Make a plan.''' Before you begin you should make a plan that will guide you through the construction of your project. Some people like to draw a little sketch of each pane showing what will be in the picture and a suggestion for what words will be added. If you like the panes can each be on a separate small piece of paper so you can re-arrange them easily This is called a '''Story Board'''. You may have another way you would like to make your plan, just be sure to include information about what pictures you will use, where you will get them, and what text you plan to add.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Three: Gather your images.''' For starters, we will use images that were taken either with a camera, or using the '''Record Activity''' on the XO. Any image that can be imported to the '''Journal''' on your XO and viewed in '''Image Viewer''' can be used. It is a good idea to rename each of the photos you will be using in the Journal. The name can include the number of the pane you plan to use it in so it is easy to find when you begin putting things together.<br />
<br />
==='''Place Your Images'''===<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Journal''' and check to be sure your images are there and can be viewed in the Image Viewer (click on the file to open it and check). Be sure the images have names that include the number of the pane you plan to place them (1,2,3, or 4).<br />
<br />
* Open '''FotoToon''' and find the '''"Add Photo"''' icon (number 2 in the '''FotoToon''' main toolbar shown above). A list of available images will appear. Click on the one you want to put in the first pane. When it has loaded, you can either leave it or remove it with the minus sign icon (number 10 in the main toolbar shown above). '''Warning:''' You can only remove the last image entered. That is why it is important to number the images according to the panes you wish to place them in. After the first image has been placed, continue adding images until all four for your first project have been placed. If you decide later that you want to change their order after they have been placed, you will need to delete them and replace them in the new order. ''It is best to get your final placement before adding any text.''<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallImportImages.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
If you would like to use the same images that will be used in this sample project, you will find them at these links. Go to each link, upload the photo to a usb drive, plug it into your XO, and open by clicking on the image names. They will open in the Image Viewer and be automatically saved so you can access them for your project. <br />
<br />
* Pane-1 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:1-Apple-Fries.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-2 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:2-Soda-Milk.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-3 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:3-Cookies-Yogurt.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-4 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:4-HealthySnacks.png<br />
<br />
==='''Add Dialogue and Titles'''===<br />
<br />
If you have planned well with your storyboard, you will have a pretty good idea of what you want to put in your dialogue balloons and text boxes. You may even have a title in mind for your project. You can actually start this process anywhere in your project. All of the balloons and boxes you will be using to do this will be identified in the first image above, the '''The Main PhotoToonToolbar'''.<br />
<br />
* Making and placing your '''Title''': If you know what you would like your title to be, you can start with that. It can always be changed later. When you start a project in FotoToon there will already be a tiny box for the title in a narrow band across the top of the project window. You can drag the upper left corner of the box to enlarge it (look for the cursor arrow to change to a thinner double headed arrow). You can also move it around in the band across the top. Click on the box and type all or part of your title. Then you can change the type style and size using the pull downs in the '''Text Pulldown''' menu (see 11e and 11f in the picture above). Experiment until you find a style and size you like. You can also change the color of the type. Don't worry if it isn't perfect, you can always come back later and change it. Notice that you can erase part of the text by backspacing over it.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallAddTitle.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this image you can see that we selected '''bold''', a '''red''' color from the color palette, a '''type size''' of 48, and the '''Font''' "Georgia".<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Text Balloons''': You can place the text balloons wherever you like within a pane. Click on the pane, then on the balloon you want to use (see 3,4,and 5 above for explanations). The balloon will appear in the pane. You can drag it to the position where you want it, and also can drag the little tail to point to the source of the dialogue. Add the words to the balloon in the same way you added them to the Title box.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:AddBalloonsCropSM3.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this image you can see that we have added 4 dialogue balloons. We could also have used the "cloud" balloon (XX), or the "whisper" balloon (YY). The first pane is OK, but the first balloon in the second pane needs to be dragged to a better shape and size. The second ballon in the second pane appears just as it does when it is first added. It still needs to have text added and to be resized (by dragging a corner). You can see that our '''type size''' is 12, '''text color''' is black, and we are still using the Georgia '''font'''.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Exclamation Balloons''': You may wish to include special exclamations to your project. Choose the exclamation balloon (see 6 above). It is possible to eliminate the one longer point on the balloon by dragging it so that it matched the others. Again, type into the balloon just as you did in the title box and dialogue balloons.<br />
<br />
* Adding extra '''Text Boxes''': You can add a text box anywhere in any pane by clicking on the pane and then on the box icon in the diagram (see 7 above).<br />
<br />
As you work with the various text items, you may wish to eliminate one entirely. Just click on it, then on the icon with the minus (-) sign (see number 10 above), and it will disappear.<br />
<br />
===Exporting Your Project===<br />
<br />
==Extending FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Modifying FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
==Where to report problems==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Credits==<br />
<br />
<br />
== FotoToon 12==</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=File:AddBalloonsCropSM3.png&diff=270097File:AddBalloonsCropSM3.png2012-04-25T22:23:47Z<p>Cbigenho: </p>
<hr />
<div></div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=File:AddBalloonsCropSm.png&diff=270096File:AddBalloonsCropSm.png2012-04-25T22:15:47Z<p>Cbigenho: </p>
<hr />
<div></div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=File:File-SmallAddBalloons.png&diff=270095File:File-SmallAddBalloons.png2012-04-25T21:54:48Z<p>Cbigenho: </p>
<hr />
<div></div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon&diff=270094Help Activity refresh/Chapter/FotoToon2012-04-25T21:38:29Z<p>Cbigenho: /* Add Dialogue and Titles */</p>
<hr />
<div>[[File:FotoToonIcon.png]]<br />
='''About FotoToon 12'''=<br />
The '''FotoToon''' Activity will allow you to create everything from a simple "comic" strip to a long elaborate illustrated document. You will be able to import many kinds of images into the panes of your project and add text bubbles to help tell the story. You can use photo images taken with the XO or imported from a camera, drawings made with Activities such as Paint, and images of all kinds downloaded from the web. This could include photos, charts and graphs, maps, and the like. <br><br />
This introduction to '''FotoToon''' will show you how to get started with a simple 4 panel project. If you want to learn to do more, you can watch the videos about using '''FotoToon''' that are available for viewing here (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE).<br />
<br />
='''Where to get FotoToon 12'''=<br />
'''FotoToon''' is not included on the basic 11.3.0 (.883) release of Sugar. To use it, you must download it from the Sugar Labs Activity library at: http://activities.sugarlabs.org/es-ES/sugar/addon/4253 You will find instructions for downloading this and other Activities here: (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE)<BR> You will notice that the description of the Activity and other information are in Spanish. That is because '''FotoToon''' was developed in Argentina. However, don't worry! '''FotoToon''' works in other languages as well!<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''', like many other Sugar Activities, is often updated to fix "bugs" that users report. There was one update, from version 11 to version 12 during the time this instruction chapter was written. By the time you use it, there may be others. The changes are usually minor and should not interfere with the usefulness of this information. Always try to be sure you are using the latest version.<br />
<br />
='''Using FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
=='''The Toolbars'''==<br />
<br />
=== '''The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToon12 Main Screen.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''FotoToon Toolbar''' has 13 icons including 2 with pulldown menus. The '''main FotoToon''' toolbar allows you to access many features of the Activity. Here is a description of what each of the icons will allow you to do:<br />
<br />
* 1. The '''FotoToon''' icon. When you hover your cursor over this icon you will open a small pulldown that allows you to export your work as an image. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 2. The '''Add Image''' icon. This icon allows you to add an image to your project. It can be a photo you take with the XO or digital camera, or import from the web. It can also be a picture, page, or project you create in another Sugar Activity.<br />
<br />
The next four icons allow you to add text to your drawings and photos. They include:<br />
* 3. A normal dialogue Globe<br />
* 4. A cloud shape to tell what a character is silently Thinking<br />
* 5. A dotted globe which indicates a character is talking in a Whisper<br />
* 6. An exclamation bubble to add things like "Pow!" "Bang!" and "Wham!"<br />
* 7. Is a box where you can put the Title of your project. Just above it is a box icon that allows you to add more rectangular text boxes to your project.<br />
* 8. The Movement icon allows you to add little curves to indicate motion, highlight an object with a sunburst, add some parallel lines to show horizontal or vertical motion, or add a little light bulb to show that someone had a bright idea.<br />
* 9. The circular arrow allows you to click on an object, then on this icon and rotate it clockwise 1/4 turn (90 degrees) with each click.<br />
* 10. This icon allows you to delete something you have added.<br />
* 11. This icon opens and closes the Text pulldown where you can select the font and size of your text as well as select bold, italics, or other colors for your words. Click it to open, and when finished, click again to close. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 12. The familiar stop-sign icon is one way to stop the '''FotoToon''' Activity. You can also use the keyboard shortcut: ctrl-Q.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
==='''The Text Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonTextPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Text Pulldown''' menu allows you to control the appearance of the text you add to your project. Generally, they apply to everything in the box or bubble you are currently working on. You do not have to highlight the text to change it.<br />
<br />
* 11a- Selecting this icon will change the text you are working on to '''Bold'''. Clicking it again reverts back to regular text,<br />
<br />
* 11b- Selecting this icon will change the text your are working on to ''Italics''.<br />
<br />
Note: clicking on both of these icons, in any order, will give you '''''Bold Italic''''' text. Clicking both again, in any order, will get you back to regular text.<br />
<br />
* 11c- Clicking on this icon will open the Text Color Pallete. See below for information on how to use it.<br />
<br />
* 11d- This is a non-functioning icon that identifies this as the Text Pulldown toolbar.<br />
<br />
* 11e- This little pull down allows you to choose the size of the text you are working on.<br />
<br />
* 11f- This pull down offers a choice of 37 different fonts, listed in alphabetical order. Some, such as "Ding Bats" don't actually produce anything. Be sure to test the font on your text to see if it looks the way you would like it to.<br />
<br />
==='''The Color Pallete Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:ScreenshotofFTColorPallete.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Color Pallete Pulldown''' allows you to choose the color of your font. It will apply to everything in the box or bubble but can vary from one box or bubble to the next as you choose. There are 12 preset colors you can use, or you can create a custom color by selecting one of the preset colors and dragging the sliders to give more or less Red, Green, or Blue in the selected color. The little circle at the top of the Color Pallete shows the current color. When you are satisfied with the color you have selected/modified, click on the little circle to accept the chosen color and close the Color Pallete. It may take a few seconds for the new color to appear in the text box. But, don't worry, it will!<br />
<br />
='''Learning with FotoToon 12'''=<br />
=='''Plan Ahead'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''' can be used for a wide variety of learning activities, but the general process is always similar. For the sample project in this section, we will make a 4 panel page using 4 photos. This is a good way to get started since the page can be printed on a single page. <br />
<br />
Here are the general steps you need to complete before you build your first FotoToon project:<br />
<br />
* '''Step One: Decide what your project will be about.''' You can tell a story about anything. For example, it could be about your pets, your home, your family, your town, or, even some photos you took at a party. Any topic is fine for our first project. The sample project will be about "Healthy Snacks" and the photos will be pictures of food.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Two: Make a plan.''' Before you begin you should make a plan that will guide you through the construction of your project. Some people like to draw a little sketch of each pane showing what will be in the picture and a suggestion for what words will be added. If you like the panes can each be on a separate small piece of paper so you can re-arrange them easily This is called a '''Story Board'''. You may have another way you would like to make your plan, just be sure to include information about what pictures you will use, where you will get them, and what text you plan to add.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Three: Gather your images.''' For starters, we will use images that were taken either with a camera, or using the '''Record Activity''' on the XO. Any image that can be imported to the '''Journal''' on your XO and viewed in '''Image Viewer''' can be used. It is a good idea to rename each of the photos you will be using in the Journal. The name can include the number of the pane you plan to use it in so it is easy to find when you begin putting things together.<br />
<br />
==='''Place Your Images'''===<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Journal''' and check to be sure your images are there and can be viewed in the Image Viewer (click on the file to open it and check). Be sure the images have names that include the number of the pane you plan to place them (1,2,3, or 4).<br />
<br />
* Open '''FotoToon''' and find the '''"Add Photo"''' icon (number 2 in the '''FotoToon''' main toolbar shown above). A list of available images will appear. Click on the one you want to put in the first pane. When it has loaded, you can either leave it or remove it with the minus sign icon (number 10 in the main toolbar shown above). '''Warning:''' You can only remove the last image entered. That is why it is important to number the images according to the panes you wish to place them in. After the first image has been placed, continue adding images until all four for your first project have been placed. If you decide later that you want to change their order after they have been placed, you will need to delete them and replace them in the new order. ''It is best to get your final placement before adding any text.''<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallImportImages.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
If you would like to use the same images that will be used in this sample project, you will find them at these links. Go to each link, upload the photo to a usb drive, plug it into your XO, and open by clicking on the image names. They will open in the Image Viewer and be automatically saved so you can access them for your project. <br />
<br />
* Pane-1 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:1-Apple-Fries.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-2 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:2-Soda-Milk.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-3 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:3-Cookies-Yogurt.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-4 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:4-HealthySnacks.png<br />
<br />
==='''Add Dialogue and Titles'''===<br />
<br />
If you have planned well with your storyboard, you will have a pretty good idea of what you want to put in your dialogue balloons and text boxes. You may even have a title in mind for your project. You can actually start this process anywhere in your project. All of the balloons and boxes you will be using to do this will be identified in the first image above, the '''The Main PhotoToonToolbar'''.<br />
<br />
* Making and placing your '''Title''': If you know what you would like your title to be, you can start with that. It can always be changed later. When you start a project in FotoToon there will already be a tiny box for the title in a narrow band across the top of the project window. You can drag the upper left corner of the box to enlarge it (look for the cursor arrow to change to a thinner double headed arrow). You can also move it around in the band across the top. Click on the box and type all or part of your title. Then you can change the type style and size using the pull downs in the '''Text Pulldown''' menu (see 11e and 11f in the picture above). Experiment until you find a style and size you like. You can also change the color of the type. Don't worry if it isn't perfect, you can always come back later and change it. Notice that you can erase part of the text by backspacing over it.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallAddTitle.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
In this title you can see that we selected '''bold''', a '''red''' color from the color palette, a '''type size''' of 48, and the '''Font''' "Georgia".<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Text Balloons''': You can place the text balloons wherever you like within a pane. Click on the pane, then on the balloon you want to use (see 3,4,and 5 above for explanations). The balloon will appear in the pane. You can drag it to the position where you want it, and also can drag the little tail to point to the source of the dialogue. Add the words to the balloon in the same way you added them to the Title box.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Exclamation Balloons''': You may wish to include special exclamations to your project. Choose the exclamation balloon (see 6 above). It is possible to eliminate the one longer point on the balloon by dragging it so that it matched the others. Again, type into the balloon just as you did in the title box and dialogue balloons.<br />
<br />
* Adding extra '''Text Boxes''': You can add a text box anywhere in any pane by clicking on the pane and then on the box icon in the diagram (see 7 above).<br />
<br />
As you work with the various text items, you may wish to eliminate one entirely. Just click on it, then on the icon with the minus (-) sign (see number 10 above), and it will disappear.<br />
<br />
===Exporting Your Project===<br />
<br />
==Extending FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Modifying FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
==Where to report problems==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Credits==<br />
<br />
<br />
== FotoToon 12==</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=File:SmallAddTitle.png&diff=270093File:SmallAddTitle.png2012-04-25T21:30:54Z<p>Cbigenho: uploaded a new version of "File:SmallAddTitle.png"</p>
<hr />
<div></div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=File:SmallAddTitle.png&diff=270092File:SmallAddTitle.png2012-04-25T21:25:25Z<p>Cbigenho: </p>
<hr />
<div></div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon&diff=270091Help Activity refresh/Chapter/FotoToon2012-04-25T21:24:37Z<p>Cbigenho: /* Add Dialogue and Titles */</p>
<hr />
<div>[[File:FotoToonIcon.png]]<br />
='''About FotoToon 12'''=<br />
The '''FotoToon''' Activity will allow you to create everything from a simple "comic" strip to a long elaborate illustrated document. You will be able to import many kinds of images into the panes of your project and add text bubbles to help tell the story. You can use photo images taken with the XO or imported from a camera, drawings made with Activities such as Paint, and images of all kinds downloaded from the web. This could include photos, charts and graphs, maps, and the like. <br><br />
This introduction to '''FotoToon''' will show you how to get started with a simple 4 panel project. If you want to learn to do more, you can watch the videos about using '''FotoToon''' that are available for viewing here (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE).<br />
<br />
='''Where to get FotoToon 12'''=<br />
'''FotoToon''' is not included on the basic 11.3.0 (.883) release of Sugar. To use it, you must download it from the Sugar Labs Activity library at: http://activities.sugarlabs.org/es-ES/sugar/addon/4253 You will find instructions for downloading this and other Activities here: (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE)<BR> You will notice that the description of the Activity and other information are in Spanish. That is because '''FotoToon''' was developed in Argentina. However, don't worry! '''FotoToon''' works in other languages as well!<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''', like many other Sugar Activities, is often updated to fix "bugs" that users report. There was one update, from version 11 to version 12 during the time this instruction chapter was written. By the time you use it, there may be others. The changes are usually minor and should not interfere with the usefulness of this information. Always try to be sure you are using the latest version.<br />
<br />
='''Using FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
=='''The Toolbars'''==<br />
<br />
=== '''The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToon12 Main Screen.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''FotoToon Toolbar''' has 13 icons including 2 with pulldown menus. The '''main FotoToon''' toolbar allows you to access many features of the Activity. Here is a description of what each of the icons will allow you to do:<br />
<br />
* 1. The '''FotoToon''' icon. When you hover your cursor over this icon you will open a small pulldown that allows you to export your work as an image. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 2. The '''Add Image''' icon. This icon allows you to add an image to your project. It can be a photo you take with the XO or digital camera, or import from the web. It can also be a picture, page, or project you create in another Sugar Activity.<br />
<br />
The next four icons allow you to add text to your drawings and photos. They include:<br />
* 3. A normal dialogue Globe<br />
* 4. A cloud shape to tell what a character is silently Thinking<br />
* 5. A dotted globe which indicates a character is talking in a Whisper<br />
* 6. An exclamation bubble to add things like "Pow!" "Bang!" and "Wham!"<br />
* 7. Is a box where you can put the Title of your project. Just above it is a box icon that allows you to add more rectangular text boxes to your project.<br />
* 8. The Movement icon allows you to add little curves to indicate motion, highlight an object with a sunburst, add some parallel lines to show horizontal or vertical motion, or add a little light bulb to show that someone had a bright idea.<br />
* 9. The circular arrow allows you to click on an object, then on this icon and rotate it clockwise 1/4 turn (90 degrees) with each click.<br />
* 10. This icon allows you to delete something you have added.<br />
* 11. This icon opens and closes the Text pulldown where you can select the font and size of your text as well as select bold, italics, or other colors for your words. Click it to open, and when finished, click again to close. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 12. The familiar stop-sign icon is one way to stop the '''FotoToon''' Activity. You can also use the keyboard shortcut: ctrl-Q.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
==='''The Text Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonTextPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Text Pulldown''' menu allows you to control the appearance of the text you add to your project. Generally, they apply to everything in the box or bubble you are currently working on. You do not have to highlight the text to change it.<br />
<br />
* 11a- Selecting this icon will change the text you are working on to '''Bold'''. Clicking it again reverts back to regular text,<br />
<br />
* 11b- Selecting this icon will change the text your are working on to ''Italics''.<br />
<br />
Note: clicking on both of these icons, in any order, will give you '''''Bold Italic''''' text. Clicking both again, in any order, will get you back to regular text.<br />
<br />
* 11c- Clicking on this icon will open the Text Color Pallete. See below for information on how to use it.<br />
<br />
* 11d- This is a non-functioning icon that identifies this as the Text Pulldown toolbar.<br />
<br />
* 11e- This little pull down allows you to choose the size of the text you are working on.<br />
<br />
* 11f- This pull down offers a choice of 37 different fonts, listed in alphabetical order. Some, such as "Ding Bats" don't actually produce anything. Be sure to test the font on your text to see if it looks the way you would like it to.<br />
<br />
==='''The Color Pallete Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:ScreenshotofFTColorPallete.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Color Pallete Pulldown''' allows you to choose the color of your font. It will apply to everything in the box or bubble but can vary from one box or bubble to the next as you choose. There are 12 preset colors you can use, or you can create a custom color by selecting one of the preset colors and dragging the sliders to give more or less Red, Green, or Blue in the selected color. The little circle at the top of the Color Pallete shows the current color. When you are satisfied with the color you have selected/modified, click on the little circle to accept the chosen color and close the Color Pallete. It may take a few seconds for the new color to appear in the text box. But, don't worry, it will!<br />
<br />
='''Learning with FotoToon 12'''=<br />
=='''Plan Ahead'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''' can be used for a wide variety of learning activities, but the general process is always similar. For the sample project in this section, we will make a 4 panel page using 4 photos. This is a good way to get started since the page can be printed on a single page. <br />
<br />
Here are the general steps you need to complete before you build your first FotoToon project:<br />
<br />
* '''Step One: Decide what your project will be about.''' You can tell a story about anything. For example, it could be about your pets, your home, your family, your town, or, even some photos you took at a party. Any topic is fine for our first project. The sample project will be about "Healthy Snacks" and the photos will be pictures of food.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Two: Make a plan.''' Before you begin you should make a plan that will guide you through the construction of your project. Some people like to draw a little sketch of each pane showing what will be in the picture and a suggestion for what words will be added. If you like the panes can each be on a separate small piece of paper so you can re-arrange them easily This is called a '''Story Board'''. You may have another way you would like to make your plan, just be sure to include information about what pictures you will use, where you will get them, and what text you plan to add.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Three: Gather your images.''' For starters, we will use images that were taken either with a camera, or using the '''Record Activity''' on the XO. Any image that can be imported to the '''Journal''' on your XO and viewed in '''Image Viewer''' can be used. It is a good idea to rename each of the photos you will be using in the Journal. The name can include the number of the pane you plan to use it in so it is easy to find when you begin putting things together.<br />
<br />
==='''Place Your Images'''===<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Journal''' and check to be sure your images are there and can be viewed in the Image Viewer (click on the file to open it and check). Be sure the images have names that include the number of the pane you plan to place them (1,2,3, or 4).<br />
<br />
* Open '''FotoToon''' and find the '''"Add Photo"''' icon (number 2 in the '''FotoToon''' main toolbar shown above). A list of available images will appear. Click on the one you want to put in the first pane. When it has loaded, you can either leave it or remove it with the minus sign icon (number 10 in the main toolbar shown above). '''Warning:''' You can only remove the last image entered. That is why it is important to number the images according to the panes you wish to place them in. After the first image has been placed, continue adding images until all four for your first project have been placed. If you decide later that you want to change their order after they have been placed, you will need to delete them and replace them in the new order. ''It is best to get your final placement before adding any text.''<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallImportImages.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
If you would like to use the same images that will be used in this sample project, you will find them at these links. Go to each link, upload the photo to a usb drive, plug it into your XO, and open by clicking on the image names. They will open in the Image Viewer and be automatically saved so you can access them for your project. <br />
<br />
* Pane-1 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:1-Apple-Fries.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-2 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:2-Soda-Milk.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-3 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:3-Cookies-Yogurt.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-4 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:4-HealthySnacks.png<br />
<br />
==='''Add Dialogue and Titles'''===<br />
<br />
If you have planned well with your storyboard, you will have a pretty good idea of what you want to put in your dialogue balloons and text boxes. You may even have a title in mind for your project. You can actually start this process anywhere in your project. All of the balloons and boxes you will be using to do this will be identified in the first image above, the '''The Main PhotoToonToolbar'''.<br />
<br />
* Making and placing your '''Title''': If you know what you would like your title to be, you can start with that. It can always be changed later. When you start a project in FotoToon there will already be a tiny box for the title in a narrow band across the top of the project window. You can drag the upper left corner of the box to enlarge it (look for the cursor arrow to change to a thinner double headed arrow). You can also move it around in the band across the top. Click on the box and type all or part of your title. Then you can change the type style and size using the pull downs in the '''Text Pulldown''' menu (see 11e and 11f in the picture above). Experiment until you find a style and size you like. You can also change the color of the type. Don't worry if it isn't perfect, you can always come back later and change it. Notice that you can erase part of the text by backspacing over it.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Text Balloons''': You can place the text balloons wherever you like within a pane. Click on the pane, then on the balloon you want to use (see 3,4,and 5 above for explanations). The balloon will appear in the pane. You can drag it to the position where you want it, and also can drag the little tail to point to the source of the dialogue. Add the words to the balloon in the same way you added them to the Title box.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Exclamation Balloons''': You may wish to include special exclamations to your project. Choose the exclamation balloon (see 6 above). It is possible to eliminate the one longer point on the balloon by dragging it so that it matched the others. Again, type into the balloon just as you did in the title box and dialogue balloons.<br />
<br />
* Adding extra '''Text Boxes''': You can add a text box anywhere in any pane by clicking on the pane and then on the box icon in the diagram (see 7 above).<br />
<br />
As you work with the various text items, you may wish to eliminate one entirely. Just click on it, then on the icon with the minus (-) sign (see number 10 above), and it will disappear.<br />
<br />
===Exporting Your Project===<br />
<br />
==Extending FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Modifying FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
==Where to report problems==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Credits==<br />
<br />
<br />
== FotoToon 12==</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon&diff=270090Help Activity refresh/Chapter/FotoToon2012-04-25T21:17:39Z<p>Cbigenho: /* Place Your Images */</p>
<hr />
<div>[[File:FotoToonIcon.png]]<br />
='''About FotoToon 12'''=<br />
The '''FotoToon''' Activity will allow you to create everything from a simple "comic" strip to a long elaborate illustrated document. You will be able to import many kinds of images into the panes of your project and add text bubbles to help tell the story. You can use photo images taken with the XO or imported from a camera, drawings made with Activities such as Paint, and images of all kinds downloaded from the web. This could include photos, charts and graphs, maps, and the like. <br><br />
This introduction to '''FotoToon''' will show you how to get started with a simple 4 panel project. If you want to learn to do more, you can watch the videos about using '''FotoToon''' that are available for viewing here (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE).<br />
<br />
='''Where to get FotoToon 12'''=<br />
'''FotoToon''' is not included on the basic 11.3.0 (.883) release of Sugar. To use it, you must download it from the Sugar Labs Activity library at: http://activities.sugarlabs.org/es-ES/sugar/addon/4253 You will find instructions for downloading this and other Activities here: (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE)<BR> You will notice that the description of the Activity and other information are in Spanish. That is because '''FotoToon''' was developed in Argentina. However, don't worry! '''FotoToon''' works in other languages as well!<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''', like many other Sugar Activities, is often updated to fix "bugs" that users report. There was one update, from version 11 to version 12 during the time this instruction chapter was written. By the time you use it, there may be others. The changes are usually minor and should not interfere with the usefulness of this information. Always try to be sure you are using the latest version.<br />
<br />
='''Using FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
=='''The Toolbars'''==<br />
<br />
=== '''The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToon12 Main Screen.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''FotoToon Toolbar''' has 13 icons including 2 with pulldown menus. The '''main FotoToon''' toolbar allows you to access many features of the Activity. Here is a description of what each of the icons will allow you to do:<br />
<br />
* 1. The '''FotoToon''' icon. When you hover your cursor over this icon you will open a small pulldown that allows you to export your work as an image. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 2. The '''Add Image''' icon. This icon allows you to add an image to your project. It can be a photo you take with the XO or digital camera, or import from the web. It can also be a picture, page, or project you create in another Sugar Activity.<br />
<br />
The next four icons allow you to add text to your drawings and photos. They include:<br />
* 3. A normal dialogue Globe<br />
* 4. A cloud shape to tell what a character is silently Thinking<br />
* 5. A dotted globe which indicates a character is talking in a Whisper<br />
* 6. An exclamation bubble to add things like "Pow!" "Bang!" and "Wham!"<br />
* 7. Is a box where you can put the Title of your project. Just above it is a box icon that allows you to add more rectangular text boxes to your project.<br />
* 8. The Movement icon allows you to add little curves to indicate motion, highlight an object with a sunburst, add some parallel lines to show horizontal or vertical motion, or add a little light bulb to show that someone had a bright idea.<br />
* 9. The circular arrow allows you to click on an object, then on this icon and rotate it clockwise 1/4 turn (90 degrees) with each click.<br />
* 10. This icon allows you to delete something you have added.<br />
* 11. This icon opens and closes the Text pulldown where you can select the font and size of your text as well as select bold, italics, or other colors for your words. Click it to open, and when finished, click again to close. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 12. The familiar stop-sign icon is one way to stop the '''FotoToon''' Activity. You can also use the keyboard shortcut: ctrl-Q.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
==='''The Text Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonTextPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Text Pulldown''' menu allows you to control the appearance of the text you add to your project. Generally, they apply to everything in the box or bubble you are currently working on. You do not have to highlight the text to change it.<br />
<br />
* 11a- Selecting this icon will change the text you are working on to '''Bold'''. Clicking it again reverts back to regular text,<br />
<br />
* 11b- Selecting this icon will change the text your are working on to ''Italics''.<br />
<br />
Note: clicking on both of these icons, in any order, will give you '''''Bold Italic''''' text. Clicking both again, in any order, will get you back to regular text.<br />
<br />
* 11c- Clicking on this icon will open the Text Color Pallete. See below for information on how to use it.<br />
<br />
* 11d- This is a non-functioning icon that identifies this as the Text Pulldown toolbar.<br />
<br />
* 11e- This little pull down allows you to choose the size of the text you are working on.<br />
<br />
* 11f- This pull down offers a choice of 37 different fonts, listed in alphabetical order. Some, such as "Ding Bats" don't actually produce anything. Be sure to test the font on your text to see if it looks the way you would like it to.<br />
<br />
==='''The Color Pallete Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:ScreenshotofFTColorPallete.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Color Pallete Pulldown''' allows you to choose the color of your font. It will apply to everything in the box or bubble but can vary from one box or bubble to the next as you choose. There are 12 preset colors you can use, or you can create a custom color by selecting one of the preset colors and dragging the sliders to give more or less Red, Green, or Blue in the selected color. The little circle at the top of the Color Pallete shows the current color. When you are satisfied with the color you have selected/modified, click on the little circle to accept the chosen color and close the Color Pallete. It may take a few seconds for the new color to appear in the text box. But, don't worry, it will!<br />
<br />
='''Learning with FotoToon 12'''=<br />
=='''Plan Ahead'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''' can be used for a wide variety of learning activities, but the general process is always similar. For the sample project in this section, we will make a 4 panel page using 4 photos. This is a good way to get started since the page can be printed on a single page. <br />
<br />
Here are the general steps you need to complete before you build your first FotoToon project:<br />
<br />
* '''Step One: Decide what your project will be about.''' You can tell a story about anything. For example, it could be about your pets, your home, your family, your town, or, even some photos you took at a party. Any topic is fine for our first project. The sample project will be about "Healthy Snacks" and the photos will be pictures of food.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Two: Make a plan.''' Before you begin you should make a plan that will guide you through the construction of your project. Some people like to draw a little sketch of each pane showing what will be in the picture and a suggestion for what words will be added. If you like the panes can each be on a separate small piece of paper so you can re-arrange them easily This is called a '''Story Board'''. You may have another way you would like to make your plan, just be sure to include information about what pictures you will use, where you will get them, and what text you plan to add.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Three: Gather your images.''' For starters, we will use images that were taken either with a camera, or using the '''Record Activity''' on the XO. Any image that can be imported to the '''Journal''' on your XO and viewed in '''Image Viewer''' can be used. It is a good idea to rename each of the photos you will be using in the Journal. The name can include the number of the pane you plan to use it in so it is easy to find when you begin putting things together.<br />
<br />
==='''Place Your Images'''===<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Journal''' and check to be sure your images are there and can be viewed in the Image Viewer (click on the file to open it and check). Be sure the images have names that include the number of the pane you plan to place them (1,2,3, or 4).<br />
<br />
* Open '''FotoToon''' and find the '''"Add Photo"''' icon (number 2 in the '''FotoToon''' main toolbar shown above). A list of available images will appear. Click on the one you want to put in the first pane. When it has loaded, you can either leave it or remove it with the minus sign icon (number 10 in the main toolbar shown above). '''Warning:''' You can only remove the last image entered. That is why it is important to number the images according to the panes you wish to place them in. After the first image has been placed, continue adding images until all four for your first project have been placed. If you decide later that you want to change their order after they have been placed, you will need to delete them and replace them in the new order. ''It is best to get your final placement before adding any text.''<br />
<br />
[[File:SmallImportImages.png|center|Image on center]]<br />
<br />
If you would like to use the same images that will be used in this sample project, you will find them at these links. Go to each link, upload the photo to a usb drive, plug it into your XO, and open by clicking on the image names. They will open in the Image Viewer and be automatically saved so you can access them for your project. <br />
<br />
* Pane-1 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:1-Apple-Fries.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-2 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:2-Soda-Milk.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-3 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:3-Cookies-Yogurt.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-4 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:4-HealthySnacks.png<br />
<br />
==='''Add Dialogue and Titles'''===<br />
<br />
If you have planned well with your storyboard, you will have a pretty good idea of what you want to put in your dialogue balloons and text boxes. You may even have a title in mind for your project. You can actually start this process anywhere in your project. All of the balloons and boxes you will be using to do this will be identified in the first image above, the '''The Main PhotoToonToolbar'''.<br />
<br />
* Making and placing your '''Title''': If you know what you would like your title to be, you can start with that. It can always be changed later. When you start a project in FotoToon there will already be a tiny box for the title in a narrow band across the top of the project window. You can drag the upper left corner of the box to enlarge it (look for the cursor arrow to change to a thinner double headed arrow). You can also move it around in the band across the top. Click on the box and type all or part of your title. Then you can change the type style and size using the pull downs in the '''Text Pulldown''' menu (see 11e and 11f in the picture above). Experiment until you find a style and size you like. You can also change the color of the type. Don't worry if it isn't perfect, you can always come back later and change it. Notice that you can erase part of the text by backspacing over it.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Text Balloons''': You can place the text balloons wherever you like within a pane. Click on the pane, then on the balloon you want to use (see 3,4,and 5 above for explanations). The balloon will appear in the pane. You can drag it to the position where you want it, and also can drag the little tail to point to the source of the dialogue. Add the words to the balloon in the same way you added them to the Title box.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Exclamation Balloons''': You may wish to include special exclamations to your project. Choose the exclamation balloon (see 6 above). It is possible to eliminate the one longer point on the balloon by dragging it so that it matched the others. Again, type into the balloon just as you did in the title box and dialogue balloons.<br />
<br />
* Adding extra '''Text Boxes''': You can add a text box anywhere in any pane by clicking on the pane and then on the box icon in the diagram (see 7 above).<br />
<br />
As you work with the various text items, you may wish to eliminate one entirely. Just click on it, then on the icon with the minus (-) sign (see number 10 above), and it will disappear.<br />
<br />
===Exporting Your Project===<br />
<br />
==Extending FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Modifying FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
==Where to report problems==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Credits==<br />
<br />
<br />
== FotoToon 12==</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=File:SmallImportImages.png&diff=270089File:SmallImportImages.png2012-04-25T21:12:25Z<p>Cbigenho: </p>
<hr />
<div></div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon&diff=270075Help Activity refresh/Chapter/FotoToon2012-04-25T16:52:06Z<p>Cbigenho: /* The Text Pulldown */</p>
<hr />
<div>[[File:FotoToonIcon.png]]<br />
='''About FotoToon 12'''=<br />
The '''FotoToon''' Activity will allow you to create everything from a simple "comic" strip to a long elaborate illustrated document. You will be able to import many kinds of images into the panes of your project and add text bubbles to help tell the story. You can use photo images taken with the XO or imported from a camera, drawings made with Activities such as Paint, and images of all kinds downloaded from the web. This could include photos, charts and graphs, maps, and the like. <br><br />
This introduction to '''FotoToon''' will show you how to get started with a simple 4 panel project. If you want to learn to do more, you can watch the videos about using '''FotoToon''' that are available for viewing here (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE).<br />
<br />
='''Where to get FotoToon 12'''=<br />
'''FotoToon''' is not included on the basic 11.3.0 (.883) release of Sugar. To use it, you must download it from the Sugar Labs Activity library at: http://activities.sugarlabs.org/es-ES/sugar/addon/4253 You will find instructions for downloading this and other Activities here: (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE)<BR> You will notice that the description of the Activity and other information are in Spanish. That is because '''FotoToon''' was developed in Argentina. However, don't worry! '''FotoToon''' works in other languages as well!<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''', like many other Sugar Activities, is often updated to fix "bugs" that users report. There was one update, from version 11 to version 12 during the time this instruction chapter was written. By the time you use it, there may be others. The changes are usually minor and should not interfere with the usefulness of this information. Always try to be sure you are using the latest version.<br />
<br />
='''Using FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
=='''The Toolbars'''==<br />
<br />
=== '''The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToon12 Main Screen.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''FotoToon Toolbar''' has 13 icons including 2 with pulldown menus. The '''main FotoToon''' toolbar allows you to access many features of the Activity. Here is a description of what each of the icons will allow you to do:<br />
<br />
* 1. The '''FotoToon''' icon. When you hover your cursor over this icon you will open a small pulldown that allows you to export your work as an image. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 2. The '''Add Image''' icon. This icon allows you to add an image to your project. It can be a photo you take with the XO or digital camera, or import from the web. It can also be a picture, page, or project you create in another Sugar Activity.<br />
<br />
The next four icons allow you to add text to your drawings and photos. They include:<br />
* 3. A normal dialogue Globe<br />
* 4. A cloud shape to tell what a character is silently Thinking<br />
* 5. A dotted globe which indicates a character is talking in a Whisper<br />
* 6. An exclamation bubble to add things like "Pow!" "Bang!" and "Wham!"<br />
* 7. Is a box where you can put the Title of your project. Just above it is a box icon that allows you to add more rectangular text boxes to your project.<br />
* 8. The Movement icon allows you to add little curves to indicate motion, highlight an object with a sunburst, add some parallel lines to show horizontal or vertical motion, or add a little light bulb to show that someone had a bright idea.<br />
* 9. The circular arrow allows you to click on an object, then on this icon and rotate it clockwise 1/4 turn (90 degrees) with each click.<br />
* 10. This icon allows you to delete something you have added.<br />
* 11. This icon opens and closes the Text pulldown where you can select the font and size of your text as well as select bold, italics, or other colors for your words. Click it to open, and when finished, click again to close. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 12. The familiar stop-sign icon is one way to stop the '''FotoToon''' Activity. You can also use the keyboard shortcut: ctrl-Q.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
==='''The Text Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonTextPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Text Pulldown''' menu allows you to control the appearance of the text you add to your project. Generally, they apply to everything in the box or bubble you are currently working on. You do not have to highlight the text to change it.<br />
<br />
* 11a- Selecting this icon will change the text you are working on to '''Bold'''. Clicking it again reverts back to regular text,<br />
<br />
* 11b- Selecting this icon will change the text your are working on to ''Italics''.<br />
<br />
Note: clicking on both of these icons, in any order, will give you '''''Bold Italic''''' text. Clicking both again, in any order, will get you back to regular text.<br />
<br />
* 11c- Clicking on this icon will open the Text Color Pallete. See below for information on how to use it.<br />
<br />
* 11d- This is a non-functioning icon that identifies this as the Text Pulldown toolbar.<br />
<br />
* 11e- This little pull down allows you to choose the size of the text you are working on.<br />
<br />
* 11f- This pull down offers a choice of 37 different fonts, listed in alphabetical order. Some, such as "Ding Bats" don't actually produce anything. Be sure to test the font on your text to see if it looks the way you would like it to.<br />
<br />
==='''The Color Pallete Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:ScreenshotofFTColorPallete.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Color Pallete Pulldown''' allows you to choose the color of your font. It will apply to everything in the box or bubble but can vary from one box or bubble to the next as you choose. There are 12 preset colors you can use, or you can create a custom color by selecting one of the preset colors and dragging the sliders to give more or less Red, Green, or Blue in the selected color. The little circle at the top of the Color Pallete shows the current color. When you are satisfied with the color you have selected/modified, click on the little circle to accept the chosen color and close the Color Pallete. It may take a few seconds for the new color to appear in the text box. But, don't worry, it will!<br />
<br />
='''Learning with FotoToon 12'''=<br />
=='''Plan Ahead'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''' can be used for a wide variety of learning activities, but the general process is always similar. For the sample project in this section, we will make a 4 panel page using 4 photos. This is a good way to get started since the page can be printed on a single page. <br />
<br />
Here are the general steps you need to complete before you build your first FotoToon project:<br />
<br />
* '''Step One: Decide what your project will be about.''' You can tell a story about anything. For example, it could be about your pets, your home, your family, your town, or, even some photos you took at a party. Any topic is fine for our first project. The sample project will be about "Healthy Snacks" and the photos will be pictures of food.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Two: Make a plan.''' Before you begin you should make a plan that will guide you through the construction of your project. Some people like to draw a little sketch of each pane showing what will be in the picture and a suggestion for what words will be added. If you like the panes can each be on a separate small piece of paper so you can re-arrange them easily This is called a '''Story Board'''. You may have another way you would like to make your plan, just be sure to include information about what pictures you will use, where you will get them, and what text you plan to add.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Three: Gather your images.''' For starters, we will use images that were taken either with a camera, or using the '''Record Activity''' on the XO. Any image that can be imported to the '''Journal''' on your XO and viewed in '''Image Viewer''' can be used. It is a good idea to rename each of the photos you will be using in the Journal. The name can include the number of the pane you plan to use it in so it is easy to find when you begin putting things together.<br />
<br />
==='''Place Your Images'''===<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Journal''' and check to be sure your images are there and can be viewed in the Image Viewer (click on the file to open it and check). Be sure the images have names that include the number of the pane you plan to place them (1,2,3, or 4).<br />
<br />
* Open '''FotoToon''' and find the '''"Add Photo"''' icon (number 2 in the '''FotoToon''' main toolbar shown above). A list of available images will appear. Click on the one you want to put in the first pane. When it has loaded, you can either leave it or remove it with the minus sign icon (number 10 in the main toolbar shown above). '''Warning:''' You can only remove the last image entered. That is why it is important to number the images according to the panes you wish to place them in. After the first image has been placed, continue adding images until all four for your first project have been placed. If you decide later that you want to change their order after they have been placed, you will need to delete them and replace them in the new order. ''It is best to get your final placement before adding any text.''<br />
<br />
If you would like to use the same images that will be used in this sample project, you will find them at these links. Go to each link, upload the photo to a usb drive, plug it into your XO, and open by clicking on the image names. They will open in the Image Viewer and be automatically saved so you can access them for your project. <br />
<br />
* Pane-1 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:1-Apple-Fries.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-2 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:2-Soda-Milk.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-3 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:3-Cookies-Yogurt.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-4 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:4-HealthySnacks.png<br />
<br />
==='''Add Dialogue and Titles'''===<br />
<br />
If you have planned well with your storyboard, you will have a pretty good idea of what you want to put in your dialogue balloons and text boxes. You may even have a title in mind for your project. You can actually start this process anywhere in your project. All of the balloons and boxes you will be using to do this will be identified in the first image above, the '''The Main PhotoToonToolbar'''.<br />
<br />
* Making and placing your '''Title''': If you know what you would like your title to be, you can start with that. It can always be changed later. When you start a project in FotoToon there will already be a tiny box for the title in a narrow band across the top of the project window. You can drag the upper left corner of the box to enlarge it (look for the cursor arrow to change to a thinner double headed arrow). You can also move it around in the band across the top. Click on the box and type all or part of your title. Then you can change the type style and size using the pull downs in the '''Text Pulldown''' menu (see 11e and 11f in the picture above). Experiment until you find a style and size you like. You can also change the color of the type. Don't worry if it isn't perfect, you can always come back later and change it. Notice that you can erase part of the text by backspacing over it.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Text Balloons''': You can place the text balloons wherever you like within a pane. Click on the pane, then on the balloon you want to use (see 3,4,and 5 above for explanations). The balloon will appear in the pane. You can drag it to the position where you want it, and also can drag the little tail to point to the source of the dialogue. Add the words to the balloon in the same way you added them to the Title box.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Exclamation Balloons''': You may wish to include special exclamations to your project. Choose the exclamation balloon (see 6 above). It is possible to eliminate the one longer point on the balloon by dragging it so that it matched the others. Again, type into the balloon just as you did in the title box and dialogue balloons.<br />
<br />
* Adding extra '''Text Boxes''': You can add a text box anywhere in any pane by clicking on the pane and then on the box icon in the diagram (see 7 above).<br />
<br />
As you work with the various text items, you may wish to eliminate one entirely. Just click on it, then on the icon with the minus (-) sign (see number 10 above), and it will disappear.<br />
<br />
===Exporting Your Project===<br />
<br />
==Extending FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Modifying FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
==Where to report problems==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Credits==<br />
<br />
<br />
== FotoToon 12==</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon&diff=270074Help Activity refresh/Chapter/FotoToon2012-04-25T16:48:37Z<p>Cbigenho: /* Add Dialogue and Titles */</p>
<hr />
<div>[[File:FotoToonIcon.png]]<br />
='''About FotoToon 12'''=<br />
The '''FotoToon''' Activity will allow you to create everything from a simple "comic" strip to a long elaborate illustrated document. You will be able to import many kinds of images into the panes of your project and add text bubbles to help tell the story. You can use photo images taken with the XO or imported from a camera, drawings made with Activities such as Paint, and images of all kinds downloaded from the web. This could include photos, charts and graphs, maps, and the like. <br><br />
This introduction to '''FotoToon''' will show you how to get started with a simple 4 panel project. If you want to learn to do more, you can watch the videos about using '''FotoToon''' that are available for viewing here (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE).<br />
<br />
='''Where to get FotoToon 12'''=<br />
'''FotoToon''' is not included on the basic 11.3.0 (.883) release of Sugar. To use it, you must download it from the Sugar Labs Activity library at: http://activities.sugarlabs.org/es-ES/sugar/addon/4253 You will find instructions for downloading this and other Activities here: (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE)<BR> You will notice that the description of the Activity and other information are in Spanish. That is because '''FotoToon''' was developed in Argentina. However, don't worry! '''FotoToon''' works in other languages as well!<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''', like many other Sugar Activities, is often updated to fix "bugs" that users report. There was one update, from version 11 to version 12 during the time this instruction chapter was written. By the time you use it, there may be others. The changes are usually minor and should not interfere with the usefulness of this information. Always try to be sure you are using the latest version.<br />
<br />
='''Using FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
=='''The Toolbars'''==<br />
<br />
=== '''The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToon12 Main Screen.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''FotoToon Toolbar''' has 13 icons including 2 with pulldown menus. The '''main FotoToon''' toolbar allows you to access many features of the Activity. Here is a description of what each of the icons will allow you to do:<br />
<br />
* 1. The '''FotoToon''' icon. When you hover your cursor over this icon you will open a small pulldown that allows you to export your work as an image. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 2. The '''Add Image''' icon. This icon allows you to add an image to your project. It can be a photo you take with the XO or digital camera, or import from the web. It can also be a picture, page, or project you create in another Sugar Activity.<br />
<br />
The next four icons allow you to add text to your drawings and photos. They include:<br />
* 3. A normal dialogue Globe<br />
* 4. A cloud shape to tell what a character is silently Thinking<br />
* 5. A dotted globe which indicates a character is talking in a Whisper<br />
* 6. An exclamation bubble to add things like "Pow!" "Bang!" and "Wham!"<br />
* 7. Is a box where you can put the Title of your project. Just above it is a box icon that allows you to add more rectangular text boxes to your project.<br />
* 8. The Movement icon allows you to add little curves to indicate motion, highlight an object with a sunburst, add some parallel lines to show horizontal or vertical motion, or add a little light bulb to show that someone had a bright idea.<br />
* 9. The circular arrow allows you to click on an object, then on this icon and rotate it clockwise 1/4 turn (90 degrees) with each click.<br />
* 10. This icon allows you to delete something you have added.<br />
* 11. This icon opens and closes the Text pulldown where you can select the font and size of your text as well as select bold, italics, or other colors for your words. Click it to open, and when finished, click again to close. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 12. The familiar stop-sign icon is one way to stop the '''FotoToon''' Activity. You can also use the keyboard shortcut: ctrl-Q.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
==='''The Text Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonTextPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
The Test Pulldown menu allows you to control the appearance of the text you add to your project. Generally, they apply to everything in the box or bubble you are currently working on. You do not have to highlight the text to change it.<br />
<br />
* 11a- Selecting this icon will change the text you are working on to '''Bold'''. Clicking it again reverts back to regular text,<br />
<br />
* 11b- Selecting this icon will change the text your are working on to ''Italics''.<br />
<br />
Note: clicking on both of these icons, in any order, will give you '''''Bold Italic''''' text. Clicking both again, in any order, will get you back to regular text.<br />
<br />
* 11c- Clicking on this icon will open the Text Color Pallete. See below for information on how to use it.<br />
<br />
* 11d- This is a non-functioning icon that identifies this as the Text Pulldown toolbar.<br />
<br />
* 11e- This little pull down allows you to choose the size of the text you are working on.<br />
<br />
* 11f- This pull down offers a choice of 37 different fonts, listed in alphabetical order. Some, such as "Ding Bats" don't actually produce anything. Be sure to test the font on your text to see if it looks the way you would like it to.<br />
<br />
==='''The Color Pallete Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:ScreenshotofFTColorPallete.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Color Pallete Pulldown''' allows you to choose the color of your font. It will apply to everything in the box or bubble but can vary from one box or bubble to the next as you choose. There are 12 preset colors you can use, or you can create a custom color by selecting one of the preset colors and dragging the sliders to give more or less Red, Green, or Blue in the selected color. The little circle at the top of the Color Pallete shows the current color. When you are satisfied with the color you have selected/modified, click on the little circle to accept the chosen color and close the Color Pallete. It may take a few seconds for the new color to appear in the text box. But, don't worry, it will!<br />
<br />
='''Learning with FotoToon 12'''=<br />
=='''Plan Ahead'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''' can be used for a wide variety of learning activities, but the general process is always similar. For the sample project in this section, we will make a 4 panel page using 4 photos. This is a good way to get started since the page can be printed on a single page. <br />
<br />
Here are the general steps you need to complete before you build your first FotoToon project:<br />
<br />
* '''Step One: Decide what your project will be about.''' You can tell a story about anything. For example, it could be about your pets, your home, your family, your town, or, even some photos you took at a party. Any topic is fine for our first project. The sample project will be about "Healthy Snacks" and the photos will be pictures of food.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Two: Make a plan.''' Before you begin you should make a plan that will guide you through the construction of your project. Some people like to draw a little sketch of each pane showing what will be in the picture and a suggestion for what words will be added. If you like the panes can each be on a separate small piece of paper so you can re-arrange them easily This is called a '''Story Board'''. You may have another way you would like to make your plan, just be sure to include information about what pictures you will use, where you will get them, and what text you plan to add.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Three: Gather your images.''' For starters, we will use images that were taken either with a camera, or using the '''Record Activity''' on the XO. Any image that can be imported to the '''Journal''' on your XO and viewed in '''Image Viewer''' can be used. It is a good idea to rename each of the photos you will be using in the Journal. The name can include the number of the pane you plan to use it in so it is easy to find when you begin putting things together.<br />
<br />
==='''Place Your Images'''===<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Journal''' and check to be sure your images are there and can be viewed in the Image Viewer (click on the file to open it and check). Be sure the images have names that include the number of the pane you plan to place them (1,2,3, or 4).<br />
<br />
* Open '''FotoToon''' and find the '''"Add Photo"''' icon (number 2 in the '''FotoToon''' main toolbar shown above). A list of available images will appear. Click on the one you want to put in the first pane. When it has loaded, you can either leave it or remove it with the minus sign icon (number 10 in the main toolbar shown above). '''Warning:''' You can only remove the last image entered. That is why it is important to number the images according to the panes you wish to place them in. After the first image has been placed, continue adding images until all four for your first project have been placed. If you decide later that you want to change their order after they have been placed, you will need to delete them and replace them in the new order. ''It is best to get your final placement before adding any text.''<br />
<br />
If you would like to use the same images that will be used in this sample project, you will find them at these links. Go to each link, upload the photo to a usb drive, plug it into your XO, and open by clicking on the image names. They will open in the Image Viewer and be automatically saved so you can access them for your project. <br />
<br />
* Pane-1 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:1-Apple-Fries.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-2 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:2-Soda-Milk.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-3 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:3-Cookies-Yogurt.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-4 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:4-HealthySnacks.png<br />
<br />
==='''Add Dialogue and Titles'''===<br />
<br />
If you have planned well with your storyboard, you will have a pretty good idea of what you want to put in your dialogue balloons and text boxes. You may even have a title in mind for your project. You can actually start this process anywhere in your project. All of the balloons and boxes you will be using to do this will be identified in the first image above, the '''The Main PhotoToonToolbar'''.<br />
<br />
* Making and placing your '''Title''': If you know what you would like your title to be, you can start with that. It can always be changed later. When you start a project in FotoToon there will already be a tiny box for the title in a narrow band across the top of the project window. You can drag the upper left corner of the box to enlarge it (look for the cursor arrow to change to a thinner double headed arrow). You can also move it around in the band across the top. Click on the box and type all or part of your title. Then you can change the type style and size using the pull downs in the '''Text Pulldown''' menu (see 11e and 11f in the picture above). Experiment until you find a style and size you like. You can also change the color of the type. Don't worry if it isn't perfect, you can always come back later and change it. Notice that you can erase part of the text by backspacing over it.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Text Balloons''': You can place the text balloons wherever you like within a pane. Click on the pane, then on the balloon you want to use (see 3,4,and 5 above for explanations). The balloon will appear in the pane. You can drag it to the position where you want it, and also can drag the little tail to point to the source of the dialogue. Add the words to the balloon in the same way you added them to the Title box.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Exclamation Balloons''': You may wish to include special exclamations to your project. Choose the exclamation balloon (see 6 above). It is possible to eliminate the one longer point on the balloon by dragging it so that it matched the others. Again, type into the balloon just as you did in the title box and dialogue balloons.<br />
<br />
* Adding extra '''Text Boxes''': You can add a text box anywhere in any pane by clicking on the pane and then on the box icon in the diagram (see 7 above).<br />
<br />
As you work with the various text items, you may wish to eliminate one entirely. Just click on it, then on the icon with the minus (-) sign (see number 10 above), and it will disappear.<br />
<br />
===Exporting Your Project===<br />
<br />
==Extending FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Modifying FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
==Where to report problems==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Credits==<br />
<br />
<br />
== FotoToon 12==</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon&diff=270040Help Activity refresh/Chapter/FotoToon2012-04-25T06:46:30Z<p>Cbigenho: /* Add Dialogue and Titles */</p>
<hr />
<div>[[File:FotoToonIcon.png]]<br />
='''About FotoToon 12'''=<br />
The '''FotoToon''' Activity will allow you to create everything from a simple "comic" strip to a long elaborate illustrated document. You will be able to import many kinds of images into the panes of your project and add text bubbles to help tell the story. You can use photo images taken with the XO or imported from a camera, drawings made with Activities such as Paint, and images of all kinds downloaded from the web. This could include photos, charts and graphs, maps, and the like. <br><br />
This introduction to '''FotoToon''' will show you how to get started with a simple 4 panel project. If you want to learn to do more, you can watch the videos about using '''FotoToon''' that are available for viewing here (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE).<br />
<br />
='''Where to get FotoToon 12'''=<br />
'''FotoToon''' is not included on the basic 11.3.0 (.883) release of Sugar. To use it, you must download it from the Sugar Labs Activity library at: http://activities.sugarlabs.org/es-ES/sugar/addon/4253 You will find instructions for downloading this and other Activities here: (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE)<BR> You will notice that the description of the Activity and other information are in Spanish. That is because '''FotoToon''' was developed in Argentina. However, don't worry! '''FotoToon''' works in other languages as well!<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''', like many other Sugar Activities, is often updated to fix "bugs" that users report. There was one update, from version 11 to version 12 during the time this instruction chapter was written. By the time you use it, there may be others. The changes are usually minor and should not interfere with the usefulness of this information. Always try to be sure you are using the latest version.<br />
<br />
='''Using FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
=='''The Toolbars'''==<br />
<br />
=== '''The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToon12 Main Screen.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''FotoToon Toolbar''' has 13 icons including 2 with pulldown menus. The '''main FotoToon''' toolbar allows you to access many features of the Activity. Here is a description of what each of the icons will allow you to do:<br />
<br />
* 1. The '''FotoToon''' icon. When you hover your cursor over this icon you will open a small pulldown that allows you to export your work as an image. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 2. The '''Add Image''' icon. This icon allows you to add an image to your project. It can be a photo you take with the XO or digital camera, or import from the web. It can also be a picture, page, or project you create in another Sugar Activity.<br />
<br />
The next four icons allow you to add text to your drawings and photos. They include:<br />
* 3. A normal dialogue Globe<br />
* 4. A cloud shape to tell what a character is silently Thinking<br />
* 5. A dotted globe which indicates a character is talking in a Whisper<br />
* 6. An exclamation bubble to add things like "Pow!" "Bang!" and "Wham!"<br />
* 7. Is a box where you can put the Title of your project. Just above it is a box icon that allows you to add more rectangular text boxes to your project.<br />
* 8. The Movement icon allows you to add little curves to indicate motion, highlight an object with a sunburst, add some parallel lines to show horizontal or vertical motion, or add a little light bulb to show that someone had a bright idea.<br />
* 9. The circular arrow allows you to click on an object, then on this icon and rotate it clockwise 1/4 turn (90 degrees) with each click.<br />
* 10. This icon allows you to delete something you have added.<br />
* 11. This icon opens and closes the Text pulldown where you can select the font and size of your text as well as select bold, italics, or other colors for your words. Click it to open, and when finished, click again to close. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 12. The familiar stop-sign icon is one way to stop the '''FotoToon''' Activity. You can also use the keyboard shortcut: ctrl-Q.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
==='''The Text Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonTextPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
The Test Pulldown menu allows you to control the appearance of the text you add to your project. Generally, they apply to everything in the box or bubble you are currently working on. You do not have to highlight the text to change it.<br />
<br />
* 11a- Selecting this icon will change the text you are working on to '''Bold'''. Clicking it again reverts back to regular text,<br />
<br />
* 11b- Selecting this icon will change the text your are working on to ''Italics''.<br />
<br />
Note: clicking on both of these icons, in any order, will give you '''''Bold Italic''''' text. Clicking both again, in any order, will get you back to regular text.<br />
<br />
* 11c- Clicking on this icon will open the Text Color Pallete. See below for information on how to use it.<br />
<br />
* 11d- This is a non-functioning icon that identifies this as the Text Pulldown toolbar.<br />
<br />
* 11e- This little pull down allows you to choose the size of the text you are working on.<br />
<br />
* 11f- This pull down offers a choice of 37 different fonts, listed in alphabetical order. Some, such as "Ding Bats" don't actually produce anything. Be sure to test the font on your text to see if it looks the way you would like it to.<br />
<br />
==='''The Color Pallete Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:ScreenshotofFTColorPallete.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Color Pallete Pulldown''' allows you to choose the color of your font. It will apply to everything in the box or bubble but can vary from one box or bubble to the next as you choose. There are 12 preset colors you can use, or you can create a custom color by selecting one of the preset colors and dragging the sliders to give more or less Red, Green, or Blue in the selected color. The little circle at the top of the Color Pallete shows the current color. When you are satisfied with the color you have selected/modified, click on the little circle to accept the chosen color and close the Color Pallete. It may take a few seconds for the new color to appear in the text box. But, don't worry, it will!<br />
<br />
='''Learning with FotoToon 12'''=<br />
=='''Plan Ahead'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''' can be used for a wide variety of learning activities, but the general process is always similar. For the sample project in this section, we will make a 4 panel page using 4 photos. This is a good way to get started since the page can be printed on a single page. <br />
<br />
Here are the general steps you need to complete before you build your first FotoToon project:<br />
<br />
* '''Step One: Decide what your project will be about.''' You can tell a story about anything. For example, it could be about your pets, your home, your family, your town, or, even some photos you took at a party. Any topic is fine for our first project. The sample project will be about "Healthy Snacks" and the photos will be pictures of food.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Two: Make a plan.''' Before you begin you should make a plan that will guide you through the construction of your project. Some people like to draw a little sketch of each pane showing what will be in the picture and a suggestion for what words will be added. If you like the panes can each be on a separate small piece of paper so you can re-arrange them easily This is called a '''Story Board'''. You may have another way you would like to make your plan, just be sure to include information about what pictures you will use, where you will get them, and what text you plan to add.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Three: Gather your images.''' For starters, we will use images that were taken either with a camera, or using the '''Record Activity''' on the XO. Any image that can be imported to the '''Journal''' on your XO and viewed in '''Image Viewer''' can be used. It is a good idea to rename each of the photos you will be using in the Journal. The name can include the number of the pane you plan to use it in so it is easy to find when you begin putting things together.<br />
<br />
==='''Place Your Images'''===<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Journal''' and check to be sure your images are there and can be viewed in the Image Viewer (click on the file to open it and check). Be sure the images have names that include the number of the pane you plan to place them (1,2,3, or 4).<br />
<br />
* Open '''FotoToon''' and find the '''"Add Photo"''' icon (number 2 in the '''FotoToon''' main toolbar shown above). A list of available images will appear. Click on the one you want to put in the first pane. When it has loaded, you can either leave it or remove it with the minus sign icon (number 10 in the main toolbar shown above). '''Warning:''' You can only remove the last image entered. That is why it is important to number the images according to the panes you wish to place them in. After the first image has been placed, continue adding images until all four for your first project have been placed. If you decide later that you want to change their order after they have been placed, you will need to delete them and replace them in the new order. ''It is best to get your final placement before adding any text.''<br />
<br />
If you would like to use the same images that will be used in this sample project, you will find them at these links. Go to each link, upload the photo to a usb drive, plug it into your XO, and open by clicking on the image names. They will open in the Image Viewer and be automatically saved so you can access them for your project. <br />
<br />
* Pane-1 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:1-Apple-Fries.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-2 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:2-Soda-Milk.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-3 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:3-Cookies-Yogurt.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-4 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:4-HealthySnacks.png<br />
<br />
==='''Add Dialogue and Titles'''===<br />
<br />
If you have planned well with your storyboard, you will have a pretty good idea of what you want to put in your dialogue balloons and text boxes. You may even have a title in mind for your project. You can actually start this process anywhere in your project. All of the balloons and boxes you will be using to do this will be identified in the first image above, the '''The Main PhotoToonToolbar'''.<br />
<br />
* Making and placing your '''Title''': If you know what you would like your title to be, you can start with that. It can always be changed later. When you start a project in FotoToon there will already be a tiny box for the title in a narrow band across the top of the project window. You can drag the upper left corner of the box to enlarge it (look for the cursor arrow to change to a thinner double headed arrow). You can also move it around in the band across the top. Click on the box and type all or part of your title. Then you can change the type style and size using the pull downs in the '''Text Pulldown''' menu (see 11e and 11f in the picture above). Experiment until you find a style and size you like. You can also change the color of the type. Don't worry if it isn't perfect, you can always come back later and change it. Notice that you can erase part of the text by backspacing over it.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Text Balloons''': You can place the text balloons wherever you like within a pane. Click on the pane, then on the balloon you want to use (see 3,4,and 5 above for explanations). The balloon will appear in the pane. You can drag it to the position where you want it, and also can drag the little tail to point to the source of the dialogue. Add the words to the balloon in the same way you added them to the Title box.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Exclamation Balloons''': You may wish to include special exclamations to your project. Choose the exclamation balloon (see 6 above). It is possible to eliminate the one longer point on the balloon by dragging it so that it matched the others. Again, type into the balloon just as you did in the title box and dialogue balloons.<br />
<br />
* Adding extra '''Text Boxes''': You can add a text box anywhere in any pane by clicking on the pane and then on the box icon in the diagram (see 7 above).<br />
<br />
As you work with the various text items, you may wish to eliminate one entirely. Just click on it, then on the icon with the minus (-) sign (see number 10 above) and it will disappear.<br />
<br />
===Exporting Your Project===<br />
<br />
==Extending FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Modifying FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
==Where to report problems==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Credits==<br />
<br />
<br />
== FotoToon 12==</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon&diff=270039Help Activity refresh/Chapter/FotoToon2012-04-25T06:45:27Z<p>Cbigenho: /* Add Dialogue and Titles */</p>
<hr />
<div>[[File:FotoToonIcon.png]]<br />
='''About FotoToon 12'''=<br />
The '''FotoToon''' Activity will allow you to create everything from a simple "comic" strip to a long elaborate illustrated document. You will be able to import many kinds of images into the panes of your project and add text bubbles to help tell the story. You can use photo images taken with the XO or imported from a camera, drawings made with Activities such as Paint, and images of all kinds downloaded from the web. This could include photos, charts and graphs, maps, and the like. <br><br />
This introduction to '''FotoToon''' will show you how to get started with a simple 4 panel project. If you want to learn to do more, you can watch the videos about using '''FotoToon''' that are available for viewing here (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE).<br />
<br />
='''Where to get FotoToon 12'''=<br />
'''FotoToon''' is not included on the basic 11.3.0 (.883) release of Sugar. To use it, you must download it from the Sugar Labs Activity library at: http://activities.sugarlabs.org/es-ES/sugar/addon/4253 You will find instructions for downloading this and other Activities here: (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE)<BR> You will notice that the description of the Activity and other information are in Spanish. That is because '''FotoToon''' was developed in Argentina. However, don't worry! '''FotoToon''' works in other languages as well!<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''', like many other Sugar Activities, is often updated to fix "bugs" that users report. There was one update, from version 11 to version 12 during the time this instruction chapter was written. By the time you use it, there may be others. The changes are usually minor and should not interfere with the usefulness of this information. Always try to be sure you are using the latest version.<br />
<br />
='''Using FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
=='''The Toolbars'''==<br />
<br />
=== '''The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToon12 Main Screen.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''FotoToon Toolbar''' has 13 icons including 2 with pulldown menus. The '''main FotoToon''' toolbar allows you to access many features of the Activity. Here is a description of what each of the icons will allow you to do:<br />
<br />
* 1. The '''FotoToon''' icon. When you hover your cursor over this icon you will open a small pulldown that allows you to export your work as an image. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 2. The '''Add Image''' icon. This icon allows you to add an image to your project. It can be a photo you take with the XO or digital camera, or import from the web. It can also be a picture, page, or project you create in another Sugar Activity.<br />
<br />
The next four icons allow you to add text to your drawings and photos. They include:<br />
* 3. A normal dialogue Globe<br />
* 4. A cloud shape to tell what a character is silently Thinking<br />
* 5. A dotted globe which indicates a character is talking in a Whisper<br />
* 6. An exclamation bubble to add things like "Pow!" "Bang!" and "Wham!"<br />
* 7. Is a box where you can put the Title of your project. Just above it is a box icon that allows you to add more rectangular text boxes to your project.<br />
* 8. The Movement icon allows you to add little curves to indicate motion, highlight an object with a sunburst, add some parallel lines to show horizontal or vertical motion, or add a little light bulb to show that someone had a bright idea.<br />
* 9. The circular arrow allows you to click on an object, then on this icon and rotate it clockwise 1/4 turn (90 degrees) with each click.<br />
* 10. This icon allows you to delete something you have added.<br />
* 11. This icon opens and closes the Text pulldown where you can select the font and size of your text as well as select bold, italics, or other colors for your words. Click it to open, and when finished, click again to close. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 12. The familiar stop-sign icon is one way to stop the '''FotoToon''' Activity. You can also use the keyboard shortcut: ctrl-Q.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
==='''The Text Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonTextPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
The Test Pulldown menu allows you to control the appearance of the text you add to your project. Generally, they apply to everything in the box or bubble you are currently working on. You do not have to highlight the text to change it.<br />
<br />
* 11a- Selecting this icon will change the text you are working on to '''Bold'''. Clicking it again reverts back to regular text,<br />
<br />
* 11b- Selecting this icon will change the text your are working on to ''Italics''.<br />
<br />
Note: clicking on both of these icons, in any order, will give you '''''Bold Italic''''' text. Clicking both again, in any order, will get you back to regular text.<br />
<br />
* 11c- Clicking on this icon will open the Text Color Pallete. See below for information on how to use it.<br />
<br />
* 11d- This is a non-functioning icon that identifies this as the Text Pulldown toolbar.<br />
<br />
* 11e- This little pull down allows you to choose the size of the text you are working on.<br />
<br />
* 11f- This pull down offers a choice of 37 different fonts, listed in alphabetical order. Some, such as "Ding Bats" don't actually produce anything. Be sure to test the font on your text to see if it looks the way you would like it to.<br />
<br />
==='''The Color Pallete Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:ScreenshotofFTColorPallete.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Color Pallete Pulldown''' allows you to choose the color of your font. It will apply to everything in the box or bubble but can vary from one box or bubble to the next as you choose. There are 12 preset colors you can use, or you can create a custom color by selecting one of the preset colors and dragging the sliders to give more or less Red, Green, or Blue in the selected color. The little circle at the top of the Color Pallete shows the current color. When you are satisfied with the color you have selected/modified, click on the little circle to accept the chosen color and close the Color Pallete. It may take a few seconds for the new color to appear in the text box. But, don't worry, it will!<br />
<br />
='''Learning with FotoToon 12'''=<br />
=='''Plan Ahead'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''' can be used for a wide variety of learning activities, but the general process is always similar. For the sample project in this section, we will make a 4 panel page using 4 photos. This is a good way to get started since the page can be printed on a single page. <br />
<br />
Here are the general steps you need to complete before you build your first FotoToon project:<br />
<br />
* '''Step One: Decide what your project will be about.''' You can tell a story about anything. For example, it could be about your pets, your home, your family, your town, or, even some photos you took at a party. Any topic is fine for our first project. The sample project will be about "Healthy Snacks" and the photos will be pictures of food.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Two: Make a plan.''' Before you begin you should make a plan that will guide you through the construction of your project. Some people like to draw a little sketch of each pane showing what will be in the picture and a suggestion for what words will be added. If you like the panes can each be on a separate small piece of paper so you can re-arrange them easily This is called a '''Story Board'''. You may have another way you would like to make your plan, just be sure to include information about what pictures you will use, where you will get them, and what text you plan to add.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Three: Gather your images.''' For starters, we will use images that were taken either with a camera, or using the '''Record Activity''' on the XO. Any image that can be imported to the '''Journal''' on your XO and viewed in '''Image Viewer''' can be used. It is a good idea to rename each of the photos you will be using in the Journal. The name can include the number of the pane you plan to use it in so it is easy to find when you begin putting things together.<br />
<br />
==='''Place Your Images'''===<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Journal''' and check to be sure your images are there and can be viewed in the Image Viewer (click on the file to open it and check). Be sure the images have names that include the number of the pane you plan to place them (1,2,3, or 4).<br />
<br />
* Open '''FotoToon''' and find the '''"Add Photo"''' icon (number 2 in the '''FotoToon''' main toolbar shown above). A list of available images will appear. Click on the one you want to put in the first pane. When it has loaded, you can either leave it or remove it with the minus sign icon (number 10 in the main toolbar shown above). '''Warning:''' You can only remove the last image entered. That is why it is important to number the images according to the panes you wish to place them in. After the first image has been placed, continue adding images until all four for your first project have been placed. If you decide later that you want to change their order after they have been placed, you will need to delete them and replace them in the new order. ''It is best to get your final placement before adding any text.''<br />
<br />
If you would like to use the same images that will be used in this sample project, you will find them at these links. Go to each link, upload the photo to a usb drive, plug it into your XO, and open by clicking on the image names. They will open in the Image Viewer and be automatically saved so you can access them for your project. <br />
<br />
* Pane-1 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:1-Apple-Fries.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-2 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:2-Soda-Milk.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-3 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:3-Cookies-Yogurt.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-4 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:4-HealthySnacks.png<br />
<br />
==='''Add Dialogue and Titles'''===<br />
<br />
If you have planned well with your storyboard, you will have a pretty good idea of what you want to put in your dialogue balloons and text boxes. You may even have a title in mind for your project. You can actually start this process anywhere in your project. All of the balloons and boxes you will be using to do this will be identified in the first image above, the '''The Main PhotoToonToolbar'''.<br />
<br />
* Making and placing your '''Title''': If you know what you would like your title to be, you can start with that. It can always be changed later. When you start a project in FotoToon there will already be a tiny box for the title in a narrow band across the top of the project window. You can drag the upper left corner of the box to enlarge it (look for the cursor arrow to change to a thinner double headed arrow). You can also move it around in the band across the top. Click on the box and type all or part of your title. Then you can change the type style and size using the pull downs in the '''Text Pulldown''' menu (see 11e and 11f in the picture above). Experiment until you find a style and size you like. You can also change the color of the type. Don't worry if it isn't perfect, you can always come back later and change it. Notice that you can erase part of the text by backspacing over it.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Text Balloons''': You can place the text balloons wherever you like within a pane. Click on the pane, then on the balloon you want to use (see 3,4,and 5 above for explanations). The balloon will appear in the pane. You can drag it to the position where you want it, and also can drag the little tail to point to the source of the dialogue. Add the words to the balloon in the same way you added them to the Title box.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Exclamation Balloons''': You may wish to include special exclamations to your project. Choose the exclamation balloon (see 6 above). It is possible to eliminate the one longer point on the balloon by dragging it so that it matched the others. Again, type into the balloon just as you did in the title box and dialogue balloons.<br />
<br />
* Adding extra '''Text Boxes''': You can add a text box anywhere in any pane by clicking on the pane and then on the box icon in the diagram (see 7 above).<br />
<br />
As you work with the various text items, you may wish to eliminate one entirely. Just click on it, then on the icon with the minus (-) sign (see number 10 above) and it will disappear.<br />
<br />
==Extending FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Modifying FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
==Where to report problems==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Credits==<br />
<br />
<br />
== FotoToon 12==</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon&diff=270038Help Activity refresh/Chapter/FotoToon2012-04-25T06:44:07Z<p>Cbigenho: /* Add Dialogue and Titles */</p>
<hr />
<div>[[File:FotoToonIcon.png]]<br />
='''About FotoToon 12'''=<br />
The '''FotoToon''' Activity will allow you to create everything from a simple "comic" strip to a long elaborate illustrated document. You will be able to import many kinds of images into the panes of your project and add text bubbles to help tell the story. You can use photo images taken with the XO or imported from a camera, drawings made with Activities such as Paint, and images of all kinds downloaded from the web. This could include photos, charts and graphs, maps, and the like. <br><br />
This introduction to '''FotoToon''' will show you how to get started with a simple 4 panel project. If you want to learn to do more, you can watch the videos about using '''FotoToon''' that are available for viewing here (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE).<br />
<br />
='''Where to get FotoToon 12'''=<br />
'''FotoToon''' is not included on the basic 11.3.0 (.883) release of Sugar. To use it, you must download it from the Sugar Labs Activity library at: http://activities.sugarlabs.org/es-ES/sugar/addon/4253 You will find instructions for downloading this and other Activities here: (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE)<BR> You will notice that the description of the Activity and other information are in Spanish. That is because '''FotoToon''' was developed in Argentina. However, don't worry! '''FotoToon''' works in other languages as well!<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''', like many other Sugar Activities, is often updated to fix "bugs" that users report. There was one update, from version 11 to version 12 during the time this instruction chapter was written. By the time you use it, there may be others. The changes are usually minor and should not interfere with the usefulness of this information. Always try to be sure you are using the latest version.<br />
<br />
='''Using FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
=='''The Toolbars'''==<br />
<br />
=== '''The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToon12 Main Screen.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''FotoToon Toolbar''' has 13 icons including 2 with pulldown menus. The '''main FotoToon''' toolbar allows you to access many features of the Activity. Here is a description of what each of the icons will allow you to do:<br />
<br />
* 1. The '''FotoToon''' icon. When you hover your cursor over this icon you will open a small pulldown that allows you to export your work as an image. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 2. The '''Add Image''' icon. This icon allows you to add an image to your project. It can be a photo you take with the XO or digital camera, or import from the web. It can also be a picture, page, or project you create in another Sugar Activity.<br />
<br />
The next four icons allow you to add text to your drawings and photos. They include:<br />
* 3. A normal dialogue Globe<br />
* 4. A cloud shape to tell what a character is silently Thinking<br />
* 5. A dotted globe which indicates a character is talking in a Whisper<br />
* 6. An exclamation bubble to add things like "Pow!" "Bang!" and "Wham!"<br />
* 7. Is a box where you can put the Title of your project. Just above it is a box icon that allows you to add more rectangular text boxes to your project.<br />
* 8. The Movement icon allows you to add little curves to indicate motion, highlight an object with a sunburst, add some parallel lines to show horizontal or vertical motion, or add a little light bulb to show that someone had a bright idea.<br />
* 9. The circular arrow allows you to click on an object, then on this icon and rotate it clockwise 1/4 turn (90 degrees) with each click.<br />
* 10. This icon allows you to delete something you have added.<br />
* 11. This icon opens and closes the Text pulldown where you can select the font and size of your text as well as select bold, italics, or other colors for your words. Click it to open, and when finished, click again to close. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 12. The familiar stop-sign icon is one way to stop the '''FotoToon''' Activity. You can also use the keyboard shortcut: ctrl-Q.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
==='''The Text Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonTextPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
The Test Pulldown menu allows you to control the appearance of the text you add to your project. Generally, they apply to everything in the box or bubble you are currently working on. You do not have to highlight the text to change it.<br />
<br />
* 11a- Selecting this icon will change the text you are working on to '''Bold'''. Clicking it again reverts back to regular text,<br />
<br />
* 11b- Selecting this icon will change the text your are working on to ''Italics''.<br />
<br />
Note: clicking on both of these icons, in any order, will give you '''''Bold Italic''''' text. Clicking both again, in any order, will get you back to regular text.<br />
<br />
* 11c- Clicking on this icon will open the Text Color Pallete. See below for information on how to use it.<br />
<br />
* 11d- This is a non-functioning icon that identifies this as the Text Pulldown toolbar.<br />
<br />
* 11e- This little pull down allows you to choose the size of the text you are working on.<br />
<br />
* 11f- This pull down offers a choice of 37 different fonts, listed in alphabetical order. Some, such as "Ding Bats" don't actually produce anything. Be sure to test the font on your text to see if it looks the way you would like it to.<br />
<br />
==='''The Color Pallete Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:ScreenshotofFTColorPallete.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Color Pallete Pulldown''' allows you to choose the color of your font. It will apply to everything in the box or bubble but can vary from one box or bubble to the next as you choose. There are 12 preset colors you can use, or you can create a custom color by selecting one of the preset colors and dragging the sliders to give more or less Red, Green, or Blue in the selected color. The little circle at the top of the Color Pallete shows the current color. When you are satisfied with the color you have selected/modified, click on the little circle to accept the chosen color and close the Color Pallete. It may take a few seconds for the new color to appear in the text box. But, don't worry, it will!<br />
<br />
='''Learning with FotoToon 12'''=<br />
=='''Plan Ahead'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''' can be used for a wide variety of learning activities, but the general process is always similar. For the sample project in this section, we will make a 4 panel page using 4 photos. This is a good way to get started since the page can be printed on a single page. <br />
<br />
Here are the general steps you need to complete before you build your first FotoToon project:<br />
<br />
* '''Step One: Decide what your project will be about.''' You can tell a story about anything. For example, it could be about your pets, your home, your family, your town, or, even some photos you took at a party. Any topic is fine for our first project. The sample project will be about "Healthy Snacks" and the photos will be pictures of food.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Two: Make a plan.''' Before you begin you should make a plan that will guide you through the construction of your project. Some people like to draw a little sketch of each pane showing what will be in the picture and a suggestion for what words will be added. If you like the panes can each be on a separate small piece of paper so you can re-arrange them easily This is called a '''Story Board'''. You may have another way you would like to make your plan, just be sure to include information about what pictures you will use, where you will get them, and what text you plan to add.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Three: Gather your images.''' For starters, we will use images that were taken either with a camera, or using the '''Record Activity''' on the XO. Any image that can be imported to the '''Journal''' on your XO and viewed in '''Image Viewer''' can be used. It is a good idea to rename each of the photos you will be using in the Journal. The name can include the number of the pane you plan to use it in so it is easy to find when you begin putting things together.<br />
<br />
==='''Place Your Images'''===<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Journal''' and check to be sure your images are there and can be viewed in the Image Viewer (click on the file to open it and check). Be sure the images have names that include the number of the pane you plan to place them (1,2,3, or 4).<br />
<br />
* Open '''FotoToon''' and find the '''"Add Photo"''' icon (number 2 in the '''FotoToon''' main toolbar shown above). A list of available images will appear. Click on the one you want to put in the first pane. When it has loaded, you can either leave it or remove it with the minus sign icon (number 10 in the main toolbar shown above). '''Warning:''' You can only remove the last image entered. That is why it is important to number the images according to the panes you wish to place them in. After the first image has been placed, continue adding images until all four for your first project have been placed. If you decide later that you want to change their order after they have been placed, you will need to delete them and replace them in the new order. ''It is best to get your final placement before adding any text.''<br />
<br />
If you would like to use the same images that will be used in this sample project, you will find them at these links. Go to each link, upload the photo to a usb drive, plug it into your XO, and open by clicking on the image names. They will open in the Image Viewer and be automatically saved so you can access them for your project. <br />
<br />
* Pane-1 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:1-Apple-Fries.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-2 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:2-Soda-Milk.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-3 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:3-Cookies-Yogurt.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-4 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:4-HealthySnacks.png<br />
<br />
==='''Add Dialogue and Titles'''===<br />
<br />
If you have planned well with your storyboard, you will have a pretty good idea of what you want to put in your dialogue balloons and text boxes. You may even have a title in mind for your project. You can actually start this process anywhere in your project. All of the balloons and boxes you will be using to do this will be identified in the first image above, the '''Main Toolbar'''.<br />
<br />
* Making and placing your '''Title''': If you know what you would like your title to be, you can start with that. It can always be changed later. When you start a project in FotoToon there will already be a tiny box for the title in a narrow band across the top of the project window. You can drag the upper left corner of the box to enlarge it (look for the cursor arrow to change to a thinner double headed arrow). You can also move it around in the band across the top. Click on the box and type all or part of your title. Then you can change the type style and size using the pull downs in the '''Text Pulldown''' menu (see 11e and 11f in the picture above). Experiment until you find a style and size you like. You can also change the color of the type. Don't worry if it isn't perfect, you can always come back later and change it. Notice that you can erase part of the text by backspacing over it.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Text Balloons''': You can place the text balloons wherever you like within a pane. Click on the pane, then on the balloon you want to use (see 3,4,and 5 above for explanations). The balloon will appear in the pane. You can drag it to the position where you want it, and also can drag the little tail to point to the source of the dialogue. Add the words to the balloon in the same way you added them to the Title box.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Exclamation Balloons''': You may wish to include special exclamations to your project. Choose the exclamation balloon (see 6 above). It is possible to eliminate the one longer point on the balloon by dragging it so that it matched the others. Again, type into the balloon just as you did in the title box and dialogue balloons.<br />
<br />
* Adding extra '''Text Boxes''': You can add a text box anywhere in any pane by clicking on the pane and then on the box icon in the diagram (see 7 above).<br />
<br />
As you work with the various text items, you may wish to eliminate one entirely. Just click on it, then on the icon with the minus (-) sign (see number 10 above) and it will disappear.<br />
<br />
==Extending FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Modifying FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
==Where to report problems==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Credits==<br />
<br />
<br />
== FotoToon 12==</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon&diff=270037Help Activity refresh/Chapter/FotoToon2012-04-25T06:41:43Z<p>Cbigenho: /* Add Dialogue and Titles */</p>
<hr />
<div>[[File:FotoToonIcon.png]]<br />
='''About FotoToon 12'''=<br />
The '''FotoToon''' Activity will allow you to create everything from a simple "comic" strip to a long elaborate illustrated document. You will be able to import many kinds of images into the panes of your project and add text bubbles to help tell the story. You can use photo images taken with the XO or imported from a camera, drawings made with Activities such as Paint, and images of all kinds downloaded from the web. This could include photos, charts and graphs, maps, and the like. <br><br />
This introduction to '''FotoToon''' will show you how to get started with a simple 4 panel project. If you want to learn to do more, you can watch the videos about using '''FotoToon''' that are available for viewing here (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE).<br />
<br />
='''Where to get FotoToon 12'''=<br />
'''FotoToon''' is not included on the basic 11.3.0 (.883) release of Sugar. To use it, you must download it from the Sugar Labs Activity library at: http://activities.sugarlabs.org/es-ES/sugar/addon/4253 You will find instructions for downloading this and other Activities here: (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE)<BR> You will notice that the description of the Activity and other information are in Spanish. That is because '''FotoToon''' was developed in Argentina. However, don't worry! '''FotoToon''' works in other languages as well!<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''', like many other Sugar Activities, is often updated to fix "bugs" that users report. There was one update, from version 11 to version 12 during the time this instruction chapter was written. By the time you use it, there may be others. The changes are usually minor and should not interfere with the usefulness of this information. Always try to be sure you are using the latest version.<br />
<br />
='''Using FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
=='''The Toolbars'''==<br />
<br />
=== '''The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToon12 Main Screen.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''FotoToon Toolbar''' has 13 icons including 2 with pulldown menus. The '''main FotoToon''' toolbar allows you to access many features of the Activity. Here is a description of what each of the icons will allow you to do:<br />
<br />
* 1. The '''FotoToon''' icon. When you hover your cursor over this icon you will open a small pulldown that allows you to export your work as an image. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 2. The '''Add Image''' icon. This icon allows you to add an image to your project. It can be a photo you take with the XO or digital camera, or import from the web. It can also be a picture, page, or project you create in another Sugar Activity.<br />
<br />
The next four icons allow you to add text to your drawings and photos. They include:<br />
* 3. A normal dialogue Globe<br />
* 4. A cloud shape to tell what a character is silently Thinking<br />
* 5. A dotted globe which indicates a character is talking in a Whisper<br />
* 6. An exclamation bubble to add things like "Pow!" "Bang!" and "Wham!"<br />
* 7. Is a box where you can put the Title of your project. Just above it is a box icon that allows you to add more rectangular text boxes to your project.<br />
* 8. The Movement icon allows you to add little curves to indicate motion, highlight an object with a sunburst, add some parallel lines to show horizontal or vertical motion, or add a little light bulb to show that someone had a bright idea.<br />
* 9. The circular arrow allows you to click on an object, then on this icon and rotate it clockwise 1/4 turn (90 degrees) with each click.<br />
* 10. This icon allows you to delete something you have added.<br />
* 11. This icon opens and closes the Text pulldown where you can select the font and size of your text as well as select bold, italics, or other colors for your words. Click it to open, and when finished, click again to close. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 12. The familiar stop-sign icon is one way to stop the '''FotoToon''' Activity. You can also use the keyboard shortcut: ctrl-Q.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
==='''The Text Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonTextPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
The Test Pulldown menu allows you to control the appearance of the text you add to your project. Generally, they apply to everything in the box or bubble you are currently working on. You do not have to highlight the text to change it.<br />
<br />
* 11a- Selecting this icon will change the text you are working on to '''Bold'''. Clicking it again reverts back to regular text,<br />
<br />
* 11b- Selecting this icon will change the text your are working on to ''Italics''.<br />
<br />
Note: clicking on both of these icons, in any order, will give you '''''Bold Italic''''' text. Clicking both again, in any order, will get you back to regular text.<br />
<br />
* 11c- Clicking on this icon will open the Text Color Pallete. See below for information on how to use it.<br />
<br />
* 11d- This is a non-functioning icon that identifies this as the Text Pulldown toolbar.<br />
<br />
* 11e- This little pull down allows you to choose the size of the text you are working on.<br />
<br />
* 11f- This pull down offers a choice of 37 different fonts, listed in alphabetical order. Some, such as "Ding Bats" don't actually produce anything. Be sure to test the font on your text to see if it looks the way you would like it to.<br />
<br />
==='''The Color Pallete Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:ScreenshotofFTColorPallete.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Color Pallete Pulldown''' allows you to choose the color of your font. It will apply to everything in the box or bubble but can vary from one box or bubble to the next as you choose. There are 12 preset colors you can use, or you can create a custom color by selecting one of the preset colors and dragging the sliders to give more or less Red, Green, or Blue in the selected color. The little circle at the top of the Color Pallete shows the current color. When you are satisfied with the color you have selected/modified, click on the little circle to accept the chosen color and close the Color Pallete. It may take a few seconds for the new color to appear in the text box. But, don't worry, it will!<br />
<br />
='''Learning with FotoToon 12'''=<br />
=='''Plan Ahead'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''' can be used for a wide variety of learning activities, but the general process is always similar. For the sample project in this section, we will make a 4 panel page using 4 photos. This is a good way to get started since the page can be printed on a single page. <br />
<br />
Here are the general steps you need to complete before you build your first FotoToon project:<br />
<br />
* '''Step One: Decide what your project will be about.''' You can tell a story about anything. For example, it could be about your pets, your home, your family, your town, or, even some photos you took at a party. Any topic is fine for our first project. The sample project will be about "Healthy Snacks" and the photos will be pictures of food.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Two: Make a plan.''' Before you begin you should make a plan that will guide you through the construction of your project. Some people like to draw a little sketch of each pane showing what will be in the picture and a suggestion for what words will be added. If you like the panes can each be on a separate small piece of paper so you can re-arrange them easily This is called a '''Story Board'''. You may have another way you would like to make your plan, just be sure to include information about what pictures you will use, where you will get them, and what text you plan to add.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Three: Gather your images.''' For starters, we will use images that were taken either with a camera, or using the '''Record Activity''' on the XO. Any image that can be imported to the '''Journal''' on your XO and viewed in '''Image Viewer''' can be used. It is a good idea to rename each of the photos you will be using in the Journal. The name can include the number of the pane you plan to use it in so it is easy to find when you begin putting things together.<br />
<br />
==='''Place Your Images'''===<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Journal''' and check to be sure your images are there and can be viewed in the Image Viewer (click on the file to open it and check). Be sure the images have names that include the number of the pane you plan to place them (1,2,3, or 4).<br />
<br />
* Open '''FotoToon''' and find the '''"Add Photo"''' icon (number 2 in the '''FotoToon''' main toolbar shown above). A list of available images will appear. Click on the one you want to put in the first pane. When it has loaded, you can either leave it or remove it with the minus sign icon (number 10 in the main toolbar shown above). '''Warning:''' You can only remove the last image entered. That is why it is important to number the images according to the panes you wish to place them in. After the first image has been placed, continue adding images until all four for your first project have been placed. If you decide later that you want to change their order after they have been placed, you will need to delete them and replace them in the new order. ''It is best to get your final placement before adding any text.''<br />
<br />
If you would like to use the same images that will be used in this sample project, you will find them at these links. Go to each link, upload the photo to a usb drive, plug it into your XO, and open by clicking on the image names. They will open in the Image Viewer and be automatically saved so you can access them for your project. <br />
<br />
* Pane-1 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:1-Apple-Fries.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-2 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:2-Soda-Milk.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-3 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:3-Cookies-Yogurt.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-4 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:4-HealthySnacks.png<br />
<br />
==='''Add Dialogue and Titles'''===<br />
<br />
If you have planned well with your storyboard, you will have a pretty good idea of what you want to put in your dialogue balloons and text boxes. You may even have a title in mind for your project. You can actually start this process anywhere in your project.<br />
<br />
* Making and placing your '''Title''': If you know what you would like your title to be, you can start with that. It can always be changed later. When you start a project in FotoToon there will already be a tiny box for the title in a narrow band across the top of the project window. You can drag the upper left corner of the box to enlarge it (look for the cursor arrow to change to a thinner double headed arrow). You can also move it around in the band across the top. Click on the box and type all or part of your title. Then you can change the type style and size using the pull downs in the '''Text Pulldown''' menu (see 11e and 11f in the picture above). Experiment until you find a style and size you like. You can also change the color of the type. Don't worry if it isn't perfect, you can always come back later and change it. Notice that you can erase part of the text by backspacing over it.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Text Balloons''': You can place the text balloons wherever you like within a pane. Click on the pane, then on the balloon you want to use (see 3,4,and 5 above for explanations). The balloon will appear in the pane. You can drag it to the position where you want it, and also can drag the little tail to point to the source of the dialogue. Add the words to the balloon in the same way you added them to the Title box.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Exclamation Balloons''': You may wish to include special exclamations to your project. Choose the exclamation balloon (see 6 above). It is possible to eliminate the one longer point on the balloon by dragging it so that it matched the others. Again, type into the balloon just as you did in the title box and dialogue balloons.<br />
<br />
* Adding extra '''Text Boxes''': You can add a text box anywhere in any pane by clicking on the pane and then on the box icon in the diagram (see 7 above).<br />
<br />
As you work with the various text items, you may wish to eliminate one entirely. Just click on it, then on the icon with the minus (-) sign (see number xx above) and it will disappear.<br />
<br />
==Extending FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Modifying FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
==Where to report problems==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Credits==<br />
<br />
<br />
== FotoToon 12==</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon&diff=270036Help Activity refresh/Chapter/FotoToon2012-04-25T06:36:24Z<p>Cbigenho: /* Add Dialogue and Titles */</p>
<hr />
<div>[[File:FotoToonIcon.png]]<br />
='''About FotoToon 12'''=<br />
The '''FotoToon''' Activity will allow you to create everything from a simple "comic" strip to a long elaborate illustrated document. You will be able to import many kinds of images into the panes of your project and add text bubbles to help tell the story. You can use photo images taken with the XO or imported from a camera, drawings made with Activities such as Paint, and images of all kinds downloaded from the web. This could include photos, charts and graphs, maps, and the like. <br><br />
This introduction to '''FotoToon''' will show you how to get started with a simple 4 panel project. If you want to learn to do more, you can watch the videos about using '''FotoToon''' that are available for viewing here (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE).<br />
<br />
='''Where to get FotoToon 12'''=<br />
'''FotoToon''' is not included on the basic 11.3.0 (.883) release of Sugar. To use it, you must download it from the Sugar Labs Activity library at: http://activities.sugarlabs.org/es-ES/sugar/addon/4253 You will find instructions for downloading this and other Activities here: (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE)<BR> You will notice that the description of the Activity and other information are in Spanish. That is because '''FotoToon''' was developed in Argentina. However, don't worry! '''FotoToon''' works in other languages as well!<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''', like many other Sugar Activities, is often updated to fix "bugs" that users report. There was one update, from version 11 to version 12 during the time this instruction chapter was written. By the time you use it, there may be others. The changes are usually minor and should not interfere with the usefulness of this information. Always try to be sure you are using the latest version.<br />
<br />
='''Using FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
=='''The Toolbars'''==<br />
<br />
=== '''The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToon12 Main Screen.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''FotoToon Toolbar''' has 13 icons including 2 with pulldown menus. The '''main FotoToon''' toolbar allows you to access many features of the Activity. Here is a description of what each of the icons will allow you to do:<br />
<br />
* 1. The '''FotoToon''' icon. When you hover your cursor over this icon you will open a small pulldown that allows you to export your work as an image. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 2. The '''Add Image''' icon. This icon allows you to add an image to your project. It can be a photo you take with the XO or digital camera, or import from the web. It can also be a picture, page, or project you create in another Sugar Activity.<br />
<br />
The next four icons allow you to add text to your drawings and photos. They include:<br />
* 3. A normal dialogue Globe<br />
* 4. A cloud shape to tell what a character is silently Thinking<br />
* 5. A dotted globe which indicates a character is talking in a Whisper<br />
* 6. An exclamation bubble to add things like "Pow!" "Bang!" and "Wham!"<br />
* 7. Is a box where you can put the Title of your project. Just above it is a box icon that allows you to add more rectangular text boxes to your project.<br />
* 8. The Movement icon allows you to add little curves to indicate motion, highlight an object with a sunburst, add some parallel lines to show horizontal or vertical motion, or add a little light bulb to show that someone had a bright idea.<br />
* 9. The circular arrow allows you to click on an object, then on this icon and rotate it clockwise 1/4 turn (90 degrees) with each click.<br />
* 10. This icon allows you to delete something you have added.<br />
* 11. This icon opens and closes the Text pulldown where you can select the font and size of your text as well as select bold, italics, or other colors for your words. Click it to open, and when finished, click again to close. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 12. The familiar stop-sign icon is one way to stop the '''FotoToon''' Activity. You can also use the keyboard shortcut: ctrl-Q.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
==='''The Text Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonTextPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
The Test Pulldown menu allows you to control the appearance of the text you add to your project. Generally, they apply to everything in the box or bubble you are currently working on. You do not have to highlight the text to change it.<br />
<br />
* 11a- Selecting this icon will change the text you are working on to '''Bold'''. Clicking it again reverts back to regular text,<br />
<br />
* 11b- Selecting this icon will change the text your are working on to ''Italics''.<br />
<br />
Note: clicking on both of these icons, in any order, will give you '''''Bold Italic''''' text. Clicking both again, in any order, will get you back to regular text.<br />
<br />
* 11c- Clicking on this icon will open the Text Color Pallete. See below for information on how to use it.<br />
<br />
* 11d- This is a non-functioning icon that identifies this as the Text Pulldown toolbar.<br />
<br />
* 11e- This little pull down allows you to choose the size of the text you are working on.<br />
<br />
* 11f- This pull down offers a choice of 37 different fonts, listed in alphabetical order. Some, such as "Ding Bats" don't actually produce anything. Be sure to test the font on your text to see if it looks the way you would like it to.<br />
<br />
==='''The Color Pallete Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:ScreenshotofFTColorPallete.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Color Pallete Pulldown''' allows you to choose the color of your font. It will apply to everything in the box or bubble but can vary from one box or bubble to the next as you choose. There are 12 preset colors you can use, or you can create a custom color by selecting one of the preset colors and dragging the sliders to give more or less Red, Green, or Blue in the selected color. The little circle at the top of the Color Pallete shows the current color. When you are satisfied with the color you have selected/modified, click on the little circle to accept the chosen color and close the Color Pallete. It may take a few seconds for the new color to appear in the text box. But, don't worry, it will!<br />
<br />
='''Learning with FotoToon 12'''=<br />
=='''Plan Ahead'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''' can be used for a wide variety of learning activities, but the general process is always similar. For the sample project in this section, we will make a 4 panel page using 4 photos. This is a good way to get started since the page can be printed on a single page. <br />
<br />
Here are the general steps you need to complete before you build your first FotoToon project:<br />
<br />
* '''Step One: Decide what your project will be about.''' You can tell a story about anything. For example, it could be about your pets, your home, your family, your town, or, even some photos you took at a party. Any topic is fine for our first project. The sample project will be about "Healthy Snacks" and the photos will be pictures of food.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Two: Make a plan.''' Before you begin you should make a plan that will guide you through the construction of your project. Some people like to draw a little sketch of each pane showing what will be in the picture and a suggestion for what words will be added. If you like the panes can each be on a separate small piece of paper so you can re-arrange them easily This is called a '''Story Board'''. You may have another way you would like to make your plan, just be sure to include information about what pictures you will use, where you will get them, and what text you plan to add.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Three: Gather your images.''' For starters, we will use images that were taken either with a camera, or using the '''Record Activity''' on the XO. Any image that can be imported to the '''Journal''' on your XO and viewed in '''Image Viewer''' can be used. It is a good idea to rename each of the photos you will be using in the Journal. The name can include the number of the pane you plan to use it in so it is easy to find when you begin putting things together.<br />
<br />
==='''Place Your Images'''===<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Journal''' and check to be sure your images are there and can be viewed in the Image Viewer (click on the file to open it and check). Be sure the images have names that include the number of the pane you plan to place them (1,2,3, or 4).<br />
<br />
* Open '''FotoToon''' and find the '''"Add Photo"''' icon (number 2 in the '''FotoToon''' main toolbar shown above). A list of available images will appear. Click on the one you want to put in the first pane. When it has loaded, you can either leave it or remove it with the minus sign icon (number 10 in the main toolbar shown above). '''Warning:''' You can only remove the last image entered. That is why it is important to number the images according to the panes you wish to place them in. After the first image has been placed, continue adding images until all four for your first project have been placed. If you decide later that you want to change their order after they have been placed, you will need to delete them and replace them in the new order. ''It is best to get your final placement before adding any text.''<br />
<br />
If you would like to use the same images that will be used in this sample project, you will find them at these links. Go to each link, upload the photo to a usb drive, plug it into your XO, and open by clicking on the image names. They will open in the Image Viewer and be automatically saved so you can access them for your project. <br />
<br />
* Pane-1 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:1-Apple-Fries.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-2 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:2-Soda-Milk.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-3 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:3-Cookies-Yogurt.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-4 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:4-HealthySnacks.png<br />
<br />
==='''Add Dialogue and Titles'''===<br />
<br />
If you have planned well with your storyboard, you will have a pretty good idea of what you want to put in your dialogue balloons and text boxes. You may even have a title in mind for your project. You can actually start this process anywhere in your project.<br />
<br />
* Making and placing your '''Title''': If you know what you would like your title to be, you can start with that. It can always be changed later. When you start a project in FotoToon there will already be a tiny box for the title in a narrow band across the top of the project window. You can drag the upper left corner of the box to enlarge it (look for the cursor arrow to change to a thinner double headed arrow). You can also move it around in the band across the top. Click on the box and type all or part of your title. Then you can change the type style and size using the pull downs in the '''Text Pulldown''' menu (see 11e and 11f in the picture above). Experiment until you find a style and size you like. You can also change the color of the type. Don't worry if it isn't perfect, you can always come back later and change it. Notice that you can erase part of the text by backspacing over it.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Text balloons''': You can place the text balloons wherever you like within a pane. Click on the pane, then on the balloon you want to use (see 3,4,and 5 above for explanations). The balloon will appear in the pane. You can drag it to the position where you want it, and also can drag the little tail to point to the source of the dialogue. Add the words to the balloon in the same way you added them to the Title box.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Exclamation Balloons''': You may wish to include special exclamations to your project. Choose the exclamation balloon (see 6 above). It is possible to eliminate the one longer point on the balloon by dragging it so that it matched the others. Again, type into the balloon just as you did in the title box and dialogue balloons.<br />
<br />
==Extending FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Modifying FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
==Where to report problems==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Credits==<br />
<br />
<br />
== FotoToon 12==</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon&diff=270035Help Activity refresh/Chapter/FotoToon2012-04-25T06:35:01Z<p>Cbigenho: /* Add Dialogue and Titles */</p>
<hr />
<div>[[File:FotoToonIcon.png]]<br />
='''About FotoToon 12'''=<br />
The '''FotoToon''' Activity will allow you to create everything from a simple "comic" strip to a long elaborate illustrated document. You will be able to import many kinds of images into the panes of your project and add text bubbles to help tell the story. You can use photo images taken with the XO or imported from a camera, drawings made with Activities such as Paint, and images of all kinds downloaded from the web. This could include photos, charts and graphs, maps, and the like. <br><br />
This introduction to '''FotoToon''' will show you how to get started with a simple 4 panel project. If you want to learn to do more, you can watch the videos about using '''FotoToon''' that are available for viewing here (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE).<br />
<br />
='''Where to get FotoToon 12'''=<br />
'''FotoToon''' is not included on the basic 11.3.0 (.883) release of Sugar. To use it, you must download it from the Sugar Labs Activity library at: http://activities.sugarlabs.org/es-ES/sugar/addon/4253 You will find instructions for downloading this and other Activities here: (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE)<BR> You will notice that the description of the Activity and other information are in Spanish. That is because '''FotoToon''' was developed in Argentina. However, don't worry! '''FotoToon''' works in other languages as well!<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''', like many other Sugar Activities, is often updated to fix "bugs" that users report. There was one update, from version 11 to version 12 during the time this instruction chapter was written. By the time you use it, there may be others. The changes are usually minor and should not interfere with the usefulness of this information. Always try to be sure you are using the latest version.<br />
<br />
='''Using FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
=='''The Toolbars'''==<br />
<br />
=== '''The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToon12 Main Screen.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''FotoToon Toolbar''' has 13 icons including 2 with pulldown menus. The '''main FotoToon''' toolbar allows you to access many features of the Activity. Here is a description of what each of the icons will allow you to do:<br />
<br />
* 1. The '''FotoToon''' icon. When you hover your cursor over this icon you will open a small pulldown that allows you to export your work as an image. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 2. The '''Add Image''' icon. This icon allows you to add an image to your project. It can be a photo you take with the XO or digital camera, or import from the web. It can also be a picture, page, or project you create in another Sugar Activity.<br />
<br />
The next four icons allow you to add text to your drawings and photos. They include:<br />
* 3. A normal dialogue Globe<br />
* 4. A cloud shape to tell what a character is silently Thinking<br />
* 5. A dotted globe which indicates a character is talking in a Whisper<br />
* 6. An exclamation bubble to add things like "Pow!" "Bang!" and "Wham!"<br />
* 7. Is a box where you can put the Title of your project. Just above it is a box icon that allows you to add more rectangular text boxes to your project.<br />
* 8. The Movement icon allows you to add little curves to indicate motion, highlight an object with a sunburst, add some parallel lines to show horizontal or vertical motion, or add a little light bulb to show that someone had a bright idea.<br />
* 9. The circular arrow allows you to click on an object, then on this icon and rotate it clockwise 1/4 turn (90 degrees) with each click.<br />
* 10. This icon allows you to delete something you have added.<br />
* 11. This icon opens and closes the Text pulldown where you can select the font and size of your text as well as select bold, italics, or other colors for your words. Click it to open, and when finished, click again to close. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 12. The familiar stop-sign icon is one way to stop the '''FotoToon''' Activity. You can also use the keyboard shortcut: ctrl-Q.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
==='''The Text Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonTextPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
The Test Pulldown menu allows you to control the appearance of the text you add to your project. Generally, they apply to everything in the box or bubble you are currently working on. You do not have to highlight the text to change it.<br />
<br />
* 11a- Selecting this icon will change the text you are working on to '''Bold'''. Clicking it again reverts back to regular text,<br />
<br />
* 11b- Selecting this icon will change the text your are working on to ''Italics''.<br />
<br />
Note: clicking on both of these icons, in any order, will give you '''''Bold Italic''''' text. Clicking both again, in any order, will get you back to regular text.<br />
<br />
* 11c- Clicking on this icon will open the Text Color Pallete. See below for information on how to use it.<br />
<br />
* 11d- This is a non-functioning icon that identifies this as the Text Pulldown toolbar.<br />
<br />
* 11e- This little pull down allows you to choose the size of the text you are working on.<br />
<br />
* 11f- This pull down offers a choice of 37 different fonts, listed in alphabetical order. Some, such as "Ding Bats" don't actually produce anything. Be sure to test the font on your text to see if it looks the way you would like it to.<br />
<br />
==='''The Color Pallete Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:ScreenshotofFTColorPallete.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Color Pallete Pulldown''' allows you to choose the color of your font. It will apply to everything in the box or bubble but can vary from one box or bubble to the next as you choose. There are 12 preset colors you can use, or you can create a custom color by selecting one of the preset colors and dragging the sliders to give more or less Red, Green, or Blue in the selected color. The little circle at the top of the Color Pallete shows the current color. When you are satisfied with the color you have selected/modified, click on the little circle to accept the chosen color and close the Color Pallete. It may take a few seconds for the new color to appear in the text box. But, don't worry, it will!<br />
<br />
='''Learning with FotoToon 12'''=<br />
=='''Plan Ahead'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''' can be used for a wide variety of learning activities, but the general process is always similar. For the sample project in this section, we will make a 4 panel page using 4 photos. This is a good way to get started since the page can be printed on a single page. <br />
<br />
Here are the general steps you need to complete before you build your first FotoToon project:<br />
<br />
* '''Step One: Decide what your project will be about.''' You can tell a story about anything. For example, it could be about your pets, your home, your family, your town, or, even some photos you took at a party. Any topic is fine for our first project. The sample project will be about "Healthy Snacks" and the photos will be pictures of food.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Two: Make a plan.''' Before you begin you should make a plan that will guide you through the construction of your project. Some people like to draw a little sketch of each pane showing what will be in the picture and a suggestion for what words will be added. If you like the panes can each be on a separate small piece of paper so you can re-arrange them easily This is called a '''Story Board'''. You may have another way you would like to make your plan, just be sure to include information about what pictures you will use, where you will get them, and what text you plan to add.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Three: Gather your images.''' For starters, we will use images that were taken either with a camera, or using the '''Record Activity''' on the XO. Any image that can be imported to the '''Journal''' on your XO and viewed in '''Image Viewer''' can be used. It is a good idea to rename each of the photos you will be using in the Journal. The name can include the number of the pane you plan to use it in so it is easy to find when you begin putting things together.<br />
<br />
==='''Place Your Images'''===<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Journal''' and check to be sure your images are there and can be viewed in the Image Viewer (click on the file to open it and check). Be sure the images have names that include the number of the pane you plan to place them (1,2,3, or 4).<br />
<br />
* Open '''FotoToon''' and find the '''"Add Photo"''' icon (number 2 in the '''FotoToon''' main toolbar shown above). A list of available images will appear. Click on the one you want to put in the first pane. When it has loaded, you can either leave it or remove it with the minus sign icon (number 10 in the main toolbar shown above). '''Warning:''' You can only remove the last image entered. That is why it is important to number the images according to the panes you wish to place them in. After the first image has been placed, continue adding images until all four for your first project have been placed. If you decide later that you want to change their order after they have been placed, you will need to delete them and replace them in the new order. ''It is best to get your final placement before adding any text.''<br />
<br />
If you would like to use the same images that will be used in this sample project, you will find them at these links. Go to each link, upload the photo to a usb drive, plug it into your XO, and open by clicking on the image names. They will open in the Image Viewer and be automatically saved so you can access them for your project. <br />
<br />
* Pane-1 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:1-Apple-Fries.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-2 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:2-Soda-Milk.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-3 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:3-Cookies-Yogurt.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-4 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:4-HealthySnacks.png<br />
<br />
==='''Add Dialogue and Titles'''===<br />
<br />
If you have planned well with your storyboard, you will have a pretty good idea of what you want to put in your dialogue balloons and text boxes. You may even have a title in mind for your project. You can actually start this process anywhere in your project.<br />
<br />
* Making and placing your '''Title''': If you know what you would like your title to be, you can start with that. It can always be changed later. When you start a project in FotoToon there will already be a tiny box for the title in a narrow band across the top of the project window. You can drag the upper left corner of the box to enlarge it (look for the cursor arrow to change to a thinner double headed arrow). You can also move it around in the band across the top. Click on the box and type all or part of your title. Then you can change the type style and size using the pull downs in the '''Text Pulldown''' menu (see 11e and 11f in the picture above). Experiment until you find a style and size you like. You can also change the color of the type. Don't worry if it isn't perfect, you can always come back later and change it. Notice that you can erase part of the text by backspacing over it.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Text balloons''': You can place the text balloons wherever you like within a pane. Click on the pane, then on the balloon you want to use (see xx above for explanation). The balloon will appear in the pane. You can drag it to the position where you want it, and also can drag the little tail to point to the source of the dialogue. Add the words to the balloon in the same way you added them to the Title box.<br />
<br />
* Adding '''Exclamation Balloons''': You may wish to include special exclamations to your project. Choose the exclamation balloon (see 11x above). It is possible to eliminate the one longer point on the balloon by dragging it so that it matched the others. Again, type into the balloon just as you did in the title box and dialogue balloons.<br />
<br />
==Extending FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Modifying FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
==Where to report problems==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Credits==<br />
<br />
<br />
== FotoToon 12==</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon&diff=270034Help Activity refresh/Chapter/FotoToon2012-04-25T06:21:12Z<p>Cbigenho: /* Add Dialogue and Titles */</p>
<hr />
<div>[[File:FotoToonIcon.png]]<br />
='''About FotoToon 12'''=<br />
The '''FotoToon''' Activity will allow you to create everything from a simple "comic" strip to a long elaborate illustrated document. You will be able to import many kinds of images into the panes of your project and add text bubbles to help tell the story. You can use photo images taken with the XO or imported from a camera, drawings made with Activities such as Paint, and images of all kinds downloaded from the web. This could include photos, charts and graphs, maps, and the like. <br><br />
This introduction to '''FotoToon''' will show you how to get started with a simple 4 panel project. If you want to learn to do more, you can watch the videos about using '''FotoToon''' that are available for viewing here (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE).<br />
<br />
='''Where to get FotoToon 12'''=<br />
'''FotoToon''' is not included on the basic 11.3.0 (.883) release of Sugar. To use it, you must download it from the Sugar Labs Activity library at: http://activities.sugarlabs.org/es-ES/sugar/addon/4253 You will find instructions for downloading this and other Activities here: (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE)<BR> You will notice that the description of the Activity and other information are in Spanish. That is because '''FotoToon''' was developed in Argentina. However, don't worry! '''FotoToon''' works in other languages as well!<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''', like many other Sugar Activities, is often updated to fix "bugs" that users report. There was one update, from version 11 to version 12 during the time this instruction chapter was written. By the time you use it, there may be others. The changes are usually minor and should not interfere with the usefulness of this information. Always try to be sure you are using the latest version.<br />
<br />
='''Using FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
=='''The Toolbars'''==<br />
<br />
=== '''The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToon12 Main Screen.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''FotoToon Toolbar''' has 13 icons including 2 with pulldown menus. The '''main FotoToon''' toolbar allows you to access many features of the Activity. Here is a description of what each of the icons will allow you to do:<br />
<br />
* 1. The '''FotoToon''' icon. When you hover your cursor over this icon you will open a small pulldown that allows you to export your work as an image. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 2. The '''Add Image''' icon. This icon allows you to add an image to your project. It can be a photo you take with the XO or digital camera, or import from the web. It can also be a picture, page, or project you create in another Sugar Activity.<br />
<br />
The next four icons allow you to add text to your drawings and photos. They include:<br />
* 3. A normal dialogue Globe<br />
* 4. A cloud shape to tell what a character is silently Thinking<br />
* 5. A dotted globe which indicates a character is talking in a Whisper<br />
* 6. An exclamation bubble to add things like "Pow!" "Bang!" and "Wham!"<br />
* 7. Is a box where you can put the Title of your project. Just above it is a box icon that allows you to add more rectangular text boxes to your project.<br />
* 8. The Movement icon allows you to add little curves to indicate motion, highlight an object with a sunburst, add some parallel lines to show horizontal or vertical motion, or add a little light bulb to show that someone had a bright idea.<br />
* 9. The circular arrow allows you to click on an object, then on this icon and rotate it clockwise 1/4 turn (90 degrees) with each click.<br />
* 10. This icon allows you to delete something you have added.<br />
* 11. This icon opens and closes the Text pulldown where you can select the font and size of your text as well as select bold, italics, or other colors for your words. Click it to open, and when finished, click again to close. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 12. The familiar stop-sign icon is one way to stop the '''FotoToon''' Activity. You can also use the keyboard shortcut: ctrl-Q.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
==='''The Text Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonTextPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
The Test Pulldown menu allows you to control the appearance of the text you add to your project. Generally, they apply to everything in the box or bubble you are currently working on. You do not have to highlight the text to change it.<br />
<br />
* 11a- Selecting this icon will change the text you are working on to '''Bold'''. Clicking it again reverts back to regular text,<br />
<br />
* 11b- Selecting this icon will change the text your are working on to ''Italics''.<br />
<br />
Note: clicking on both of these icons, in any order, will give you '''''Bold Italic''''' text. Clicking both again, in any order, will get you back to regular text.<br />
<br />
* 11c- Clicking on this icon will open the Text Color Pallete. See below for information on how to use it.<br />
<br />
* 11d- This is a non-functioning icon that identifies this as the Text Pulldown toolbar.<br />
<br />
* 11e- This little pull down allows you to choose the size of the text you are working on.<br />
<br />
* 11f- This pull down offers a choice of 37 different fonts, listed in alphabetical order. Some, such as "Ding Bats" don't actually produce anything. Be sure to test the font on your text to see if it looks the way you would like it to.<br />
<br />
==='''The Color Pallete Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:ScreenshotofFTColorPallete.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Color Pallete Pulldown''' allows you to choose the color of your font. It will apply to everything in the box or bubble but can vary from one box or bubble to the next as you choose. There are 12 preset colors you can use, or you can create a custom color by selecting one of the preset colors and dragging the sliders to give more or less Red, Green, or Blue in the selected color. The little circle at the top of the Color Pallete shows the current color. When you are satisfied with the color you have selected/modified, click on the little circle to accept the chosen color and close the Color Pallete. It may take a few seconds for the new color to appear in the text box. But, don't worry, it will!<br />
<br />
='''Learning with FotoToon 12'''=<br />
=='''Plan Ahead'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''' can be used for a wide variety of learning activities, but the general process is always similar. For the sample project in this section, we will make a 4 panel page using 4 photos. This is a good way to get started since the page can be printed on a single page. <br />
<br />
Here are the general steps you need to complete before you build your first FotoToon project:<br />
<br />
* '''Step One: Decide what your project will be about.''' You can tell a story about anything. For example, it could be about your pets, your home, your family, your town, or, even some photos you took at a party. Any topic is fine for our first project. The sample project will be about "Healthy Snacks" and the photos will be pictures of food.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Two: Make a plan.''' Before you begin you should make a plan that will guide you through the construction of your project. Some people like to draw a little sketch of each pane showing what will be in the picture and a suggestion for what words will be added. If you like the panes can each be on a separate small piece of paper so you can re-arrange them easily This is called a '''Story Board'''. You may have another way you would like to make your plan, just be sure to include information about what pictures you will use, where you will get them, and what text you plan to add.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Three: Gather your images.''' For starters, we will use images that were taken either with a camera, or using the '''Record Activity''' on the XO. Any image that can be imported to the '''Journal''' on your XO and viewed in '''Image Viewer''' can be used. It is a good idea to rename each of the photos you will be using in the Journal. The name can include the number of the pane you plan to use it in so it is easy to find when you begin putting things together.<br />
<br />
==='''Place Your Images'''===<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Journal''' and check to be sure your images are there and can be viewed in the Image Viewer (click on the file to open it and check). Be sure the images have names that include the number of the pane you plan to place them (1,2,3, or 4).<br />
<br />
* Open '''FotoToon''' and find the '''"Add Photo"''' icon (number 2 in the '''FotoToon''' main toolbar shown above). A list of available images will appear. Click on the one you want to put in the first pane. When it has loaded, you can either leave it or remove it with the minus sign icon (number 10 in the main toolbar shown above). '''Warning:''' You can only remove the last image entered. That is why it is important to number the images according to the panes you wish to place them in. After the first image has been placed, continue adding images until all four for your first project have been placed. If you decide later that you want to change their order after they have been placed, you will need to delete them and replace them in the new order. ''It is best to get your final placement before adding any text.''<br />
<br />
If you would like to use the same images that will be used in this sample project, you will find them at these links. Go to each link, upload the photo to a usb drive, plug it into your XO, and open by clicking on the image names. They will open in the Image Viewer and be automatically saved so you can access them for your project. <br />
<br />
* Pane-1 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:1-Apple-Fries.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-2 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:2-Soda-Milk.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-3 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:3-Cookies-Yogurt.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-4 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:4-HealthySnacks.png<br />
<br />
==='''Add Dialogue and Titles'''===<br />
<br />
If you have planned well with your storyboard, you will have a pretty good idea of what you want to put in your dialogue balloons and text boxes. You may even have a title in mind for your project. You can actually start this process anywhere in your project.<br />
<br />
* Making and placing your '''Title''': If you know what you would like your title to be, you can start with that. It can always be changed later. When you start a project in FotoToon there will already be a tiny box for the title in a narrow band across the top of the project window. You can drag the upper left corner of the box to enlarge it (look for the cursor arrow to change to a thinner double headed arrow). You can also move it around in the band across the top. Click on the box and type all or part of your title. Then you can change the type style and size using the pull downs in the<br />
<br />
==Extending FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Modifying FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
==Where to report problems==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Credits==<br />
<br />
<br />
== FotoToon 12==</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon&diff=270029Help Activity refresh/Chapter/FotoToon2012-04-25T00:23:20Z<p>Cbigenho: /* Add Dialogue and Titles */</p>
<hr />
<div>[[File:FotoToonIcon.png]]<br />
='''About FotoToon 12'''=<br />
The '''FotoToon''' Activity will allow you to create everything from a simple "comic" strip to a long elaborate illustrated document. You will be able to import many kinds of images into the panes of your project and add text bubbles to help tell the story. You can use photo images taken with the XO or imported from a camera, drawings made with Activities such as Paint, and images of all kinds downloaded from the web. This could include photos, charts and graphs, maps, and the like. <br><br />
This introduction to '''FotoToon''' will show you how to get started with a simple 4 panel project. If you want to learn to do more, you can watch the videos about using '''FotoToon''' that are available for viewing here (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE).<br />
<br />
='''Where to get FotoToon 12'''=<br />
'''FotoToon''' is not included on the basic 11.3.0 (.883) release of Sugar. To use it, you must download it from the Sugar Labs Activity library at: http://activities.sugarlabs.org/es-ES/sugar/addon/4253 You will find instructions for downloading this and other Activities here: (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE)<BR> You will notice that the description of the Activity and other information are in Spanish. That is because '''FotoToon''' was developed in Argentina. However, don't worry! '''FotoToon''' works in other languages as well!<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''', like many other Sugar Activities, is often updated to fix "bugs" that users report. There was one update, from version 11 to version 12 during the time this instruction chapter was written. By the time you use it, there may be others. The changes are usually minor and should not interfere with the usefulness of this information. Always try to be sure you are using the latest version.<br />
<br />
='''Using FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
=='''The Toolbars'''==<br />
<br />
=== '''The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToon12 Main Screen.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''FotoToon Toolbar''' has 13 icons including 2 with pulldown menus. The '''main FotoToon''' toolbar allows you to access many features of the Activity. Here is a description of what each of the icons will allow you to do:<br />
<br />
* 1. The '''FotoToon''' icon. When you hover your cursor over this icon you will open a small pulldown that allows you to export your work as an image. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 2. The '''Add Image''' icon. This icon allows you to add an image to your project. It can be a photo you take with the XO or digital camera, or import from the web. It can also be a picture, page, or project you create in another Sugar Activity.<br />
<br />
The next four icons allow you to add text to your drawings and photos. They include:<br />
* 3. A normal dialogue Globe<br />
* 4. A cloud shape to tell what a character is silently Thinking<br />
* 5. A dotted globe which indicates a character is talking in a Whisper<br />
* 6. An exclamation bubble to add things like "Pow!" "Bang!" and "Wham!"<br />
* 7. Is a box where you can put the Title of your project. Just above it is a box icon that allows you to add more rectangular text boxes to your project.<br />
* 8. The Movement icon allows you to add little curves to indicate motion, highlight an object with a sunburst, add some parallel lines to show horizontal or vertical motion, or add a little light bulb to show that someone had a bright idea.<br />
* 9. The circular arrow allows you to click on an object, then on this icon and rotate it clockwise 1/4 turn (90 degrees) with each click.<br />
* 10. This icon allows you to delete something you have added.<br />
* 11. This icon opens and closes the Text pulldown where you can select the font and size of your text as well as select bold, italics, or other colors for your words. Click it to open, and when finished, click again to close. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 12. The familiar stop-sign icon is one way to stop the '''FotoToon''' Activity. You can also use the keyboard shortcut: ctrl-Q.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
==='''The Text Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonTextPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
The Test Pulldown menu allows you to control the appearance of the text you add to your project. Generally, they apply to everything in the box or bubble you are currently working on. You do not have to highlight the text to change it.<br />
<br />
* 11a- Selecting this icon will change the text you are working on to '''Bold'''. Clicking it again reverts back to regular text,<br />
<br />
* 11b- Selecting this icon will change the text your are working on to ''Italics''.<br />
<br />
Note: clicking on both of these icons, in any order, will give you '''''Bold Italic''''' text. Clicking both again, in any order, will get you back to regular text.<br />
<br />
* 11c- Clicking on this icon will open the Text Color Pallete. See below for information on how to use it.<br />
<br />
* 11d- This is a non-functioning icon that identifies this as the Text Pulldown toolbar.<br />
<br />
* 11e- This little pull down allows you to choose the size of the text you are working on.<br />
<br />
* 11f- This pull down offers a choice of 37 different fonts, listed in alphabetical order. Some, such as "Ding Bats" don't actually produce anything. Be sure to test the font on your text to see if it looks the way you would like it to.<br />
<br />
==='''The Color Pallete Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:ScreenshotofFTColorPallete.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Color Pallete Pulldown''' allows you to choose the color of your font. It will apply to everything in the box or bubble but can vary from one box or bubble to the next as you choose. There are 12 preset colors you can use, or you can create a custom color by selecting one of the preset colors and dragging the sliders to give more or less Red, Green, or Blue in the selected color. The little circle at the top of the Color Pallete shows the current color. When you are satisfied with the color you have selected/modified, click on the little circle to accept the chosen color and close the Color Pallete. It may take a few seconds for the new color to appear in the text box. But, don't worry, it will!<br />
<br />
='''Learning with FotoToon 12'''=<br />
=='''Plan Ahead'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''' can be used for a wide variety of learning activities, but the general process is always similar. For the sample project in this section, we will make a 4 panel page using 4 photos. This is a good way to get started since the page can be printed on a single page. <br />
<br />
Here are the general steps you need to complete before you build your first FotoToon project:<br />
<br />
* '''Step One: Decide what your project will be about.''' You can tell a story about anything. For example, it could be about your pets, your home, your family, your town, or, even some photos you took at a party. Any topic is fine for our first project. The sample project will be about "Healthy Snacks" and the photos will be pictures of food.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Two: Make a plan.''' Before you begin you should make a plan that will guide you through the construction of your project. Some people like to draw a little sketch of each pane showing what will be in the picture and a suggestion for what words will be added. If you like the panes can each be on a separate small piece of paper so you can re-arrange them easily This is called a '''Story Board'''. You may have another way you would like to make your plan, just be sure to include information about what pictures you will use, where you will get them, and what text you plan to add.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Three: Gather your images.''' For starters, we will use images that were taken either with a camera, or using the '''Record Activity''' on the XO. Any image that can be imported to the '''Journal''' on your XO and viewed in '''Image Viewer''' can be used. It is a good idea to rename each of the photos you will be using in the Journal. The name can include the number of the pane you plan to use it in so it is easy to find when you begin putting things together.<br />
<br />
==='''Place Your Images'''===<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Journal''' and check to be sure your images are there and can be viewed in the Image Viewer (click on the file to open it and check). Be sure the images have names that include the number of the pane you plan to place them (1,2,3, or 4).<br />
<br />
* Open '''FotoToon''' and find the '''"Add Photo"''' icon (number 2 in the '''FotoToon''' main toolbar shown above). A list of available images will appear. Click on the one you want to put in the first pane. When it has loaded, you can either leave it or remove it with the minus sign icon (number 10 in the main toolbar shown above). '''Warning:''' You can only remove the last image entered. That is why it is important to number the images according to the panes you wish to place them in. After the first image has been placed, continue adding images until all four for your first project have been placed. If you decide later that you want to change their order after they have been placed, you will need to delete them and replace them in the new order. ''It is best to get your final placement before adding any text.''<br />
<br />
If you would like to use the same images that will be used in this sample project, you will find them at these links. Go to each link, upload the photo to a usb drive, plug it into your XO, and open by clicking on the image names. They will open in the Image Viewer and be automatically saved so you can access them for your project. <br />
<br />
* Pane-1 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:1-Apple-Fries.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-2 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:2-Soda-Milk.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-3 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:3-Cookies-Yogurt.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-4 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:4-HealthySnacks.png<br />
<br />
==='''Add Dialogue and Titles'''===<br />
<br />
If you have planned well with your storyboard, you will have a pretty good idea of what you want to put in your dialogue balloons and text boxes. You may even have a title in mind for your project. You can actually start this process anywhere in your project and in any pane. <br />
<br />
* Placing your '''Title''': If you know what you would like your title to be, you can start with that. It can always be changed later. The<br />
<br />
==Extending FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Modifying FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
==Where to report problems==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Credits==<br />
<br />
<br />
== FotoToon 12==</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon&diff=270028Help Activity refresh/Chapter/FotoToon2012-04-25T00:22:39Z<p>Cbigenho: /* Add Dialogue and Titles */</p>
<hr />
<div>[[File:FotoToonIcon.png]]<br />
='''About FotoToon 12'''=<br />
The '''FotoToon''' Activity will allow you to create everything from a simple "comic" strip to a long elaborate illustrated document. You will be able to import many kinds of images into the panes of your project and add text bubbles to help tell the story. You can use photo images taken with the XO or imported from a camera, drawings made with Activities such as Paint, and images of all kinds downloaded from the web. This could include photos, charts and graphs, maps, and the like. <br><br />
This introduction to '''FotoToon''' will show you how to get started with a simple 4 panel project. If you want to learn to do more, you can watch the videos about using '''FotoToon''' that are available for viewing here (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE).<br />
<br />
='''Where to get FotoToon 12'''=<br />
'''FotoToon''' is not included on the basic 11.3.0 (.883) release of Sugar. To use it, you must download it from the Sugar Labs Activity library at: http://activities.sugarlabs.org/es-ES/sugar/addon/4253 You will find instructions for downloading this and other Activities here: (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE)<BR> You will notice that the description of the Activity and other information are in Spanish. That is because '''FotoToon''' was developed in Argentina. However, don't worry! '''FotoToon''' works in other languages as well!<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''', like many other Sugar Activities, is often updated to fix "bugs" that users report. There was one update, from version 11 to version 12 during the time this instruction chapter was written. By the time you use it, there may be others. The changes are usually minor and should not interfere with the usefulness of this information. Always try to be sure you are using the latest version.<br />
<br />
='''Using FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
=='''The Toolbars'''==<br />
<br />
=== '''The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToon12 Main Screen.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''FotoToon Toolbar''' has 13 icons including 2 with pulldown menus. The '''main FotoToon''' toolbar allows you to access many features of the Activity. Here is a description of what each of the icons will allow you to do:<br />
<br />
* 1. The '''FotoToon''' icon. When you hover your cursor over this icon you will open a small pulldown that allows you to export your work as an image. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 2. The '''Add Image''' icon. This icon allows you to add an image to your project. It can be a photo you take with the XO or digital camera, or import from the web. It can also be a picture, page, or project you create in another Sugar Activity.<br />
<br />
The next four icons allow you to add text to your drawings and photos. They include:<br />
* 3. A normal dialogue Globe<br />
* 4. A cloud shape to tell what a character is silently Thinking<br />
* 5. A dotted globe which indicates a character is talking in a Whisper<br />
* 6. An exclamation bubble to add things like "Pow!" "Bang!" and "Wham!"<br />
* 7. Is a box where you can put the Title of your project. Just above it is a box icon that allows you to add more rectangular text boxes to your project.<br />
* 8. The Movement icon allows you to add little curves to indicate motion, highlight an object with a sunburst, add some parallel lines to show horizontal or vertical motion, or add a little light bulb to show that someone had a bright idea.<br />
* 9. The circular arrow allows you to click on an object, then on this icon and rotate it clockwise 1/4 turn (90 degrees) with each click.<br />
* 10. This icon allows you to delete something you have added.<br />
* 11. This icon opens and closes the Text pulldown where you can select the font and size of your text as well as select bold, italics, or other colors for your words. Click it to open, and when finished, click again to close. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 12. The familiar stop-sign icon is one way to stop the '''FotoToon''' Activity. You can also use the keyboard shortcut: ctrl-Q.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
==='''The Text Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonTextPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
The Test Pulldown menu allows you to control the appearance of the text you add to your project. Generally, they apply to everything in the box or bubble you are currently working on. You do not have to highlight the text to change it.<br />
<br />
* 11a- Selecting this icon will change the text you are working on to '''Bold'''. Clicking it again reverts back to regular text,<br />
<br />
* 11b- Selecting this icon will change the text your are working on to ''Italics''.<br />
<br />
Note: clicking on both of these icons, in any order, will give you '''''Bold Italic''''' text. Clicking both again, in any order, will get you back to regular text.<br />
<br />
* 11c- Clicking on this icon will open the Text Color Pallete. See below for information on how to use it.<br />
<br />
* 11d- This is a non-functioning icon that identifies this as the Text Pulldown toolbar.<br />
<br />
* 11e- This little pull down allows you to choose the size of the text you are working on.<br />
<br />
* 11f- This pull down offers a choice of 37 different fonts, listed in alphabetical order. Some, such as "Ding Bats" don't actually produce anything. Be sure to test the font on your text to see if it looks the way you would like it to.<br />
<br />
==='''The Color Pallete Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:ScreenshotofFTColorPallete.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Color Pallete Pulldown''' allows you to choose the color of your font. It will apply to everything in the box or bubble but can vary from one box or bubble to the next as you choose. There are 12 preset colors you can use, or you can create a custom color by selecting one of the preset colors and dragging the sliders to give more or less Red, Green, or Blue in the selected color. The little circle at the top of the Color Pallete shows the current color. When you are satisfied with the color you have selected/modified, click on the little circle to accept the chosen color and close the Color Pallete. It may take a few seconds for the new color to appear in the text box. But, don't worry, it will!<br />
<br />
='''Learning with FotoToon 12'''=<br />
=='''Plan Ahead'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''' can be used for a wide variety of learning activities, but the general process is always similar. For the sample project in this section, we will make a 4 panel page using 4 photos. This is a good way to get started since the page can be printed on a single page. <br />
<br />
Here are the general steps you need to complete before you build your first FotoToon project:<br />
<br />
* '''Step One: Decide what your project will be about.''' You can tell a story about anything. For example, it could be about your pets, your home, your family, your town, or, even some photos you took at a party. Any topic is fine for our first project. The sample project will be about "Healthy Snacks" and the photos will be pictures of food.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Two: Make a plan.''' Before you begin you should make a plan that will guide you through the construction of your project. Some people like to draw a little sketch of each pane showing what will be in the picture and a suggestion for what words will be added. If you like the panes can each be on a separate small piece of paper so you can re-arrange them easily This is called a '''Story Board'''. You may have another way you would like to make your plan, just be sure to include information about what pictures you will use, where you will get them, and what text you plan to add.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Three: Gather your images.''' For starters, we will use images that were taken either with a camera, or using the '''Record Activity''' on the XO. Any image that can be imported to the '''Journal''' on your XO and viewed in '''Image Viewer''' can be used. It is a good idea to rename each of the photos you will be using in the Journal. The name can include the number of the pane you plan to use it in so it is easy to find when you begin putting things together.<br />
<br />
==='''Place Your Images'''===<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Journal''' and check to be sure your images are there and can be viewed in the Image Viewer (click on the file to open it and check). Be sure the images have names that include the number of the pane you plan to place them (1,2,3, or 4).<br />
<br />
* Open '''FotoToon''' and find the '''"Add Photo"''' icon (number 2 in the '''FotoToon''' main toolbar shown above). A list of available images will appear. Click on the one you want to put in the first pane. When it has loaded, you can either leave it or remove it with the minus sign icon (number 10 in the main toolbar shown above). '''Warning:''' You can only remove the last image entered. That is why it is important to number the images according to the panes you wish to place them in. After the first image has been placed, continue adding images until all four for your first project have been placed. If you decide later that you want to change their order after they have been placed, you will need to delete them and replace them in the new order. ''It is best to get your final placement before adding any text.''<br />
<br />
If you would like to use the same images that will be used in this sample project, you will find them at these links. Go to each link, upload the photo to a usb drive, plug it into your XO, and open by clicking on the image names. They will open in the Image Viewer and be automatically saved so you can access them for your project. <br />
<br />
* Pane-1 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:1-Apple-Fries.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-2 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:2-Soda-Milk.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-3 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:3-Cookies-Yogurt.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-4 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:4-HealthySnacks.png<br />
<br />
==='''Add Dialogue and Titles'''===<br />
<br />
If you have planned well with your storyboard, you will have a pretty good idea of what you want to put in your dialogue balloons and text boxes. You may even have a title in mind for your project. You can actually start this process anywhere in your project and in any pane. <br />
<br />
* Placing your '''Title''': If you know what you would like your title to be, you can start with that. It can always be changed later. <br />
The<br />
<br />
==Extending FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Modifying FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
==Where to report problems==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Credits==<br />
<br />
<br />
== FotoToon 12==</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon&diff=270027Help Activity refresh/Chapter/FotoToon2012-04-25T00:20:58Z<p>Cbigenho: /* Add Dialogue and Titles */</p>
<hr />
<div>[[File:FotoToonIcon.png]]<br />
='''About FotoToon 12'''=<br />
The '''FotoToon''' Activity will allow you to create everything from a simple "comic" strip to a long elaborate illustrated document. You will be able to import many kinds of images into the panes of your project and add text bubbles to help tell the story. You can use photo images taken with the XO or imported from a camera, drawings made with Activities such as Paint, and images of all kinds downloaded from the web. This could include photos, charts and graphs, maps, and the like. <br><br />
This introduction to '''FotoToon''' will show you how to get started with a simple 4 panel project. If you want to learn to do more, you can watch the videos about using '''FotoToon''' that are available for viewing here (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE).<br />
<br />
='''Where to get FotoToon 12'''=<br />
'''FotoToon''' is not included on the basic 11.3.0 (.883) release of Sugar. To use it, you must download it from the Sugar Labs Activity library at: http://activities.sugarlabs.org/es-ES/sugar/addon/4253 You will find instructions for downloading this and other Activities here: (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE)<BR> You will notice that the description of the Activity and other information are in Spanish. That is because '''FotoToon''' was developed in Argentina. However, don't worry! '''FotoToon''' works in other languages as well!<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''', like many other Sugar Activities, is often updated to fix "bugs" that users report. There was one update, from version 11 to version 12 during the time this instruction chapter was written. By the time you use it, there may be others. The changes are usually minor and should not interfere with the usefulness of this information. Always try to be sure you are using the latest version.<br />
<br />
='''Using FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
=='''The Toolbars'''==<br />
<br />
=== '''The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToon12 Main Screen.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''FotoToon Toolbar''' has 13 icons including 2 with pulldown menus. The '''main FotoToon''' toolbar allows you to access many features of the Activity. Here is a description of what each of the icons will allow you to do:<br />
<br />
* 1. The '''FotoToon''' icon. When you hover your cursor over this icon you will open a small pulldown that allows you to export your work as an image. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 2. The '''Add Image''' icon. This icon allows you to add an image to your project. It can be a photo you take with the XO or digital camera, or import from the web. It can also be a picture, page, or project you create in another Sugar Activity.<br />
<br />
The next four icons allow you to add text to your drawings and photos. They include:<br />
* 3. A normal dialogue Globe<br />
* 4. A cloud shape to tell what a character is silently Thinking<br />
* 5. A dotted globe which indicates a character is talking in a Whisper<br />
* 6. An exclamation bubble to add things like "Pow!" "Bang!" and "Wham!"<br />
* 7. Is a box where you can put the Title of your project. Just above it is a box icon that allows you to add more rectangular text boxes to your project.<br />
* 8. The Movement icon allows you to add little curves to indicate motion, highlight an object with a sunburst, add some parallel lines to show horizontal or vertical motion, or add a little light bulb to show that someone had a bright idea.<br />
* 9. The circular arrow allows you to click on an object, then on this icon and rotate it clockwise 1/4 turn (90 degrees) with each click.<br />
* 10. This icon allows you to delete something you have added.<br />
* 11. This icon opens and closes the Text pulldown where you can select the font and size of your text as well as select bold, italics, or other colors for your words. Click it to open, and when finished, click again to close. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 12. The familiar stop-sign icon is one way to stop the '''FotoToon''' Activity. You can also use the keyboard shortcut: ctrl-Q.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
==='''The Text Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonTextPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
The Test Pulldown menu allows you to control the appearance of the text you add to your project. Generally, they apply to everything in the box or bubble you are currently working on. You do not have to highlight the text to change it.<br />
<br />
* 11a- Selecting this icon will change the text you are working on to '''Bold'''. Clicking it again reverts back to regular text,<br />
<br />
* 11b- Selecting this icon will change the text your are working on to ''Italics''.<br />
<br />
Note: clicking on both of these icons, in any order, will give you '''''Bold Italic''''' text. Clicking both again, in any order, will get you back to regular text.<br />
<br />
* 11c- Clicking on this icon will open the Text Color Pallete. See below for information on how to use it.<br />
<br />
* 11d- This is a non-functioning icon that identifies this as the Text Pulldown toolbar.<br />
<br />
* 11e- This little pull down allows you to choose the size of the text you are working on.<br />
<br />
* 11f- This pull down offers a choice of 37 different fonts, listed in alphabetical order. Some, such as "Ding Bats" don't actually produce anything. Be sure to test the font on your text to see if it looks the way you would like it to.<br />
<br />
==='''The Color Pallete Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:ScreenshotofFTColorPallete.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''Color Pallete Pulldown''' allows you to choose the color of your font. It will apply to everything in the box or bubble but can vary from one box or bubble to the next as you choose. There are 12 preset colors you can use, or you can create a custom color by selecting one of the preset colors and dragging the sliders to give more or less Red, Green, or Blue in the selected color. The little circle at the top of the Color Pallete shows the current color. When you are satisfied with the color you have selected/modified, click on the little circle to accept the chosen color and close the Color Pallete. It may take a few seconds for the new color to appear in the text box. But, don't worry, it will!<br />
<br />
='''Learning with FotoToon 12'''=<br />
=='''Plan Ahead'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''' can be used for a wide variety of learning activities, but the general process is always similar. For the sample project in this section, we will make a 4 panel page using 4 photos. This is a good way to get started since the page can be printed on a single page. <br />
<br />
Here are the general steps you need to complete before you build your first FotoToon project:<br />
<br />
* '''Step One: Decide what your project will be about.''' You can tell a story about anything. For example, it could be about your pets, your home, your family, your town, or, even some photos you took at a party. Any topic is fine for our first project. The sample project will be about "Healthy Snacks" and the photos will be pictures of food.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Two: Make a plan.''' Before you begin you should make a plan that will guide you through the construction of your project. Some people like to draw a little sketch of each pane showing what will be in the picture and a suggestion for what words will be added. If you like the panes can each be on a separate small piece of paper so you can re-arrange them easily This is called a '''Story Board'''. You may have another way you would like to make your plan, just be sure to include information about what pictures you will use, where you will get them, and what text you plan to add.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Three: Gather your images.''' For starters, we will use images that were taken either with a camera, or using the '''Record Activity''' on the XO. Any image that can be imported to the '''Journal''' on your XO and viewed in '''Image Viewer''' can be used. It is a good idea to rename each of the photos you will be using in the Journal. The name can include the number of the pane you plan to use it in so it is easy to find when you begin putting things together.<br />
<br />
==='''Place Your Images'''===<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Journal''' and check to be sure your images are there and can be viewed in the Image Viewer (click on the file to open it and check). Be sure the images have names that include the number of the pane you plan to place them (1,2,3, or 4).<br />
<br />
* Open '''FotoToon''' and find the '''"Add Photo"''' icon (number 2 in the '''FotoToon''' main toolbar shown above). A list of available images will appear. Click on the one you want to put in the first pane. When it has loaded, you can either leave it or remove it with the minus sign icon (number 10 in the main toolbar shown above). '''Warning:''' You can only remove the last image entered. That is why it is important to number the images according to the panes you wish to place them in. After the first image has been placed, continue adding images until all four for your first project have been placed. If you decide later that you want to change their order after they have been placed, you will need to delete them and replace them in the new order. ''It is best to get your final placement before adding any text.''<br />
<br />
If you would like to use the same images that will be used in this sample project, you will find them at these links. Go to each link, upload the photo to a usb drive, plug it into your XO, and open by clicking on the image names. They will open in the Image Viewer and be automatically saved so you can access them for your project. <br />
<br />
* Pane-1 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:1-Apple-Fries.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-2 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:2-Soda-Milk.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-3 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:3-Cookies-Yogurt.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-4 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:4-HealthySnacks.png<br />
<br />
==='''Add Dialogue and Titles'''===<br />
<br />
If you have planned well with your storyboard, you will have a pretty good idea of what you want to put in your dialogue balloons and text boxes. You may even have a title in mind for your project. You can actually start this process anywhere in your project and in any pane. If you know what you would like your title to be, you can start with that. It can always be changed later. <br />
The<br />
<br />
==Extending FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Modifying FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
==Where to report problems==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Credits==<br />
<br />
<br />
== FotoToon 12==</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon&diff=270008Help Activity refresh/Chapter/FotoToon2012-04-24T18:46:44Z<p>Cbigenho: /* The Export Pulldown */</p>
<hr />
<div>[[File:FotoToonIcon.png]]<br />
='''About FotoToon 12'''=<br />
The '''FotoToon''' Activity will allow you to create everything from a simple "comic" strip to a long elaborate illustrated document. You will be able to import many kinds of images into the panes of your project and add text bubbles to help tell the story. You can use photo images taken with the XO or imported from a camera, drawings made with Activities such as Paint, and images of all kinds downloaded from the web. This could include photos, charts and graphs, maps, and the like. <br><br />
This introduction to '''FotoToon''' will show you how to get started with a simple 4 panel project. If you want to learn to do more, you can watch the videos about using '''FotoToon''' that are available for viewing here (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE).<br />
<br />
='''Where to get FotoToon 12'''=<br />
'''FotoToon''' is not included on the basic 11.3.0 (.883) release of Sugar. To use it, you must download it from the Sugar Labs Activity library at: http://activities.sugarlabs.org/es-ES/sugar/addon/4253 You will find instructions for downloading this and other Activities here: (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE)<BR> You will notice that the description of the Activity and other information are in Spanish. That is because '''FotoToon''' was developed in Argentina. However, don't worry! '''FotoToon''' works in other languages as well!<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''', like many other Sugar Activities, is often updated to fix "bugs" that users report. There was one update, from version 11 to version 12 during the time this instruction chapter was written. By the time you use it, there may be others. The changes are usually minor and should not interfere with the usefulness of this information. Always try to be sure you are using the latest version.<br />
<br />
='''Using FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
=='''The Toolbars'''==<br />
<br />
=== '''The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToon12 Main Screen.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''FotoToon Toolbar''' has 13 icons including 2 with pulldown menus. The '''main FotoToon''' toolbar allows you to access many features of the Activity. Here is a description of what each of the icons will allow you to do:<br />
<br />
* 1. The '''FotoToon''' icon. When you hover your cursor over this icon you will open a small pulldown that allows you to export your work as an image. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 2. The '''Add Image''' icon. This icon allows you to add an image to your project. It can be a photo you take with the XO or digital camera, or import from the web. It can also be a picture, page, or project you create in another Sugar Activity.<br />
<br />
The next four icons allow you to add text to your drawings and photos. They include:<br />
* 3. A normal dialogue Globe<br />
* 4. A cloud shape to tell what a character is silently Thinking<br />
* 5. A dotted globe which indicates a character is talking in a Whisper<br />
* 6. An exclamation bubble to add things like "Pow!" "Bang!" and "Wham!"<br />
* 7. Is a box where you can put the Title of your project. Just above it is a box icon that allows you to add more rectangular text boxes to your project.<br />
* 8. The Movement icon allows you to add little curves to indicate motion, highlight an object with a sunburst, add some parallel lines to show horizontal or vertical motion, or add a little light bulb to show that someone had a bright idea.<br />
* 9. The circular arrow allows you to click on an object, then on this icon and rotate it clockwise 1/4 turn (90 degrees) with each click.<br />
* 10. This icon allows you to delete something you have added.<br />
* 11. This icon opens the Text pulldown where you can select the font and size of your text as well as select bold, italics, or other colors for your words. Click it to open, and when finished, click again to close. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 12. The familiar stop-sign icon is one way to stop the '''FotoToon''' Activity. You can also use the keyboard shortcut: ctrl-Q.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
* 1a- This little panel allows you to name your project before you export it as an image. If you do nothing, it will appear in the Journal as, "FotoToon as image." If you give it a name, such as "My Project-1" before exporting it will appear in the Journal as "My Project-1 as image". This will make it easier to find later in the Journal. Just erase the FotoToon label and replace it with the title you want to use. If you forget to name it when saving, you can always go to the Journal and select and rename it.<br />
<br />
* 1b- This greyed out icon for home view is currently inactive.<br />
<br />
* 1c- Click on this icon to export your project as an image. The export will just show your project. The tool bars and other things on the screen will not be included. If you wish a screen shot of the entire screen, you can make one by using the usual alt-1 (press the alt key and the 1 key at the same time).<br />
<br />
==='''The Text Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonTextPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
==='''The Color Pallete Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:ScreenshotofFTColorPallete.png]]<br />
<br />
='''Learning with FotoToon 12'''=<br />
=='''Plan Ahead'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''' can be used for a wide variety of learning activities, but the general process is always similar. For the sample project in this section, we will make a 4 panel page using 4 photos. This is a good way to get started since the page can be printed on a single page. <br />
<br />
Here are the general steps you need to complete before you build your first FotoToon project:<br />
<br />
* '''Step One: Decide what your project will be about.''' You can tell a story about anything. For example, it could be about your pets, your home, your family, your town, or, even some photos you took at a party. Any topic is fine for our first project. The sample project will be about "Healthy Snacks" and the photos will be pictures of food.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Two: Make a plan.''' Before you begin you should make a plan that will guide you through the construction of your project. Some people like to draw a little sketch of each pane showing what will be in the picture and a suggestion for what words will be added. If you like the panes can each be on a separate small piece of paper so you can re-arrange them easily This is called a '''Story Board'''. You may have another way you would like to make your plan, just be sure to include information about what pictures you will use, where you will get them, and what text you plan to add.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Three: Gather your images.''' For starters, we will use images that were taken either with a camera, or using the '''Record Activity''' on the XO. Any image that can be imported to the '''Journal''' on your XO and viewed in '''Image Viewer''' can be used. It is a good idea to rename each of the photos you will be using in the Journal. The name can include the number of the pane you plan to use it in so it is easy to find when you begin putting things together.<br />
<br />
==='''Place Your Images'''===<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Journal''' and check to be sure your images are there and can be viewed in the Image Viewer (click on the file to open it and check). Be sure the images have names that include the number of the pane you plan to place them (1,2,3, or 4).<br />
<br />
* Open '''FotoToon''' and find the '''"Add Photo"''' icon (number 2 in the '''FotoToon''' main toolbar shown above). A list of available images will appear. Click on the one you want to put in the first pane. When it has loaded, you can either leave it or remove it with the minus sign icon (number 10 in the main toolbar shown above). '''Warning:''' You can only remove the last image entered. That is why it is important to number the images according to the panes you wish to place them in. After the first image has been placed, continue adding images until all four for your first project have been placed. If you decide later that you want to change their order after they have been placed, you will need to delete them and replace them in the new order. ''It is best to get your final placement before adding any text.''<br />
<br />
If you would like to use the same images that will be used in this sample project, you will find them at these links. Go to each link, upload the photo to a usb drive, plug it into your XO, and open by clicking on the image names. They will open in the Image Viewer and be automatically saved so you can access them for your project. <br />
<br />
* Pane-1 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:1-Apple-Fries.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-2 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:2-Soda-Milk.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-3 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:3-Cookies-Yogurt.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-4 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:4-HealthySnacks.png<br />
<br />
==='''Add Dialogue and Titles'''===<br />
<br />
==Extending FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Modifying FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
==Where to report problems==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Credits==<br />
<br />
<br />
== FotoToon 12==</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon&diff=270003Help Activity refresh/Chapter/FotoToon2012-04-24T17:55:13Z<p>Cbigenho: </p>
<hr />
<div>[[File:FotoToonIcon.png]]<br />
='''About FotoToon 12'''=<br />
The '''FotoToon''' Activity will allow you to create everything from a simple "comic" strip to a long elaborate illustrated document. You will be able to import many kinds of images into the panes of your project and add text bubbles to help tell the story. You can use photo images taken with the XO or imported from a camera, drawings made with Activities such as Paint, and images of all kinds downloaded from the web. This could include photos, charts and graphs, maps, and the like. <br><br />
This introduction to '''FotoToon''' will show you how to get started with a simple 4 panel project. If you want to learn to do more, you can watch the videos about using '''FotoToon''' that are available for viewing here (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE).<br />
<br />
='''Where to get FotoToon 12'''=<br />
'''FotoToon''' is not included on the basic 11.3.0 (.883) release of Sugar. To use it, you must download it from the Sugar Labs Activity library at: http://activities.sugarlabs.org/es-ES/sugar/addon/4253 You will find instructions for downloading this and other Activities here: (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE)<BR> You will notice that the description of the Activity and other information are in Spanish. That is because '''FotoToon''' was developed in Argentina. However, don't worry! '''FotoToon''' works in other languages as well!<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''', like many other Sugar Activities, is often updated to fix "bugs" that users report. There was one update, from version 11 to version 12 during the time this instruction chapter was written. By the time you use it, there may be others. The changes are usually minor and should not interfere with the usefulness of this information. Always try to be sure you are using the latest version.<br />
<br />
='''Using FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
=='''The Toolbars'''==<br />
<br />
=== '''The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToon12 Main Screen.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''FotoToon Toolbar''' has 13 icons including 2 with pulldown menus. The '''main FotoToon''' toolbar allows you to access many features of the Activity. Here is a description of what each of the icons will allow you to do:<br />
<br />
* 1. The '''FotoToon''' icon. When you hover your cursor over this icon you will open a small pulldown that allows you to export your work as an image. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 2. The '''Add Image''' icon. This icon allows you to add an image to your project. It can be a photo you take with the XO or digital camera, or import from the web. It can also be a picture, page, or project you create in another Sugar Activity.<br />
<br />
The next four icons allow you to add text to your drawings and photos. They include:<br />
* 3. A normal dialogue Globe<br />
* 4. A cloud shape to tell what a character is silently Thinking<br />
* 5. A dotted globe which indicates a character is talking in a Whisper<br />
* 6. An exclamation bubble to add things like "Pow!" "Bang!" and "Wham!"<br />
* 7. Is a box where you can put the Title of your project. Just above it is a box icon that allows you to add more rectangular text boxes to your project.<br />
* 8. The Movement icon allows you to add little curves to indicate motion, highlight an object with a sunburst, add some parallel lines to show horizontal or vertical motion, or add a little light bulb to show that someone had a bright idea.<br />
* 9. The circular arrow allows you to click on an object, then on this icon and rotate it clockwise 1/4 turn (90 degrees) with each click.<br />
* 10. This icon allows you to delete something you have added.<br />
* 11. This icon opens the Text pulldown where you can select the font and size of your text as well as select bold, italics, or other colors for your words. Click it to open, and when finished, click again to close. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 12. The familiar stop-sign icon is one way to stop the '''FotoToon''' Activity. You can also use the keyboard shortcut: ctrl-Q.<br />
<br />
==='''The Export Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
<br />
==='''The Text Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonTextPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
==='''The Color Pallete Pulldown'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:ScreenshotofFTColorPallete.png]]<br />
<br />
='''Learning with FotoToon 12'''=<br />
=='''Plan Ahead'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''' can be used for a wide variety of learning activities, but the general process is always similar. For the sample project in this section, we will make a 4 panel page using 4 photos. This is a good way to get started since the page can be printed on a single page. <br />
<br />
Here are the general steps you need to complete before you build your first FotoToon project:<br />
<br />
* '''Step One: Decide what your project will be about.''' You can tell a story about anything. For example, it could be about your pets, your home, your family, your town, or, even some photos you took at a party. Any topic is fine for our first project. The sample project will be about "Healthy Snacks" and the photos will be pictures of food.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Two: Make a plan.''' Before you begin you should make a plan that will guide you through the construction of your project. Some people like to draw a little sketch of each pane showing what will be in the picture and a suggestion for what words will be added. If you like the panes can each be on a separate small piece of paper so you can re-arrange them easily This is called a '''Story Board'''. You may have another way you would like to make your plan, just be sure to include information about what pictures you will use, where you will get them, and what text you plan to add.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Three: Gather your images.''' For starters, we will use images that were taken either with a camera, or using the '''Record Activity''' on the XO. Any image that can be imported to the '''Journal''' on your XO and viewed in '''Image Viewer''' can be used. It is a good idea to rename each of the photos you will be using in the Journal. The name can include the number of the pane you plan to use it in so it is easy to find when you begin putting things together.<br />
<br />
==='''Place Your Images'''===<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Journal''' and check to be sure your images are there and can be viewed in the Image Viewer (click on the file to open it and check). Be sure the images have names that include the number of the pane you plan to place them (1,2,3, or 4).<br />
<br />
* Open '''FotoToon''' and find the '''"Add Photo"''' icon (number 2 in the '''FotoToon''' main toolbar shown above). A list of available images will appear. Click on the one you want to put in the first pane. When it has loaded, you can either leave it or remove it with the minus sign icon (number 10 in the main toolbar shown above). '''Warning:''' You can only remove the last image entered. That is why it is important to number the images according to the panes you wish to place them in. After the first image has been placed, continue adding images until all four for your first project have been placed. If you decide later that you want to change their order after they have been placed, you will need to delete them and replace them in the new order. ''It is best to get your final placement before adding any text.''<br />
<br />
If you would like to use the same images that will be used in this sample project, you will find them at these links. Go to each link, upload the photo to a usb drive, plug it into your XO, and open by clicking on the image names. They will open in the Image Viewer and be automatically saved so you can access them for your project. <br />
<br />
* Pane-1 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:1-Apple-Fries.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-2 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:2-Soda-Milk.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-3 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:3-Cookies-Yogurt.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-4 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:4-HealthySnacks.png<br />
<br />
==='''Add Dialogue and Titles'''===<br />
<br />
==Extending FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Modifying FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
==Where to report problems==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Credits==<br />
<br />
<br />
== FotoToon 12==</div>Cbigenhohttp://wiki.laptop.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=Help_Activity_refresh/Chapter/FotoToon&diff=270002Help Activity refresh/Chapter/FotoToon2012-04-24T17:51:49Z<p>Cbigenho: /* The Toolbars */</p>
<hr />
<div>[[File:FotoToonIcon.png]]<br />
='''About FotoToon 12'''=<br />
The '''FotoToon''' Activity will allow you to create everything from a simple "comic" strip to a long elaborate illustrated document. You will be able to import many kinds of images into the panes of your project and add text bubbles to help tell the story. You can use photo images taken with the XO or imported from a camera, drawings made with Activities such as Paint, and images of all kinds downloaded from the web. This could include photos, charts and graphs, maps, and the like. <br><br />
This introduction to '''FotoToon''' will show you how to get started with a simple 4 panel project. If you want to learn to do more, you can watch the videos about using '''FotoToon''' that are available for viewing here (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE).<br />
<br />
='''Where to get FotoToon 12'''=<br />
'''FotoToon''' is not included on the basic 11.3.0 (.883) release of Sugar. To use it, you must download it from the Sugar Labs Activity library at: http://activities.sugarlabs.org/es-ES/sugar/addon/4253 You will find instructions for downloading this and other Activities here: (INSERT LINK WHEN AVAILABLE)<BR> You will notice that the description of the Activity and other information are in Spanish. That is because '''FotoToon''' was developed in Argentina. However, don't worry! '''FotoToon''' works in other languages as well!<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''', like many other Sugar Activities, is often updated to fix "bugs" that users report. There was one update, from version 11 to version 12 during the time this instruction chapter was written. By the time you use it, there may be others. The changes are usually minor and should not interfere with the usefulness of this information. Always try to be sure you are using the latest version.<br />
<br />
='''Using FotoToon 12'''=<br />
<br />
=='''The Toolbars'''==<br />
<br />
* '''The Main FotoToon 12 Toolbar'''<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToon12 Main Screen.png]]<br />
<br />
The '''FotoToon Toolbar''' has 13 icons including 2 with pulldown menus. The '''main FotoToon''' toolbar allows you to access many features of the Activity. Here is a description of what each of the icons will allow you to do:<br />
<br />
* 1. The '''FotoToon''' icon. When you hover your cursor over this icon you will open a small pulldown that allows you to export your work as an image. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 2. The '''Add Image''' icon. This icon allows you to add an image to your project. It can be a photo you take with the XO or digital camera, or import from the web. It can also be a picture, page, or project you create in another Sugar Activity.<br />
<br />
The next four icons allow you to add text to your drawings and photos. They include:<br />
* 3. A normal dialogue Globe<br />
* 4. A cloud shape to tell what a character is silently Thinking<br />
* 5. A dotted globe which indicates a character is talking in a Whisper<br />
* 6. An exclamation bubble to add things like "Pow!" "Bang!" and "Wham!"<br />
* 7. Is a box where you can put the Title of your project. Just above it is a box icon that allows you to add more rectangular text boxes to your project.<br />
* 8. The Movement icon allows you to add little curves to indicate motion, highlight an object with a sunburst, add some parallel lines to show horizontal or vertical motion, or add a little light bulb to show that someone had a bright idea.<br />
* 9. The circular arrow allows you to click on an object, then on this icon and rotate it clockwise 1/4 turn (90 degrees) with each click.<br />
* 10. This icon allows you to delete something you have added.<br />
* 11. This icon opens the Text pulldown where you can select the font and size of your text as well as select bold, italics, or other colors for your words. Click it to open, and when finished, click again to close. See below for more details.<br />
<br />
* 12. The familiar stop-sign icon is one way to stop the '''FotoToon''' Activity. You can also use the keyboard shortcut: ctrl-Q.<br />
<br />
'''The Export Pulldown'''<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonExportPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
<br />
'''The Text Pulldown'''<br />
<br />
[[File:FotoToonTextPulldown.png]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''The Color Pallete Pulldown'''<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:ScreenshotofFTColorPallete.png]]<br />
<br />
='''Learning with FotoToon 12'''=<br />
=='''Plan Ahead'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
'''FotoToon''' can be used for a wide variety of learning activities, but the general process is always similar. For the sample project in this section, we will make a 4 panel page using 4 photos. This is a good way to get started since the page can be printed on a single page. <br />
<br />
Here are the general steps you need to complete before you build your first FotoToon project:<br />
<br />
* '''Step One: Decide what your project will be about.''' You can tell a story about anything. For example, it could be about your pets, your home, your family, your town, or, even some photos you took at a party. Any topic is fine for our first project. The sample project will be about "Healthy Snacks" and the photos will be pictures of food.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Two: Make a plan.''' Before you begin you should make a plan that will guide you through the construction of your project. Some people like to draw a little sketch of each pane showing what will be in the picture and a suggestion for what words will be added. If you like the panes can each be on a separate small piece of paper so you can re-arrange them easily This is called a '''Story Board'''. You may have another way you would like to make your plan, just be sure to include information about what pictures you will use, where you will get them, and what text you plan to add.<br />
<br />
* '''Step Three: Gather your images.''' For starters, we will use images that were taken either with a camera, or using the '''Record Activity''' on the XO. Any image that can be imported to the '''Journal''' on your XO and viewed in '''Image Viewer''' can be used. It is a good idea to rename each of the photos you will be using in the Journal. The name can include the number of the pane you plan to use it in so it is easy to find when you begin putting things together.<br />
<br />
==='''Place Your Images'''===<br />
<br />
* Open the '''Journal''' and check to be sure your images are there and can be viewed in the Image Viewer (click on the file to open it and check). Be sure the images have names that include the number of the pane you plan to place them (1,2,3, or 4).<br />
<br />
* Open '''FotoToon''' and find the '''"Add Photo"''' icon (number 2 in the '''FotoToon''' main toolbar shown above). A list of available images will appear. Click on the one you want to put in the first pane. When it has loaded, you can either leave it or remove it with the minus sign icon (number 10 in the main toolbar shown above). '''Warning:''' You can only remove the last image entered. That is why it is important to number the images according to the panes you wish to place them in. After the first image has been placed, continue adding images until all four for your first project have been placed. If you decide later that you want to change their order after they have been placed, you will need to delete them and replace them in the new order. ''It is best to get your final placement before adding any text.''<br />
<br />
If you would like to use the same images that will be used in this sample project, you will find them at these links. Go to each link, upload the photo to a usb drive, plug it into your XO, and open by clicking on the image names. They will open in the Image Viewer and be automatically saved so you can access them for your project. <br />
<br />
* Pane-1 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:1-Apple-Fries.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-2 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:2-Soda-Milk.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-3 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:3-Cookies-Yogurt.png<br />
<br />
* Pane-4 http://wiki.laptop.org/go/File:4-HealthySnacks.png<br />
<br />
==='''Add Dialogue and Titles'''===<br />
<br />
==Extending FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Modifying FotoToon 12==<br />
<br />
==Where to report problems==<br />
<br />
<br />
==Credits==<br />
<br />
<br />
== FotoToon 12==</div>Cbigenho